Download Sharp ARFX13 - Fax Interface Card Service manual
Transcript
SERVICE MANUAL CODE: 00ZAR203E/S2E DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM/DIGITAL COPIER MODEL AR-203E AR-203E X AR-M200 AR-M201 AR-5420 (The descriptions of the AR-203E X are same as those of the AR-203E unless otherwise specified.) CONTENTS [1] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 [2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 [3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 [4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 [5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 [6] COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 [7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 [8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 [9] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 [10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 [11] MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1 [12] USER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1 [13] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1 [14] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1 Parts marked with “ ” are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set. SHARP CORPORATION This document has been published to be used for after sales service only. The contents are subject to change without notice. CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040 of the CDRH standard and IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved on the eye’s retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina. The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time of servicing. 1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as a unit, not as individual parts. 2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, toner cartridge, and drum cartridge. 3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected when removing and installing the optical system. 4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch. Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot. CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION, WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERBRÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. LASER WAVE – LENGTH : 770 ~ 795nm Pulse times : 12.88µs ± 12.88ns/7mm Out put power : MAX 0.2mW VARO ! AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN. ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING VED ÅBNING, NÅR SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR STRÅLNING. VARNING ! OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRREN ÄR URKOPPLAD. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. – STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.18 MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and is maintained constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC). Even if the APC circuit fails in operation for some reason, the maximum output power will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1 MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessible emission level of 42 MICRO-WATT which is still-less than the limit of CLASS-1 laser product. Caution This product contains a low power laser device. To ensure continued safety do not remove any cover or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTÄVÄLLE NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE. VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS FÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOM ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1. The foregoing is applicable only to the 220V model, 230V model and 240V model. LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT CONTENTS [1] [2] [3] GENERAL [7] 1. Outline of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 SPECIFICATIONS 2. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 1. Basic Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 2. Operation specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 B. Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 3. Copy performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 C. Drive system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 4. GDI printer (AR-203E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 3. Laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 5. SPLC printer (AR-M200/M201). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 A. Basic structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 6. Scan function (AR-203E/M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 B. Laser beam path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 C. Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4. Fuser section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 A. General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 A. Europe Subsidiary (AR-203E/5420/M200/M201), SCA/SCNZ (AR-203E/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 5. Paper feed section and paper transport section . . . . . . 7-4 B. Asia Subsidiary (AR-203E/M201). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 A. Paper transport path and general operations . . . . . . 7-4 C. SMEF/Distributor (AR-203E/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 6. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/ document transport (Duplex model) (AR-M201 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 D. SRH (AR-203E/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 2. Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 A. Initial state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 3. Production control number (lot No.) identification . . . . . 3-2 B. Front copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 4. Toner cartridge replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 [4] 2. Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 3. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 A. AR-203E/5420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 B. AR-M200/M201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4. Motors and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 5. Sensors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 6. PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 7. Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 1. Copier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 2. Cautions on handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 3. Checking packed components and accessories. . . . . . 5-1 4. Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5. Removing protective packing materials . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 6. Developer unit installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 7. Toner cartridge installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 8. Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 9. Power to copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 10. Software (AR-203E/M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 A. Before installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 B. Installing the software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 C. Setting up Button Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 11. Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 A. USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 12. Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 13. Scanner moisture-proof kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 A. Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 B. Precautions at installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 C. Attachment method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 [6] C. Back copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 1. Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 [5] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 1. Major functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 7. Shifter (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 [8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 1. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 B. Drum replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 C. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 D. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 E. Charger wire cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 F. Charger wire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 2. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 3. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 4. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 5. Tray paper feed/transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 6. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 D. Pressure plate holder attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 7. Rear frame section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 COPY PROCESS A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 1. Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 2. Outline of print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 3. Actual print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 8 Power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 A. Overall block diagram (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . 13-1 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 B. Overall block diagram (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . 13-2 9. DV unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 2. Actual wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 A. Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 B. DV seal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 C. DV blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 C. SPF unit (AR-203E optional only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 D. DV doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 D. RSPF unit (AR-M200/M201 optional only) . . . . . . . 13-5 E. DV sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 E. 2nd cassette unit (AR-203E/M200/M201 optional only) . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 10. Duplex motor section (AR-M201 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 [9] [13] ELECTRICAL SECTION A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 F. Network box and FAX (AR-M200/M201 optional only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 3. Signal name list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 11. Reverse roller section (AR-M201 only). . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 4. Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 C. OPE PWB (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37 ADJUSTMENTS 1. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 B. Image position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 2. Copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 A. Copy density adjustment timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 B. Note for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . 9-4 D. Features of copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 E. Copy density adjustment procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 3. High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 A. Main charger (Grid bias). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 B. DV bias check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 4. Duplex adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for duplex copying (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode (AR-M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 5. Automatic black level correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 [10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 1. Entering the simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 2. Key rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 3. List of simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 4. Descriptions of various simulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 5. Trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 A. Trouble codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 B. Details of trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 [11] MAINTENANCE 1. Maintenance table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 2. Maintenance display system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 3. Remaining toner indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 [12] USER PROGRAM 1. Functions that can be set with user programs . . . . . . 12-1 2. Toner save mode (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 3. User programs (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 4. User programs (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 A. Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 B. Print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 D. OPERATION PWB (AR-M200/M201). . . . . . . . . . 13-38 [14] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures) . . . . 14-1 2. Download procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 3. Version acquisition procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 5. Installing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 [1] GENERAL 1. Major functions Configurations Item CPM (A4) PPM (A4) Model AR-203E 20CPM 15PPM SB/ MB MB 2 Tray SPF R-SPF Opt Color GDI SPLC EDuplex Shifter Scanner printer printer SORT ✕ Opt — AR-5420 20CPM AR-M200 20CPM 20PPM MB MB ✕ Opt ✕ ✕ ✕ Opt AR-M201 20CPM 20PPM MB Opt ✕ Opt ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ USB ✕ ✕ (2.0 full) ✕ RJ45 FAX External NIC ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Opt ✕ Opt ✕ Opt Opt (2.0 Hi) ✕ (2.0 Hi) Descriptions of items CPM: Copy speed (Copies Per Minute) PPM: Print speed (Print Per Minute) SB/MB: SB = Manual feed single bypass, MB = Manual feed multi-bypass 2 Tray: Second cassette unit (AR-D33) SPF: Original feed unit (AR-SP9) R-SPF: Duplex original feed unit (AR-RP9) Color Scanner: Color scanner function GDI printer: GDI printer function with USB. SPLC printer: SPLC printer function with USB. E-SORT: Electronic sort function Duplex: Auto duplex copy/print function Shifter: Job separator function USB: Interface port (USB) RJ45: Interface port (Network) FAX: FAX function (AR-FX13) External NIC: AR-NB2A AR-203E/AR-5420 AR-M200/AR-M201 (Options) AR-RP9 AR-D33 Descriptions of table : Standard provision : No function or no option available Opt: Option AR-SP9 AR-NB2A AR-FX13 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 GENERAL 1 - 1 [2] SPECIFICATIONS 1. Basic Specifications Item Type Copy system Segment (class) Copier dimensions Weight (Approximately) Desktop Dry, electrostatic Digital personal copier AR-203E/5420: 518mm (W) x 445mm (D) x 298mm (H) (20-1/2" (W) x 17-5/8" (D) x 11-3/4" (H)) AR-M200/M201: 518mm (W) x 452mm (D) x 298mm (H) (20-1/2" (W) x 17-7/8" (D) x 11-3/4" (H)) AR-203E/5420: 16.6kg (36.5 lbs.) Toner cartridge not included AR-M200: 19.8kg (43.7 lbs.) AR-M201: 20.5kg (45.2 lbs.) 2. Operation specifications Paper feed section Section, item Paper feed system AB system Tray paper feed section Multi-bypass paper feed section Inch system Tray paper feed section Multi-bypass paper feed section Details Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Remark Paper exit section Originals Optical section Scanning section Exit way Capacity of output tray Original set Max. original size Original kinds Original size detection Scanning system CCD sensor Lighting lamp Resolution Type Voltage Power consumption Output data Writing section Image forming Writing system Laser unit Photoconductor Charger Developing Cleaning Resolution Type Life Charging system Transfer system Separation system Developing system Cleaning system 1 tray (250 sheets) + multi-bypass (50 sheets) A4, B5, A5 (Landscape) 56 - 80g/m2 250 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper User adjustment of paper guide available A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 (Landscape) 56 - 128g/m2 50 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label, Envelop (Single copy) User adjustment of paper guide available 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape) 15 - 21 lbs. 250 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper User adjustment of paper guide available 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2", 3-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape) 15 - 34.5 lbs. 50 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label, Envelop (Single copy) User adjustment of paper guide available Face down 200 sheets Center Registration (left edge) A4 (8-1/2" x 14") sheet, book None 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp 600 dpi CCFL 560Vrms 2.8W Output: R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / Input: A/D 16 bits (12 bits actual) Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser 600 dpi OPC (30ø) 25K Saw-tooth charging with a grid, / (-) scorotron discharge (+) DC corotron system (-) DC corotron system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system Counter blade system (Counter to rotation) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1 Fusing section Electrical section Section, item Fusing system Upper heat roller Lower heat roller Heater lamp Details Power source Power consumption Type Type Type Voltage Power consumption Voltage Frequency Max. Average (during copying) Average (stand-by) Pre-heat mode Auto power shut-off mode Heat roller system Teflon roller Silicon rubber roller Halogen lamp 220 - 240V / 120V 800W 220 - 240V / 120V Common use for 50 and 60Hz Less than 1000W AR-203E/5420: 350Wh/H or less AR-M200/ M201: 380Wh/H or less 80Wh/H AR-203E/5420: 25Wh/H or less AR-M200/ M201: 28Wh/H or less AR-203E/5420: 8.8W or less AR-M200/ M201: 12.5W or less 3. Copy performance Section, item Copy magnification Fixed magnification ratios Details AR-203E/5420: 3 Reduction + 2 Enlargement (AB system: 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200%) (Inch system: 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200%) AR-M200/M201: *1 4 Reduction + 3 Enlargement (AB system: 25, 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200, 400%) (Inch system: 25, 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200, 400%) 25 - 400% (376 steps in 1% increments) 50 - 200% when using SPF (151 steps in 1% increments) Zooming magnification ratios Manual steps (manual, photo) Copy speed First-copy time *2 (Approximately) AB system A4 (Landscape) Copy speed (CPM) AB system B5 (Landscape) Copy speed (CPM) Inch system 8-1/2" x 11" (Landscape) Copy speed (CPM) Max. continuous copy quantity Void Void area Image loss Warm-up time Power save mode reset time Paper jam recovery time Same size Enlargement Reduction Same size Enlargement Reduction Same size Enlargement Reduction Leading edge Trailing edge Side edge void area Leading edge 5 steps AR-203E/5420: 8.0 seconds (When user program 24 is set to OFF) 10.7 seconds (When user program 24 is set to ON) AR-M200/M201: 8.0 seconds (paper: A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), exposure mode: AUTO, copy ratio: 100%) 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 99 1 - 4mm 4mm or less 0.5mm or more (per side) 4.5mm or less (total of both sides) same size: 3.0mm or less (OC) / 4mm or less (SPF) Enlarge: 1.5mm or less (OC) / 3mm or less (SPF) Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less (OC) / 8mm or less (SPF) 0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit. 0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit. 0 sec. ∗ Jam recovery condition: Recovery time from 60 sec of door open. *1: If a value greater than 200% or smaller than 50% is selected when the RSPF is used, the magnification ratio is automatically set to 200% or 50%. *2: The first-copy time is measured after the power save indicator turns off following power on, using the document glass with the polygon rotating in the copy ready state and "Selection of copy start state" set to ON in the user programs (A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), paper fed from paper tray). The first-copy time may vary depending on machine operating conditions and ambient conditions such as temperature. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 2 4. GDI printer (AR-203E only) Print speed Max. 15ppm (excluding bypass tray, paper size A4, 8.5" x 11") (Variable depending on the PC performance) Duplex No Memory 8MB Interface USB 2.0 (Full speed) Emulation GDI Resolution 600dpi *1 Supported OS Win 98 / Me / 2000 / XP / Vista WHQL support Yes *2 *1: Engine Resolution *2: By running change 5. SPLC printer (AR-M200/M201) Print speed Max. 20ppm (Paper size: A4, excluding manual paper feed) ∗ Varies depending on the PC performance. First print time 8 sec. (without data transfer time) Duplex Yes (AR-M201 only) ROPM Yes Memory 64MB Interface USB2.0 (Hi Speed) Network Option: Network expansion kit the AR-NB2A Emulation SPLC (JBIG GDI) MIB support No Resolution 600dpi *1 Supported OS Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, Windows Vista WHQL support Yes *2 Application Status window *1: Engine Resolution *2: Running change 6. Scan function (AR-203E/M200/M201) Type Flat Bed Color Scanner Scanning system Original table/SPF/RSPF Light source 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp (2 pcs of CCFL) Resolution Optical: 600 x 1200dpi Setting range: 50 - 9600dpi (Preview resolution is fixed at 75dpi) Originals Sheet type / Book type Output data R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel Scan range OC/SPF/RSPF: 216mm (H) x 356mm (V) (8.5" (H) x 14.0" (V)) Original position: Left Center SPF/RSPF position: Right Center A/D 16 bits (12 bits actual) Scan speed OC/SPF: Max. 2.88ms/line Protocol TWAIN / WIA (Only XP, Vista) / STI Interface AR-203E: USB2.0 (Full speed support) AR-M200/M201: USB2.0 (Hi speed support) Scanner utility Button Manager / Sharpdesk / Composer Scan key/lamp Yes Duplex scan Yes only when the RSPF is installed (AR-M200/M201) Supported OS Win 98 / Me / 2000 / XP / Vista Void area No WHQL supported Yes *1 *1: By running change AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 3 [3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 1. Supply system table A. Europe Subsidiary (AR-203E/5420/M200/M201), SCA/SCNZ (AR-203E/M201) No. 1 Name Toner cartridge (Black) Content Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g) Polyethylene bag × 10 × 10 2 Developer Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g) × 10 3 Drum kit Drum Drum fixing plate ×1 ×1 Life 80K (8K x 10Pcs) Product name AR-208LT (A4 6% document) 250K (25K x 10Pcs) AR-208LD 25K AR-152DM Life 80K (8K x 10Pcs) Product name AR-208CT (A4 6% document) 250K (25K x 10Pcs) AR-208CD 25K AR-152DR Life 80K (8K x 10Pcs) Product name AR-208ET (A4 6% document) 250K (25K x 10Pcs) AR-208CD 25K AR-152DR Life 80K (8K x 10Pcs) Product name AR-208CT-C (A4 6% document) 250K (25K x 10Pcs) AR-208CD-C 25K AR-152DR-C Packing form One carton of the AR-208LT includes 10 toner cartridges. One carton of the AR-208LD includes 10 developers. One carton of the collective package includes 10 units of the AR-152DM. B. Asia Subsidiary (AR-203E/M201) No. 1 Name Toner cartridge (Black) Content Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g) Polyethylene bag × 10 × 10 2 Developer Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g) × 10 3 Drum kit Drum Drum fixing plate ×1 ×1 Packing form One carton of the AR-208CT includes 10 toner cartridges. One carton of the AR-208CD includes 10 developers. One carton of the collective package includes 10 units of the AR-152DR. C. SMEF/Distributor (AR-203E/M201) No. 1 Name Toner cartridge (Black) Content Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g) Polyethylene bag × 10 × 10 2 Developer Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g) × 10 3 Drum kit Drum Drum fixing plate ×1 ×1 Packing form One carton of the AR-208ET includes 10 toner cartridges. One carton of the AR-208CD includes 10 developers. One carton of the collective package includes 10 units of the AR-152DR. D. SRH (AR-203E/M201) No. 1 Name Toner cartridge (Black) Content Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g) Polyethylene bag × 10 × 10 2 Developer Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g) × 10 3 Drum kit Drum Drum fixing plate ×1 ×1 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1 Packing form One carton of the AR-208CT-C includes 10 toner cartridges. One carton of the AR-208CD-C includes 10 developers. One carton of the collective package includes 10 units of the AR-152DR-C. 2. Environmental The environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and the machine operations are as follows: (1) 3. Production control number (lot No.) identification <Toner cartridge> Normal operating condition Temperature: 20 - 25°C Production month Production day Destination code Humidity: 65 ± 5%RH (2) Acceptable operating condition (Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.) Production place (SOCC: Fixed to B.) End digit of year Version No. Humidity (RH) 85% 60% <Drum cartridge> The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production. (SOCC production) 20% 10˚C 30˚C Production month Production day Destination code 35˚C (Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.) Production place (SOCC: Fixed to B.) End digit of year (3) Transport condition Humidity (RH) 90% Version No. 60% 15% –25˚C (4) 30˚C 40˚C Supply storage condition Humidity (RH) 90% Production control label attachment position 20% –5˚C 45˚C Production control label attachment position(*1) *1: The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of a China product. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2 <Developer> Sub lot Production day Production month End digit of year Production place 4. Toner cartridge replacement 1) Open the front and side cabinets of the copier. 2) Keep holding Toner lever, and 3) Carefully pull out Toner unit from the copier. 2 3 1 4) Put Toner unit in a collection bag immediately after removing it from the copier Note: Never carry exposed Toner unit. Be sure to put it in the collection bag. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 3 [4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 1. Appearance Interface Interface 1 USB connector (AR-203E) USB connector (AR-M200/M201) 2 3 7 10 11 8 9 4 5 12 13 14 6 1 4 7 10 13 Original cover Front cover Side cover Paper output tray Handle 2 5 8 11 14 Document glass Paper tray Side cover open button Paper output tray extension Power cord 3 6 9 12 Operation panel Multi-bypass tray Bypass tray paper guides Power switch 2. Internal Toner cartridge Drum cartridge 2 3 1 4 5 1 4 Front cover Transfer charger 2 5 Side cover Charger cleaner 3 Fusing unit release lever AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1 3. Operation panel A. AR-203E/5420 1 2 3 4 5 6 13 14 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 Exposure mode selector key and indicators Use to sequentially select the exposure modes: AUTO, MANUAL or PHOTO. Selected mode is shown by a lit indicator. Alarm indicators Developer replacement required indicator Misfeed indicator Toner cartridge replacement required indicator *1 Maintenance indicator SPF misfeed indicator (AR-203E only) Copy ratio display (%) key • Use to verify a zoom setting without changing the zoom ratio. • Use to check the number of originals that must be returned to the document feeder tray if an original misfeed occurs while using the SPF. SCAN key and indicator (AR-203E only) *2, *3 Start key and indicator • Copying is possible when the indicator is on. • Press to start copying • Use to set a user program. Tray select key Use to select a paper feed station (paper tray or multi-bypass tray). ZOOM keys and indicator Use to select any reduction or enlargement copy ratio from 25% to 400% in 1% increments. (When the SPF is being used, the zoom copy ratio range is 50% to 200%.) Clear key • Press to clear the display, or press during a copy run to terminate copying. • Press and hold down during standby to display the total number of copies made to date. *1: Toner cartridge replacement 8 15 2 4 6 8 10 12 9 16 10 11 12 17 Light and dark keys and indicators Use to adjust the MANUAL or PHOTO exposure level. Selected exposure level is shown by a lit indicator. Use to start and terminate user program setting. SPF indicator (AR-203E only) Copy ratio selector key and indicators Use to sequentially select preset reduction/enlargement copy ratios. Selected copy ratio is shown by a lit indicator. Display Displays the specified copy quantity, zoom copy ratio, user program code, and error code. ONLINE key and indicator (AR-203E only) Lights up when the unit is used as a printer and scanner. *2 Power save indicator Lights up when the unit is in a power save mode. 14 Paper feed location indicators Light up to show the selected paper feed station. 16 Copy quantity keys • Use to select the desired copy quantity (1 to 99). • Use to make user program entries. Start indicator When toner density is lower than a specified level, the toner cartridge replacement indicator lights up to warn the user. If the toner cartridge is not replaced in that time, the ready lamp changes to blinking and then start to supply the toner after around 10 copies. (Cartridge replacement lamp continues to light.) If toner density is not back to specific level after two minutes, the ready indicator goes out and toner developer indicator starts blinking, and the copier stops. Also when the toner quantity is insufficient, the lamp is lighted. *2: Indicators on the operation panel The ONLINE indicator and the start ( state of the printer or scanner. SCAN indicator ONLINE indicator 7 ) indicator indicate the Start indicator Power save indicator On: Indicates the unit is ready for copying or scanning is being performed. Blinking: The indicator blinks in the following situations: • When a print job is interrupted. • When reserving a copy job. • When toner is being replenished during a copy or print job. Off: The indicator is off in the following situations: • During copying or scanning. • The unit is in the auto power shut-off mode. • When a misfeed or error has occurred. ONLINE indicator The ONLINE key is pressed and on line and off line are changed. On: Indicates the unit is ready for printing or scanning is being performed. (On line) Blinking: Printing or data is being received from a computer. Off: Copying is being performed. (Off line) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 2 Power save indicator 2) Place the original you wish to scan on the document glass/ SPF. On: Indicates the unit is in a power save mode. Blinking: Indicates that the unit is initializing (when the side cover is opened and closed or the power turned off and on). 3) Press the right copy quantity key to display the number of the application that you wish to use for scanning. The application numbers are initially as follows. SCAN indicator On: The SCAN ( ) key has been pressed and the unit is in scanner mode. Blinking: A scan job is being executed from the computer, or scan data is stored in the unit’s memory. Off: The unit is in the copy mode. *3: Using the SCAN key to begin scanning Application number SC2 Note: • Scanning is not possible during a copy job. • If the SCAN ( ) key is pressed during a print job, the scan job will be stored. SC3 SC4 SC5 SC6 • When scanning an original that has been placed in the SPF, only one original can be placed unless you are using Sharpdesk. 1) Press the SCAN ( ) key. Application launched E-mail (your standard e-mail program in the Windows OS you are using) Fax (if a fax program is installed) OCR (if an OCR program is installed) Microsoft Word (if installed) Filing (if a Filing program is installed) 4) Press the start ( The unit enters scan mode. ) key. Scanning will start and the scanned data will be transferred to the application. B. AR-M200/M201 For Europe 1 2 3 4 5 Display 1 2 2 1 2 1 READY TO COPY. 100% A4 2 18 6 7 8 9 10 11 0 1 12 13 14 15 16 19 20 21 17 For SCA/SCNZ/Asia 1 3 2 4 5 Display READY TO COPY. 100% A4 18 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 3 19 0 20 21 1 [MODE SELECT] key / Mode indicators Press this key to select the mode. The indicator of the selected mode lights (copy, printer, scanner, fax indicators). 2 3 Numeric keys Use these to enter the number of copies and other numerical settings. 4 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 The keys can also be used to select items in function setting menus. Power save indicator This lights up when the power save function is activated. Error indicator This lights steadily or blinks when a paper misfeed or other error occurs. Tray location indicator Indicates the selected paper tray. The indicator blinks when the tray is out of paper during operation or is not closed properly. [2-SIDED SCAN] key ( ) [2-SIDED COPY] key ( ) Press to select the automatic two-sided copying mode. [ ] key ( ), [ ] key ( ), [OK]/[ENTER] key Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to select an item in a function setting menu. 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 21 8 10 12 1 Press the [OK]/[ENTER] key to enter a selection. [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key Press to select an enlargement or reduction ratio. To select a preset ratio setting, press the [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key and select the desired preset ratio. To select a ratio that is not preset, press the [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key, select the preset ratio that is closest to the desired ratio, and then press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to increase or decrease the ratio in increments of 1%. [START] key ( ) / Ready indicator The ready indicator lights up when copying or scanning is possible. To begin copying, press the [START] key ( 19 6 14 Display This shows messages indicating the machine status and any problems that occur, as well as user programs and function setting menus. [CLEAR] key ( ) Use this to clear the set number of copies, as well as cancel a job that is in progress. When a setting menu appears, use this key to move back to the previous menu level. RSPF indicator This lights up when an original is placed in the RSPF. [TRAY SELECT] key ( ) Use to select the paper tray that has the desired paper for copying. [MENU] key Press this key to select the paper size for copying, to configure a user program or to display the total count. [E-SORT/SP.FUNC] key ( ) Press to select the sort function, 2 IN 1 copy function, or margin shift function. [EXPOSURE] key ( ) Use to switch from auto exposure adjustment to text mode or photo mode. 16 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) This returns all functions to the default settings. When pressed in a setting menu, this returns the settings and display to the initial state. 18 Shows the current copy ratio. 20 Shows the number of copies that has been entered with the numeric keys. ). The [START] key ( ) is also pressed to return to normal operation from auto power shut-off mode. Shows the selected paper size. A checkmark " " appears when the exposure has been changed, or when two-sided copying, sort, 2 IN 1, or margin shift is selected. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 4 4. Motors and solenoids 2 4 1 5 9 7 6 8 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Part name Main motor Scanner motor Toner motor Cooling fan motor Resist roller solenoid Paper feed solenoid Multi paper feed solenoid Duplex motor Shifter motor Control signal MM MRMT TM VFM RRS CPFS1 MPFS DMT SFTM 3 Function / Operation Drives the copier. Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit). Supplies toner. Cools the optical, fusing section. Resist roller rotation control solenoid Cassette Paper feed solenoid 1 Multi manual pages feed solenoid Devices the duplex paper transport section (AR-M201 only) Drives the shifter. (AR-M200/M201) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 5 5. Sensors and switches 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 No. 1 Signal MHPS Type Transmission sensor 2 3 4 5 Name Scanner unit home position sensor POD sensor PPD2 sensor Cassette detection switch PD1 sensor (AR-M200/M201) POD PPD2 CED1 PD1 Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Micro-switch Micro-switch 6 7 PPD1 sensor Door switch PPD1 DSW Transmission sensor Micro-switch Function Scanner unit home position detection Paper exit detection Paper transport detection 2 Cassette installation detection Paper width detect Paper transport detection 1 Door open/close detection (safety switch for 24V) Output "H" at home position "H" at paper pass "L" at paper pass "H" at cassette insertion "H" at A4 size or less "L" at A4 size or more "L" at paper pass 1 or 0V of 24V at door open AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 6 6. PWB unit 2 5 11 1 8 9 6 10 4 3 7 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Name Exposure lamp invertor PWB Main PWB (MCU) Operation PWB High voltage PWB CCD sensor PWB LSU motor PWB TCS PWB LSU PWB FAX-operation PWB Power PWB Modem PWB Function Exposure lamp (CCFL) control Copier control Operation input/display High voltage control For image scanning For polygon motor drive For toner sensor control For laser control FAX operation input (AR-FX13 option) AC power input, DC voltage control FAX control (AR-FX13 option) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 7 7. Cross sectional view 1 2 4 3 16 5 15 6 7 8 9 10 14 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part name Scanner unit Exposure lamp LSU (Laser unit) Paper exit roller Shifter roller Main charger Heat roller Pressure roller Drum Transfer unit Pickup roller Manual paper feed tray Manual paper feed roller PS roller unit Paper feed roller Paper transport roller Paper transport roller 2 13 12 11 Function and operation Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit (CCD). Exposure lamp (CCFL) Illuminates original Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum. Roller for paper exit (AR-203E/5420) Transports and shifts paper in the back-forth direction of the machine. (AR-M200/M201) Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface. Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller) Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller) Forms images. Transfers images onto the drum. Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only) Tray for manual feed paper Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port. Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper. Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette. Transports of a paper. Transports of a paper. (AR-M200/M201) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 8 [5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 1. Copier installation 2. Cautions on handling Improper installation may damage the copier. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the copier is moved. Be careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the performance of this copier. Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm place, condensation may form inside the copier. Operation in this condition will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions. Leave the copier at room temperature for at least 2 hours before use. Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against any object. Do not install your copier in areas that are: • damp, humid, or very dusty Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight. Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge, causing poor print quality. • exposed to direct sunlight • poorly ventilated Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and toner cartridges in a dark place without removing from the package before use. If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may result. Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge. Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor print quality. • subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater. 3. Checking packed components and accessories Open the carton and check if the following components and accessories are included. The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection. Operation manual Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and current requirements. Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded. Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation. 20cm (8") 10cm (4") Software CD-ROM 20cm (8") 10cm (4") AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1 Drum cartridge (installed in unit) 4. Unpacking Be sure to hold the handles on both sides of the unit to unpack the unit and carry it to the installation location. 2) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover and remove the two protective pins from the fusing unit by pulling the strings upward one at a time. Protective pins CAUTION tape 3) Push gently on both sides of the front cover to open the cover. 5. Removing protective packing materials 1) Remove all pieces of tape shown in the illustration below. Then open the original cover and remove protective materials. 4) Remove the locking tape of the developer unit. 5) Remove the screw which is fixing the copier and Developer unit. 6) Remove Developer unit slowly from the copier. 2) Release the scan head locking switch. The scan head locking switch is under the document glass. If the switch is locked ( ), the unit will not operate. Unlock the switch ( ) as shown below. Grasp here and turn in the direction of the arrow. 5 1 3 (A) Lock Unlock To lock the scan head locking switch, hold up the catch in illustration (A) and turn the center knob counter-clockwise 90 degrees until you hear a click. 6. Developer unit installation 4 7) Remove the screw (1 pc). 8) Remove Upper developer unit. 1) Open the multi-bypass tray, and then open the side cover. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 2 2 9) Shake the aluminum bag to stir developer. 10) Supply developer from the aluminum bag to the top of the MX roller evenly. 7. Toner cartridge installation 1) To prevent against uneven distribution of toner, hold Toner unit with both hands and shake it several times horizontally. 2) Hold the section of Toner unit shown in the figure below, remove the packing tape, and remove the cushion. 3) Pull out the cushion in the arrow direction. Note: Be careful not to splash developer outside Developer unit. 11) Attach Upper developer unit and fix it with a screw. 12) Rotate the MG roller gear to distribute developer evenly. 4) Insert Toner unit carefully into the copier. 5) Insert until the hook is engaged with the copier as shown in the figure below. Note: Never rotate the gear in the reverse direction. Note: When carrying Developer unit, do not tilt it extremely as shown with the arrow in the figure below. (Prevention of splash of developer) 6) Pull out the shutter in the arrow direction. 13) Insert Developer unit carefully into the copier. Note: Quick insertion may result in splash of developer. Be sure to insert carefully. 14) Confirm that Developer unit is completely inserted to the bottom of the machine, fix Developer unit and the machine with a screw. 15) Completion of Developer unit installation Note: Do not hold and carry the shutter. Otherwise the shutter may drop and Toner unit may drop. 7) Completion of Toner unit installation Close the front and side cabinets. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 3 8. Loading paper 10. Software (AR-203E/M200/M201) 1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until it stops. The CD-ROM that accompanies the machine contains the following software: MFP driver Printer driver The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of the machine. 2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate lock in the direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing down the pressure plate of the paper tray. The printer driver includes the Print Status Window. This is a utility that monitors the machine and informs you of the printing status, the name of the document currently being printed, and error messages. Please note that the Print Status Window does not operate when the machine is used as a network printer. Scanner driver* The scanner driver allows you to use the scanning function of the machine with TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant applications. Sharpdesk* (Excluding AR-203E X) 3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed in step 2). To store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to fix it on the relevant location. Sharpdesk is an integrated software environment that makes it easy to manage documents and image files, and launch applications. Button Manager* Button Manager allows you to use the scanner menus on the machine to scan a document. Pressure plate lock *: The scanning feature can only be used with computers that are connected to the machine by a USB cable. A. Before installation Hardware and software requirements 4) Adjust the paper guides on the paper tray to the copy paper width and length. Squeeze the lever of paper guide (A) and slide the guide to match with the width of the paper. Move paper guide (B) to the appropriate slot as marked on the tray. Check the following hardware and software requirements in order to install the software. Computer type Operating system*2 *3 Display Hard disk free space Other hardware requirements Paper guide (B) Paper guide (A) 5) Fan the paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure the edges go under the corner hooks. Note: Do not load paper above the maximum height line ( Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed. ). IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped with a USB 2.0/1.1*1 Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional*4, Windows XP Professional*4, Windows XP Home Edition*4, Windows Vista*4 1024 x 768 dots (XGA) display with 16bit 150 MB or more An environment on which any of the operating systems listed above can fully operate *1: Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home Edition or Windows Vista preinstalled model standardly equipped with a USB port. *2: Printing is not available in MS-DOS mode. *3: The machine does not support printing from a Macintosh environment. *4: Administrator's rights are required to install the software using the installer. Installation environment and usable software The following table shows the drivers and software that can be installed for each version of Windows and interface connection method. Cable 6) Gently push the paper tray back into the unit. 9. Power to copier Ensure that the power switch of the unit is in the OFF position. Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet. Turn the power switch on the left side of the unit to the "ON" position. The start ( ) indicator will light up and other indicators which show the initial settings of the operation panel will also light up to indicate the ready condition. USB Operating Printer Scanner Button Sharpdesk system driver driver Manager 1 Windows 98/ Available* Available Me/2000/XP/ Vista *1: The printer driver that is installed will vary depending on the type of connection between the machine and your computer. Install the software according to the Operation Manual. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 4 B. Installing the software 8) Click the "MFP Driver" button. Note: • The screen images in this manual are mainly for Windows XP. With other versions of Windows, some screen images may be different from those in this manual. Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected. • In the following explanations it is assumed that the mouse is configured for right hand operation. • If an error message appears, follow the instructions on the screen to solve the problem. After the problem is solved, the installation procedure will continue. Depending on the problem, you may have to click the "Cancel" button to exit the installer. In this case, reinstall the software from the beginning after solving the problem. 1) The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding. If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If this happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and disconnect the cable. Note: The cable will be connected in step 13). 2) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive. 3) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then doubleclick the CD-ROM icon. 9) Select "Connected to this computer" and click the "Next" button. Follow the on-screen instructions. • In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, click "Computer", and then double-click the CD-ROM icon. • In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and then double-click the CD-ROM icon. 4) Double-click the "setup" icon. In Windows Vista, if a message screen appears asking you for confirmation, click "Allow". 5) The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure that you understand the contents of the software license, and then click the "Yes" button. Note: You can show the "SOFTWARE LICENSE" in a different language by selecting the desired language from the language menu. To install the software in the selected language, continue the installation with that language selected. 6) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then click the "Next" button. 7) To install all of the software, click the "Standard" button and go to step 12). To install particular packages, click the "Custom" button and go to next step. Caution: • If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". • If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". 10) You will return to the window of step 8). If you wish to install Button Manager or Sharpdesk, click the "Utility Software" button. If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close" button and go to step 12). Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 5 Installing the Utility Software 11) Click the "Button Manager" or the "Sharpdesk" button. Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected. Follow the on-screen instructions. 14) Follow the instructions in the plug and play window to install the driver. Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: • If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". • If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". This completes the installation of the software. • If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as explained in "C. Setting up Button Manager". • If you installed Sharpdesk, the Sharpdesk setup screen will appear. Follow the instructions in the screen to set up Sharpdesk. (1) Connecting a USB cable Follow the procedure below to connect the machine to your computer. A USB cable for connecting the machine to your computer is not included with the machine. Please purchase the appropriate cable for your computer. Caution: Caution: In Windows 98/Me/2000, if the following screen appears, click the "Skip" button or the "Continue" button as appropriate to continue the Sharpdesk installation. If "Skip" is selected, the Sharpdesk installation will continue without installing Sharpdesk Imaging. If "Continue" is selected, Sharpdesk Imaging will be installed. If Imaging for Windows is installed on your computer, Sharpdesk Imaging will overwrite Imaging for Windows. • USB is available with a PC/AT compatible computer that was originally equipped with USB and had Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP or Windows Vista preinstalled. • Do not connect the USB cable before installing the printer driver. The USB cable should be connected during installation of the printer driver. Note • If the machine will be connected using a USB 2.0 port of your computer, please purchase a USB cable that supports USB 2.0. • To obtain the fastest USB 2.0 data transfer speed, "USB2.0 MODE SWITCH" in the machine's user programs must be set to "HI-SPEED". For more information, see "[12] USER PROGRAM". (AR-M200/M201 only) • Use the machine's "HI-SPEED" mode only when using a computer that is running Windows 2000/XP/Vista. • Even when the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is used, it may not be possible to obtain full USB 2.0 speed if a PC card supporting USB 2.0 is used. To obtain the latest driver (which may enable a higher speed), contact the manufacturer of your PC card. 12) When installing is finished, click the "Close" button. Caution: • If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". • Connection is also possible using a USB 1.1 port on your computer. However, the specifications will be USB 1.1 specifications (FullSpeed). 1) Insert the cable into the USB connector on the machine. • If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine to your computer. Click the "OK" button. Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. 13) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then connect the USB cable. (AR-203E) (AR-M200/M201) 2) Insert the other end of the cable into your computer's USB port. Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen will appear. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 6 (2) Using the machine as a shared printer (AR-203E/M200/M201) 5) Click the "Add Network Port" button. In Windows Vista, the "Add Network Port" button does not appear. If the machine will be used as a shared printer on a network, follow these steps to install the printer driver in the client computer. Note: To configure the appropriate settings in the print server, see the operation manual or help file of your operating system. 1) Perform steps 2) through 6) in "Installing the software". 2) Click the "Custom" button. 6) Select the network printer that is shared and click the "OK" button. Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer name of the machine on the network. 3) Click the "MFP Driver" button. Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected. 7) In the printer port selection window, verify the network printer that is shared and whether the machine is to be used as the default printer, make the selections and click the "Next" button. Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: • If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". • If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". 4) Select "Connected via the network" and click the "Next" button. 8) You will return to the window of step 3). Click the "Close" button. Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. This completes the installation of the software. C. Setting up Button Manager Button Manager is a software program that works with the scanner driver to enable scanning from the machine. To scan using the machine, Button Manager must be linked with the scan menu on the machine. Follow the steps below to link Button Manager to scanner events. (1) Windows XP/Vista 1) Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click "Printers and Other Hardware", and then click "Scanners and Cameras". In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, select "Control Panel" and click "Hardware and Sound", and then click "Scanners and Cameras". AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 7 2) Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" icon and select "Properties" from the "File" menu. In Windows Vista, select "Properties" from the "Organize" menu. 3) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab. 4) Select "SC1:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu. (2) Windows 98/Me/2000 1) Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click "Control Panel". 2) Double-click the "Scanners and Cameras" icon. Note: If the "Scanners and Cameras" icon does not appear in Windows Me, click "view all Control Panel options". 3) Select "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click the "Properties" button. In Windows Me, right click "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click "Properties" in the pop-up menu. 4) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab. 5) Select "SC1:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu. 5) Select "Start this program" and then select "Sharp Button Manager T" (AR-203E) or "Sharp Button Manager S" (AR-M200/ M201) from the pull-down menu. 6) Select "Sharp Button Manager T / S" in "Send to this application". 6) Click the "Apply" button. 7) Repeat Steps 4) through 6) to link Button Manager to "SC2:" through "SC6:". Select "SC2:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu. Select "Start this program", select "Sharp Button Manager T / S" from the pull-down menu, and then click the "Apply" button. Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:". When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button to close the screen. Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6). The scan settings for each of scan menu 1 through 6 can be changed with the setting window of Button Manager. For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the Online Manual. Note: If other applications are shown, deselect the checkboxes for the other applications and leave only the Button Manager checkbox selected. 7) Click the "Apply" button. 8) Repeat Steps 5) through 7) to link Button Manager to "SC2:" through "SC6:". Select "SC2:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu. Select "Sharp Button Manager T / S" in "Send to this application" and click the "Apply" button. Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:". When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button to close the screen. Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6). The scan settings for each of scan menus 1 through 6 can be changed with the setting window of Button Manager. For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the Online Manual. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 8 11. Interface 13. Scanner moisture-proof kit A. USB If the machine is installed in a highly humid environment, you can alleviate dew condensation inside the scanner by installing the scanner moisture-proof kit described below. Connector Type-B connector A. Components Cable Scanner moisture-proof kit (DKIT-0016QSZZ) Shielded twisted pair cable (2 m (6 feet) Max.: high-speed transmission equivalent) 1 Pin configuration The pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table. Pin No. 1 2 3 4 Signal name +5V -DATA +DATA GND 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name Scanner condensation prevention mylar Optical right hole mylar B Scanner motor metal plate cushion Scanner upper surface cushion Scanner motor lower mylar Scanner UPG mylar J3 Fan housing cushion Part code PSHEZ0493QSZZ Qty 3 PSHEZ0469QSZZ PMLT-0106QSZZ 2 2 PMLT-0105QSZZ PSHEP0600QSZZ PSHEP0599QSZZ PMLT-0108QSZ1 1 1 1 1 B. Precautions at installation Clean the position where each cushion/mylar is attached with industrial alcohol before the work. C. Attachment method Turn the main switch to the "OFF" position and remove the power plug from the outlet. 1) Remove the document cover. Remove the document cover from the copier. 3 4 12. Moving Moving instructions When moving the unit, follow the procedure below. Note: When moving this unit, be sure to remove the toner cartridge in advance. 1) Turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the outlet. 2) Open the side cover and front cover, in that order. Remove the toner cartridge and close the front cover and side cover, in that order. To open and close the side cover and front cover, and to remove the toner cartridge. 2) Remove the rear cabinet. Remove the four screws and then remove the rear cabinet. 3) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until it stops. 4) Push the center of the pressure plate down until it locks in place and lock the plate using the pressure plate lock which has been stored in the front of the paper tray. 1 5) Push the paper tray back into the unit. 6) Lock the scan head locking switch. 2 Note: When shipping the unit, the scan head locking switch must be locked to prevent shipping damage. 7) Close the multi-bypass tray and the paper output tray extension, and attach the packing materials and tape which were removed during installation of the unit. 8) Pack the unit into the carton. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 9 3) Remove the rear cover for the document glass. <1> Remove the two screws and then remove the right glass holder. Attach along the edge of the projection (the yellow line in the diagram below). <2> Slide the rear cover for the document glass to remove it. <3> Remove the table glass. 1 2 3 5) Attach the Optical right hole mylar B at the 2 positions shown in the diagrams below which are at the top of the rear side of the main unit. Note: The holes should be covered with the mylar. 4) Attach the Scanner condensation prevention mylar at the 3 positions on the rear side of the main unit as described below. Note: The hole should be covered with the mylar. Attach along the edge of the cushion (the yellow line in the diagram below). Align with the inside line of the bent part (the yellow line in the diagram below). Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered as much as possible. Stick the excessive part on the side. Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered as much as possible. Align with the raised part (the yellow line in the diagram below). Match the center of the mylar (in the horizontal direction) to the center of the raised part. Stick the excessive part on the side. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 10 6) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion at 1 position on the attachment plate of the motor on the rear side of the main unit. Bend the part which is sticking out to the rear side of the scanner and attach to the surface. Note: The hole on the top of the motor unit should be covered with the mylar. Align the edge of the metal plate and the edge of the cushion (the yellow line in the diagram below). Press the cushion at the steps shown in the diagram so that there will be no gap. Press the cushion to make sure all the holes are covered. 8) Bend the edge of the Scanner motor lower mylar and stick together. 20mm - 25mm Press and attach the cushion aligning it to the metal plate so that there will be no gap between them. Stick together. Stick together. 9) Attach the Scanner motor lower mylar at 1 position under the motor attachment plate on the rear side of the main unit. Note: The mylar should cover the hole under the motor unit. 7) Attach the Scanner upper surface cushion on the top and the rear side at the rear side of the main unit. Align the cushion with the side of the raised part (the yellow line in the diagram below). Do not cover this hole. Align the edge of the cushion with the edge of the metal plate. Attach matching the hole (the yellow mark in the diagram) and along with the side edge (the yellow arrow in the diagram). Disconnect the motor harness from the connector and take off the snap band from the hole. Press the mylar with a sharp-pointed stick or something so that it is stuck correctly. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 11 10) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion covering the bottom part of the Scanner motor lower mylar. Note: The hole under the motor unit should be covered. Attach the cushion to cover the gap between the mylar and the metal plate (the yellow mark). Stick the lower part of the cushion to the mylar, too. 13) Attach the Fan housing cushion to the cooling fan at the position shown in the diagram below. Cover the top and the right side of the fan housing when you see the fan housing from the backside of the machine. Note: Please make sure the double-sided tape is not exposed where the cushion is sticking out from the edge of the fan housing. Press the cushion with a sharp-pointed stick or something to fill the gap between the mylar and the metal plate. A View from the arrow A Back side 11) Attach the motor connector and the snap band to the original position. Reference position Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm from the edge. 12) Attach the Scanner UPG mylar J3 to cover the hole on the right side of inside of the scanner. Note: The mylar should cover the hole shown by the arrow in the diagram. Attach along with the bent part of the metal plate and align the edge of the mylar with the line shown in the diagram (the yellow line in the diagram). 3 - 7mm Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm from the edge so that the gap between the Fan housing cushion and the filter of the rear cabinet is filled for sure. 14) Attach the parts removed in the items 1), 2), and 3). AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 12 [6] COPY PROCESS An OPC drum is used for the photoconductor. (Structure of the OPC drum layers) OPC layer (20 microns thick) Pigment layer (0.2 to 0.3 microns thick) Aluminum drum 1. Functional diagram Main charger Laser beam Cleaning blade MG roller Drum Transfer unit Resist roller (Basic operation cycle) Semiconductor laser Focus correction lens Main high voltage unit Exposure Charge Saw tooth Toner Developing Drum Cleaning Developer Cleaning blade PS roller Waste toner box To face down tray Paper release Fusing Separation Transfer Heat roller Electrode Transfer charger Heater lamp Synchronization with drum Manual feed Cassette paper feed Transfer high voltage unit Print process Paper transport route AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 1 2. Outline of print process Step-2: Exposure (laser beam, lens) This printer is a non-impact printer that uses a semiconductor laser and electrostatic print process. This printer uses an OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) for its photoconductive material. First, voltage from the main corona unit charges the drum surface and a latent image is formed on the drum surface using a laser beam. This latent image forms a visible image on the drum surface when toner is applied. The toner image is then transferred onto the print paper by the transfer corona and fused on the print paper in the fusing section with a combination of heat and pressure. A Laser beam is generated from the semiconductor laser and controlled by the print pattern signal. The laser writes onto the OPC drum surface through the polygon mirrors and lens. The resistance of the OPC layer decreases for an area exposed by the laser beam (corresponding to the print pattern signal). The beam neutralizes the negative charge. An electrostatic latent image is formed on the drum surface. Semiconductor laser Step-1: Charge Step-2: Exposure ∗ Latent image is formed on the drum. Step-3: Developing Latent image formed on the drum is then changed into visible image with toner. Step-4: Transfer The visible image (toner image) on the drum is transferred onto the print paper. Exposure (semiconductor laser) OPC layer Pigment layer Aluminum drum Step-5: Cleaning Residual toner on the drum surface is removed and collected by the cleaning blade. Step-6: Optical discharge Residual charge on the drum surface is removed, by semiconductor laser beam. Drum surface charge after the exposure 3. Actual print process Step-1: DC charge A uniform negative charge is applied over the OPC drum surface by the main charging unit. Stable potential is maintained by means of the Scorotron charger. Non-image area Positive charges are generated in the aluminum layer. About DC5.5KV ( 580V/ 400V) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 2 Image area OPC layer Pigment layer Aluminum layer Step-3: Developing (DC bias) Step-4: Transfer A bias potential is applied to the MG roller in the two component magnetic brush developing method, and the toner is charged negative through friction with the carrier. The visible image on the drum surface is transferred onto the print paper by applying a positive charge from the transfer corona to the backside of the print paper. Non-image area of the drum surface charged with negative potential repel the toner, whereas the laser exposed portions where no negative charges exist, attract the toner. As a result, a visible image appears on the drum surface. :Carrier (Magnetized particle) :Toner (Charge negative by friction) (N) (S) Permanent magnet (provided in three locations) N S N About DC 5.2kV DC 400V 8V MG roller Step-5: Separation Since the print paper is charged positively by the transfer corona, it is discharged by the separation corona. The separation corona is connected to ground. Step-6: Cleaning Toner remaining on the drum is removed and collected by the cleaning blade. It is transported to the waste toner collecting section in the cleaning unit by the waste toner transport roller. Toner is attracted over the shadowed area because of the developing bias. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 3 Step-7: Optical discharge (Semiconductor laser) Start Before the drum rotation is stopped, the semiconductor laser is radiated onto the drum to reduce the electrical resistance in the OPC layer and eliminate residual charge, providing a uniform state to the drum surface for the next page to be printed. 1) Because the grid potential is at a low level, the drum potential is at about -400V. (Carrier may not be attracted though the carrier is pulled towards the drum by the electrostatic force of 400V. When the electrical resistance is reduced, positive charges on the aluminum layer are moved and neutralized with negative charges on the OPC layer. 2) Developing bias (-400V) is applied when the photoconductor potential is switched from LOW to HIGH. Semiconductor laser 3) Once developing bias (-400V) is applied and the photo conductor potential rises to HIGH, toner will not be attracted to the drum. Stop The reverse sequence takes place. Retaining developing bias at an abnormal occurrence Function The developing bias will be lost if the power supply was removed during print process. In this event, the drum potential slightly abates and the carrier makes deposits on the drum because of strong static power. To prevent this, the machine incorporates a function to retain the developing bias for a certain period and decrease the voltage gradually against possible power loss. Charge by the Scorotron charger Function The Scorotron charger functions to maintain uniform surface potential on the drum at all times, It control the surface potential regardless of the charge characteristics of the photoconductor. Basic function A screen grid is placed between the saw tooth and the photoconductor. A stable voltage is added to the screen grid to maintain the corona current on the photoconductor. Basic function Normally, the developing bias voltage is retained for a certain time before the drum comes to a complete stop if the machine should stop before completing the normal print cycle. The developing bias can be added before resuming the operation after an abnormal interruption. Therefore, carrier will not make a deposit on the drum surface. As the photoconductor is charged by the saw tooth from the main corona unit, the surface potential increases. This increases the current flowing through the screen grid. When the photoconductor potential nears the grid potential, the current turns to flow to the grid so that the photoconductor potential can be maintained at a stable level. Process controlling Function The print pattern signal is converted into an invisible image by the semiconductor laser using negative to positive (reversible) developing method. Therefore, if the developing bias is added before the drum is charged, toner is attracted onto the drum. If the developing bias is not added when the drum is charged, the carrier is attracted to the drum because of the strong electrostatic force of the drum. To avoid this, the process is controlled by adjusting the drum potential and the grid potential of the Scorotron charger. Basic function Voltage added to the screen grid can be selected, high and low. To make it easily understood, the figure below shows voltage transition at the developer unit. 0 START STOP Print potential Toner attract potential Developing bias 2) 3) 1) Low 4) Drum potential High Time AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 4 [7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 1. Outline of operation The outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration. (Basic configuration) AR-M200/M201 (Option) Scanner section Operation section FAX FAX modem (Option) CCD USB FAX I/F Network Box Network USB Printer/ Scanner I/F MCU (Main control/image process section) PC USB AR-203E/M200/M201 LSU (Laser unit) Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens Laser beam Paper exit Fusing section Process section Printer section Paper transport section Cassette paper feed section Manual paper feed section (Outline of copy operation) Printing Setting conditions 7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum according to the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to be visible images (toner images). 1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy density with the operation section, and press the COPY button. The information on copy conditions is sent to the MCU. Image scanning 2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section starts scanning of images. The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document and passed through the lens to the CCD. Photo signal/Electric signal conversion 8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in synchronization with the image lead edge. 9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner images are fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied paper is discharged onto the exit tray. (Outline of printer operation) 3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuit and passed to the MCU. The print data sent from the PC are passed through the NIC PWB (in case of network connection) and the MCU to the LSU. The procedures after that are the same as above 5) and later. Image process (Outline of scanner operation) 4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processed under the revised conditions and sent to the LSU (laser unit) as print data. The scan data are passed through the MCU to the PC according to the conditions requested by the operations with the operation panel. Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion 5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data. (Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.) 6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and various lenses to the OPC drum. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 1 2. Scanner section A. Scanner unit Spectral sensitivity characteristics (Standard characteristics) The scanner unit in the digital copier scans images. Relative sensitivity It is composed of the optical unit and the drive unit. The optical unit performs scanning in the main scan direction with the light receiving elements (color CCD). The drive unit performs scanning in the sub scanning direction by moving the optical unit. B. Optical system Two white lamps are used as the light source. Light radiated from the light source is applied to the document on the document table. The reflected light from the document is reflected 4 times by No. 1 - No. 3 mirrors and passed through the reduction lens to form images on the light-receiving surface of 3line CCD. The light-receiving surface of the color CCD is provided with 3 line scanning sections for RGB. Separate images scanned in each color section are overlapped to complete color scanning. (When PC scanning) Wavelength [nm] (Spectrum characteristics of the color CCD) The resolution is 600dpi. When copying, only the green component is used to print with the printer. 1 9 10 8 8 9 The color component for printing can be switched to red or blue by the service simulation. Sensitivity 100 100.0 75 6 50.2 50 45.4 25 380 480 580 680 7 780 Wavelength [nm] 3 (Spectrum characteristics of the lamp) 4 5 2 (Optical unit) 1 4 7 10 Table glass Mirror 1 CCD PWB Original 2 5 8 Optical unit Mirror 2 Lamp 3 6 9 Lens Mirror 3 Reflector C. Drive system The drive system is composed of the scanner motor, the pulley gear, the idle pulley, the idle gear, the belt 473, the belt 190, and the shaft. The motor rotation is converted into reciprocated movements of the belt 473 through the idle gear, the pulley gear, the belt 190, and the idle pulley to drive the optical unit. 9 7 3 1 4 7 Scanner motor Belt 473 Shaft 4 6 2 5 8 1 2 Pulley gear Belt 190 Idle gear 8 5 3 6 9 Idle pulley Optical unit Table glass AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 2 3 3. Laser unit B. Laser beam path The image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent to the LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams. A. Basic structure The LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system. The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images are formed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and fθ lens, etc. The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindrical lens, the polygon mirror, the fθ lens, and the mirror to form images on the OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser emitting PWB is provided with the APC (auto power control) in order to eliminate fluctuations in the laser power. The BD PWB works for measurement of the laser writing start point. 4 6 3 2 1 5 C. Composition Effective scanning width: 216mm (max.) Resolution: 600dpi Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanning direction, 80um in the sub scanning direction 6 No 1 2 3 4 5 Component Semiconductor laser Collimator lens Cylinder lens Polygon mirror, polygon motor BD (Lens, PWB) 6 fθ lens Image surface power: 0.18 ± 0.01mW (Laser wavelength 770 795nm) 3 Function Generates laser beams. Converges laser beams in parallel. Takes the focus. Reflects laser beams at a constant rpm. Detects start timing of laser scanning. Converges laser beams at a spot on the drum. Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as each other. (Refer to the figure below.) Polygon motor section: Brushless motor 20.787rpm No. of mirror surfaces: 5 surfaces 4. Fuser section Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as each other. a≠b≠c a b d=e=f c d e f f θ LENS AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 3 A. General description 2) The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 160 200°C. The surface temperature during the power save mode is set to 100°C. General block diagram (cross section) Thermal fuse Separator pawl PPD2 3) The self-check function comes active when one of the following malfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopy window. a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240°C. b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100°C during the copy cycle. Separator pawl c. Open thermistor d. Open thermal fuse e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190°C within 27 second after supplying the power. Thermistor Pressure roller This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section to improve transfer efficiency. Heat roller Paper guide Top view Heat roller (4) Fusing resistor Thermal fuse Thermistor Heater lamp Since the upper heat roller is conductive, when using copy paper that contains moisture and the distance between the transfer unit and the fusing unit is short, the transfer current may find a path to ground via the copy paper, the upper heat roller and the discharging brush. 5. Paper feed section and paper transport section A. Paper transport path and general operations 1 2 4 3 16 5 15 Separator pawl (1) 6 7 Heat roller 8 A Teflon roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller is used for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance and paper separation. (2) 9 10 Separator pawl Three separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separator pawls are Teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and prevent a smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl. (3) Thermal control 1) The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply PWB, and triac within the power supply unit are used to control the temperature in the fuser unit. To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser unit, a thermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety purposes. Heated by the heater lamp. (950W) Safety device (thermal breaker, thermal fuse) Triac (in the power supply unit) 14 13 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Scanner unit Exposure lamp LSU (Laser unit) Paper exit roller Main charger Heat roller Pressure roller Drum 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 11 Transfer unit Pickup roller Manual paper feed tray Manual paper feed roller PS roller unit Paper feed roller Paper transport roller Shifter roller Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity of 250 sheets. The front loading system allows you to install or remove the tray from the front cabinet. The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is sensed by the thermistor. The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed operation are given below. Level of the thermistor is controlled by the main PWB. With the signal from the main PWB, the triac is controlled on and off. (power supply PWB) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 4 (1) Cassette paper feed operation 1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the paper feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initial state without pressing the COPY button after lighting the ready lamp. The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve. 2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor starts rotating to drive each drive gear. The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however, the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to the pick-up roller, which does not rotate therefore. PFS OFF 5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detection switch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec from detection of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into contact with the paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller. Then the pick-up roller rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the lead edge of the paper is evenly pressed on the resist roller, preventing against skew feeding. PFS ON OFF 6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and the resist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to disengage the resist start latch from the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft. Thus the paper is transported by the resist roller. 7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed through the pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images are transferred on the paper, which is separated from the OPC drum by the drum curve and the separation section. PFS OFF OFF OFF RRS 3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on for a moment. This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to the paper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed the paper. PFS RRS RRS ON RRS OFF 8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusing paper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper out detector) to the copy tray. 4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper feed latch is brought in contact with a notch on the clutch sleeve, stopping rotation of the pick-up roller. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 5 (2) Manual multi paper feed operation 1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid (MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below. C 3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is engaged with the manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper falls and the manual take-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feed roller is rotating. A A OFF MPFS C ON MPFS 2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feed solenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feed latch. A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the manual paper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the same time, the manual paper feed stopper opens and the manual take-up roller is pressed to the surface of the paper to start paper feeding. 4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the resist roller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped temporarily to allow synchronization with the lead edge of the image on the OPC drum. From this point, the operation is the same as the paper feed operation from the tray. (Refer to 7-5 - 8.) 5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initial state. C A A C ON MPFS OFF MPFS AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 6 (3) Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeed a. When the power is turned on: PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on. b. Copy operation a PPD1 jam b PPD2 jam c POD jam PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec after turning on the resist roller. PPD2 is off immediately after turning on the resist roller. PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec after turning off the resist roller. POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec after turning on the resist roller. POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec - 2.7 sec after turning off PPD2. 6. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/ document transport (Duplex model) (AR-M201 only) C. Back copy A. Initial state Set duplex documents on the document tray. By switchback operation, the document is sent through the upper transport roller and the PS roller to the exposure section, where the back surface of the document is exposed. Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed tray cannot be selected.) • The document is sent to the document exit section by the lower transport roller and the paper exit roller. B. Front copy • The document is sent to the intermediate tray. (However, it is not discharged completely.) Document transport: The document feed roller feeds the document from the paper feed roller to the PS roller. • The document is exposed in the exposure section, and transported to the document exit section by the lower transport roller and the paper exit roller. • The document is transported to the paper exit tray. (However, it is not discharged completely.) • The document is stopped once, and then switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy) Document transport: • The document is stopped once, and switchback operation is performed. • The document is sent through the upper transport roller and the PS roller and the exposure section (without being exposed) to the document exit section. • The document is discharged to the document exit tray. Paper transport: Switchback operation is performed. Paper transport: • The paper is sent through the upper side of the gate section and the duplex transport section and the PS roller, and the images on the back surface are transferred. The paper is passed through the paper feed roller and the PS roller, and the images on the front surface are transferred. • The paper is sent through the fusing section and discharged to the paper exit tray. • The paper is passed through the fusing section and the lower side of the gate section to the paper exit tray side. (However, it is not discharged completely.) • The paper is stopped once, and switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 7 Rotation copy mode: The front and the back are in upside down each other. Copy mode without rotation: The front and the back are not in upside down. 7. Shifter (AR-M200/M201) Shift width: 2.5cm The offset function by the shifter is turned ON/OFF by the user program. According to the setting, offset operation is performed for every job. (Default: ON) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 8 [8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 2) Remove the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum. (Note) Dispose the drum fixing plate which was removed. Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord for safety. 1. Do not disconnect or connect the connector and the harness during the machine is powered. Especially be careful not to disconnect or connect the harness between the MCU PWB and the LSU (MCU PWB: CN119) during the machine is powered. (If it is disconnected or connected during the machine is powered, the IC inside the LSU will be destroyed.) 2. To disconnect the harness after turning on the power, be sure to turn off the power and wait for at least 10 sec before disconnection. (Note that a voltage still remains immediately after turning off the power.) The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the following sections: LO C K (2) 1. High voltage section 2. Operation panel section 3. Optical section (3) 4. Fusing section 5. Tray paper feed/transport section 6. Manual paper feed section 3) Check the cleaning blade and the red felt for no damage. 7. Rear frame section • If there is any damage, execute all procedures from item 5) and later. 8. Power section 9. DV unit section • If there is no damage, execute the procedure of item 12). 10. Duplex motor section (AR-M201 only) 11. Reverse roller section (AR-M201 only) 4) Remove the main charger. (When uneven charging occurs, clean the screen grid and the sawteeth with an air blower.) 1. High voltage section A. List No. 1 2 3 Part name Ref. Drum Transfer charger unit Charger wire B. Drum replacement 1) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs) 5) Remove the cleaning blade. Note: Dispose the cleaning blade which was removed. If a cleaning error occurs, replace the cleaning blade. (Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 1 6) Clean the cleaning section and the waste toner pipe to remove waste toner completely with a vacuum cleaner. Normal state of the molt • Machine F side 7) Remove the felt and duplex tape completely. Note: Be careful not to scratch or bend the sub blade. 8) Attach the cleaning blade. Securely insert the plate section of the cleaning blade into the unit and fix it with a screw. Do not touch the cleaning blade rubber with your hand. When attaching the cleaning blade, press the cleaning blade in the arrow direction and attach. • Machine R side Attach the cleaning blade, press the molt on the process frame with a screwdriver (–), and push it in the clearance between the process frame and the cleaning blade. • Machine F side 9) Attach the moquettes. ∗: Check while pressing the blade. Cleaning blade Moquette R 0 – 0.3 mm Moquette F 0.2 – 0.5 mm • Machine R side ∗ 0.2 – 0.5 mm ∗ 0 – 0.3 mm Sub blade 0 – 0.5 mm 0 – 0.5 mm Cleaning blade Moquette R Moquette F Sub blade Be careful not to allow the moquette to cover the sub blade. Example of NG Attach the mocket with slightly pressing section A of the cleaning blade. Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade. Do not put the mocket under the cleaning blade. Do not put the mocket on the sub blade. Do not press the sub blade with the mocket. If the moquette F/R is deformed or damaged, replace it. (Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 2 C. Disassembly procedure 10) Attach the main charger. Securely set the MC holder on the projection of the process frame. 1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side cover. Securely insert two projections of the MC holder into the groove in the process frame. When attaching the MC holder ass'y, be careful not to make contact with the cleaning blade. 1) 2) 11) Attach the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum. Apply grease to the inside of the photoconductor drum. (Dia. 2) 2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and remove the transfer charger. Lock pawl rear 1) 2) Attach the drum from (b). (Prevention against the sub blade edge breakage) Attach the drum so that its position with the sub blade is as shown. 12) Attach the drum cover. Transfer charger 1) Note: After attaching the drum cover, do not make a copy. When attaching the drum cover, engage the detection gear 20T rib with the 30T gear rib, and attach the drum cover to the process frame. 13) Insert the process unit into the machine until it is fully engaged. Lock pawl front D. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 3 E. Charger wire cleaning F. Charger wire replacement 1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit. 1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw. 2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire. 3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and (2). At that time, be careful of the following items. • The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. Refer to Fig.1 • The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be in the range of the projection section. • Be careful not to twist the charger wire. 3) 1) 1) Charger wire 1) 2) Clean the TC front guide and the TC holder with alcohol. 2) 1mm Protrusion 3) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it reciprocally a few times in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure below. 1.5mm 4) 3) Fig.1 2. Operation panel section 2) 1) A. List No. 1 2 Part name Ref. Operation panel unit Operation PWB B. Disassembly procedure 1) Open the side door, and Open the front cover. 1) 2) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 4 2) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation panel unit. (AR-M200/M201) 1) 3) 2) 1) 2) 1) 5) 5) 5) 5) 4) 2) 1) 1) 3) Remove four screws, and remove the operation cabinet. 4) Remove four screws, and remove the operation PWB. (AR-203E/5420) C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure 2) 1) 3. Optical section A. List 1) NO. 1 2 3 1) 3) 3) 3) 1) 3) 3) B. Disassembly procedure 3) 4) 3) Part name Ref. Copy lamp unit Copy lamp Lens unit 1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet cover. 1) 3) 2) 2) 1) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 5 1) 2) Remove two screws, and remove the earth wire. 10) Move the carriage to the position indicated on the figure. 3) Disconnect the connector. 11) Loosen the screw which is fixing the tension plate. 4) Remove the original cover. 12) Move the tension plate in the arrow direction to release the tension, and remove the belt. 3) 2) 4) 1) 13) Remove the screw, and remove the rod stopper. 14) Remove the rod. 3) 5) Remove five screws. Remove the operation unit, and disconnect the connector. 6) Remove the right cabinet. 7) Remove the left cabinet. 8) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cover. 9) Remove the table glass. 2) 1) 1) 7) 1) 5) 8) 15) Lift the rear side of the carriage, remove the belt and the connector, and remove the carriage. 1) 3) 4) 4) 2) 2) 1) 1) 3) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 6 1) C. Assembly procedure 4. Fusing section CCD core A. List 1) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the CCD PWB of the carriage unit. 2) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the duplex tape on the back surface of the carriage unit. Clean and remove oil and dirt from the attachment surface. 3) Pass the CCD-MCU harness through the square hole in the base plate. 4) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the base plate with duplex tape. 5) Attach two cable fixing sheets to fix the CCD-MCU harness to the base plate. 6) Pass the core through the CCD-MCU harness and fix the core. No. 1 2 3 4 5 Part name Ref. Thermistor PPD2 sensor Heater lamp Pressure roller Heat roller B. Disassembly procedure 1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet. 2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusing unit. 7) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the MCU PWB. Note: Attach the FCC to the base plate securely with duplex tape to prevent against coming loose. 1) 3) Note: Attach the FCC to fit with the marking line. 2) Marking line. 2) 3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the thermistor. 1) 2) Thermistor 3) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 7 4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide. 7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater lamp. 1) 2) 1) 2) Pressure roller section disassembly 5) Remove the three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on the right side, and open the heat roller section. Heater lamp 2) 3) 4) 8) Remove the spring, and remove the upper separation pawls (3 pcs.). 6) 3) 5) 1) 5) 2) 6) 6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor. 1) 1) 2) PPD2 sensor 9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate. 3) 1) 2) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 8 10) Remove the spring, and remove the lower separation pawls (4 pcs.). Heat roller disassembly (Continued from procedure (4).) 5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat roller section. 2) 3) 2) 2) 2) 2) 1) 1) 3) 2) 11) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left sides. 6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the heat roller. 1) 2) Heat roller 3) 1) 1) 7) Remove the parts from the heat roller. 12) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the spring. Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with an asterisk (∗). Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with ∗1. Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ 1 Pressure roller 1 1) 3) 3) 2) 1 2) 1) 1) 2) 3) 8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit. Note: The set temperature of the thermostat differs from that of the current model. Current model AR-203E/5420 AR-M200/M201 Temperature 210°C 230°C AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 9 2) Remove two screws, and remove the hinge guide R. 3) Disconnect the connector. (2 positions) 4) Remove five screws, and remove the scanner unit. 1) 5) Remove the fan duct. 2) 2) 3) 2) 2) 2) 2) 2) 3) 1) 2) C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 5. Tray paper feed/transport section 6) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the speaker unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed) A. List No. 1 2 3 4 5 Part name Ref. PPD1 sensor PWB POD sensor PWB LSU unit Intermediate frame unit Paper feed roller B. Disassembly procedure 1) Remove the paper holding arm. Remove the arm holder from the main unit, and remove the holder from the arm. (AR-M200/M201) 7) Remove the connector. 1) 8) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed) 2) 2) 2) 2) 1) 3) 4) 3) 2) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 10 2) 9) Remove each connector and four screws, and remove the MCU PWB. (The shape of the MCU PWB differs depending on the model.) 11) Remove two springs and open the intermediate frame unit. (AR-203E/5420) 1) 3) 2) 1) 2) 2) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 2) 10) Remove the PWB insulation mylar and remove the paper transport detection sensor (POD). 1) 12) Remove the screw, and open the upper paper guide. (AR-M200/M201) 1) 1) 2) 2) 13) Remove the roller, and remove the belt. (AR-M200/M201) 2) 1) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 11 14) Remove the pulleys on the both sides and remove the paper exit roller. (AR-203E/5420) 18) Remove the harness guide. 3) 1) 4) 19) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor. 2) 2) 15) Disengage the pawl, and remove the roller knob. 1) 16) Disengage the pawl, and shift the pulley and the bearing. 3) 2) 20) Remove three screws, and remove the DUP motor unit and the belt. (AR-M201) 1) 4) 17) Remove the paper exit roller, and remove the belt, the pulley, and the bearing. 1) 2) 1) 2) 1) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 12 3) 21) Remove five screws and the grounding wire. For the AR-203E/5420/M200, remove the main drive plate and the belt. For the AR-M201, remove the main drive plate. 23) Remove four screws, and remove the paper guide unit. (AR-203E/5420) 1) 1) 1) 2) 2) 1) 1) 1) AR-203E/5420/M200 AL-2030 only 3) 1) 24) Remove four screws, and remove the lower paper guide unit. (AR-M200/M201) [Note for installation] Fit the lower paper guide hole (a) with the shifter gear hole (b) so that the black resin (c) of the shifter unit can be checked. c b a CAUTION:Attach the gears securely 22) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressure release solenoid and the paper feed solenoid. 1) 1) 1) 1) 3) 2) 4) 2) 1) 1) 4) 2) 3) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 13 25) Put the lower paper guide unit upside down, remove two screws, and remove the shifter motor. (AR-M200/M201) 30) Remove four screws, and remove the LSU unit. 1) 1) 1) 1) 2) 2) 26) Remove the screw, and remove the grounding plate and the gear. (AR-M200/M201) [Note for assembling the LSU] 27) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing, and remove the shifter roller. (AR-M200/M201) When installing the LSU, turn the LSU clockwise and fix with screws in order to provide an attachment backlash in the proper direction. Observe the following sequence of fixing screws. 1) 2) 3) 28) Disengage the pawl, and remove the pulley. 29) Shift and remove the shifter unit. (AR-M200/M201) 3) 2) 4) 3) 1) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 14 31) Remove the screw, slide the left cabinet to the left to detach it. Remove each pawl, and remove the paper exit tray. 3) 34) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-circular earth plate and the PS roller unit. 35) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS roller unit. 5) 4) PS roller unit Use grease of Floil FG40H only to apply to this section. 4) PS semi-circular PS semi-circuler earth plate earth plate 5) 1) 1) 2) 2) 4) 3) 32) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector. 33) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediate frame unit to remove. 36) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide. 3) 1) 4) 2) 2) 2) 1) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 15 37) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1 sensor PWB. 6. Manual paper feed section A. List No. 1 2 3 4 1) Part name Ref. Manual transport roller Cassette detection switch PPD1 sensor PWB Side door detection unit B. Disassembly procedure Multi unit 2) 1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover. 1) 38) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller. 39) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit. Back 5) 2) Clutch unit 4) Paper feed roller 4) 3) Front 1) 2) C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 16 2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit. 4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit from the multi paper feed upper frame. 2) 2) 1) 1) Back 1) Wire treatment 2) 3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upper frame. 1) 1) 5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed roller B9. 1) 1) 2) 1) 3) L O CK T O K AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 17 2) D. Pressure plate holder attachment 6) Remove the pick-up roller. 1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not covered with the seal M1-N. Seal M1-N 1) Pressure plate holder Attachment reference 2) 7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid. 1) Attachment reference 7. Rear frame section A. List Multi paper feed solenoid 3) 2) No. 1 2 3 4 Part name Ref. Scanner motor Main motor Exhaust fan motor Main PWB B. Disassembly procedure 1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet cover. 1) 2) C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 2) 1) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 18 1) 2) Remove the connector. 3) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed) 7) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the exhaust fan motor. Note: Be careful of the installing directions of the fan. Attach it so that the blowing direction faces outside. 1) 2) 2) 3) 1) 3) 2) 2) 2) 4) Disconnect the connector. Blowing direction 5) Remove two screws, and remove the scanner motor. 8) Disconnect the connectors. 9) Remove the five screws, and remove the MCU PWB. 1) 1) 1) 3) 2) 3) 2) 2) 1) 1) 1) 2) 1) 6) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the main motor. 2) C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 3) 1) 2) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 19 8 Power section 2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV cover. 1) A. List No. 1 Part name Ref. Power PWB 2) B. Disassembly procedure 1) Disconnect each connector. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line. 3) Remove two screws, and remove the power PWB unit. 4) 1) 1) 1) 1) 3) Remove the used developer. 2) 1) 3) 5) 4) 4) Supply new developer. C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 9. DV unit section A. Developer 1) Remove the screw, slide the pawl to the right side, and remove the TN guide. B. DV seal 1) Peel off the old DV seal. 2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol. 1) 3) Attach the new DV seal to the reference position. DV side seal F C A DV side seal R D B 0.5 A 0 0 C 0.5 0.5 2) X D 0.5 0 B 0 X Bump B X-X AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 20 Magnification ratio: 200% C. DV blade E. DV sensor 1) Peel off the old DV blade. 1) Remove the Mylar. 2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV sensor. 3) Attach the new DV blade to the reference position. * Clean the sensor (A) section. A 1) B 0.5 DV blade IC A 2) 0 3) 2) DV-BOX AS B D. DV doctor A 1) Remove the screw, and remove the DV doctor. * Clean the edge (A) section. 10. Duplex motor section (AR-M201 only) A. List No. 1 1) A Part name Ref. Duplex motor B. Disassembly procedure 2) 1) Remove the rear cabinet. 1) 2) Remove two screws. 3) Remove the Duplex motor cover. ■ Note for installation 4) Remove the Duplex motor. 1) Insert the DG check gauge as shown in the figure. 2) After checking, install the doctor gap and fix it with a screw. * Apply screw lock to the screw tightening section as shown in the figure below. MG-ROL DG check gauge C DG sect F/R :1.5 ion DG se 5 :1. ctio 0.15 5 n 0.1 0 * After checking the DG, apply screw lock. FRONT 1 20 F 10 10 C 3 REAR R 110 20 2 DG check position 1 Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the Duplex motor gear with the belt on the main body side. C. Assembly procedure DG check gauge DG check gauge DG check gauge 1 2 For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 21 11. Reverse roller section (AR-M201 only) A. List No. 1 Part name Ref. Reverse roller B. Disassembly procedure 1) Remove four screws. 2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire. 3) Remove the reverse unit. 2 3 1 4) Bend the reverse roller and remove it. 1 C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 22 [9] ADJUSTMENTS 5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio. Main scanning direction magnification ratio 1. Optical section = A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment X 100 (%) (When a 100mm scale is used as the original.) Original (Scale) The copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanning direction and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use SIM 48-1. (1) Copy image dimensions Original dimension mm 1/2mm 10 20 100 110 120 JAPAN HARDENED STAINLESS 130 140 150 Shizuoka Outline The main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment is made automatically or manually. Paper feed direction mm 1/2mm HARDENED STAINLESS JAPAN 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150 Shizuoka Automatic adjustment: The width of the reference line marked on the shading correction plate is scanned to perform the main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment automatically. Manual adjustment: The adjustment is made by [Copy quantity] keys (or [Numeric] keys for the AR-M200/M201) operations. (In either of the automatic and manual adjustments, the zoom data register set value is changed for adjustment.) The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted by changing the carriage (scanner) scanning speed. (2) Main scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment a. Cases when the adjustment is required 1) When the main PWB is replaced. 2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. 3) When "U2" trouble occurs. 4) When repairing or replacing the optical section. b. Necessary tools Reference Comparison point Copy 110 6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures. 7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the main scanning direction copy magnification ratio adjustment mode. To select the adjustment mode, use the [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201). In the case of the automatic adjustment, when the START switch is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading to scan the width of the reference line, calculating the correction value and displaying and storing this value. After execution of the automatic adjustment, go out from the simulation mode and make a copy to check the magnification ratio. • Screwdriver (+) If the magnification ratio is not in the specified range (100 ± 1.0%), manually adjust as follows. • Scale (AR-203E/5420) c. Adjustment procedure Adjustment mode Display lamp Main scanning direction TEXT mode lamp magnification ratio OC mode sub scan PHOTO mode lamp direction magnification ratio 1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long scale for precise adjustment.) Default 50 50 (AR-M200/M201) Adjustment mode Main scan direction magnification ratio OC mode sub scan direction magnification ratio Display LED Default item F-R PRINT mode lamp 50 SCAN SCAN mode lamp 50 8) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the copy quantity key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201), and press the [START] key. 9) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio is within the specified range. When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%. (3) Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio a. Cases when the adjustment is required 2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%. 3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper. 1) When the scanner unit drive section is disassembled or the part is replaced. 4) Measure the length of the copied scale image. 2) When the main PWB is replaced. 3) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. 4) When "U2" trouble occurs. b. Necessary tools • Scale AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 1 c. Adjustment procedure B. Image position adjustment 1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a long scale for precise adjustment.) There are following eleven kinds of image position adjustments, which are made by laser control except for the image scan start position adjustment. For the adjustments, SIM 50-01 and 50-10 are used. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Mode Print start position (Main cassette paper feed) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Image lead edge void amount Image scan start position Image rear edge void amount (Cassette paper feed) Image rear edge void amount (Manual paper feed) Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed) Print center offset (Manual paper feed) 2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) SIM 50-01 50-01 50-01 50-01 50-01 50-01 50-01 50-10 50-10 50-10 50-10 (AR-203E/5420) To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-01, use the [Exposure mode selector] key. The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lamps are as shown in the table below. 2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%. 3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper. 4) Measure the length of the copied scale image. 5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio using the formula below. = Copy image dimensions Original dimension X 100 (%) 110 HARDDENCD STAINLESS JAPAN 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 Shizuoka mm 1/2mm 10 20 100 110 120 JAPAN 130 140 Paper feed direction Comparison point AE, manual feed lamp TEXT lamp PHOTO lamp AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lamps are as shown in the table below. 150 Shizuoka Reference AE, 2nd cassette lamp To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-10, use the [Exposure mode selector] key. 150 HARDDENCD STAINLESS Lamp ON AE, main cassette lamp : Supported for the installing model and skipped for non-installing mode. Original (Scale) mm 1/2mm Adjustment mode Print start position (Main cassette paper feed) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Image lead edge void quantity Image scan start position Image rear edge void quantity Copy 6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within the specified range. (100 ± 1.0%). If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures. 7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio adjustment mode. To select the adjustment mode, use the [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ] [ ] key for the AR-M200/M201). (PHOTO lamp ON (or SCAN mode lamp ON for the AR-M200/M201)) Machine with the multi manual paper feed unit Adjustment mode Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) Print center offset (2nd cassette) Print center offset (Manual paper feed) Second side center offset Lamp ON AE, main cassette lamp AE, 2nd cassette lamp AE, manual paper feed lamp TEXT lamp : Supported for the installing model and skipped for non-installing mode. 8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the [Copy quantity] keys (or [Numeric] keys for the AR-M200/M201), and press the [START] key. Repeat procedures 1) - 8) until the sub scanning direction actual copy magnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified range. When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration is changed by 0.1%. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 2 (AR-M200/M201) To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-01, use the [ key. ][ ] The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lamps are as shown in the table below. Adjustment mode Print start position (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Image lead edge void amount Image scan start position Image rear edge void amount (Cassette paper feed) Image rear edge void amount (Manual paper feed) Display item Lamp ON TRAY1 COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp TRAY2 COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp MFT COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp DEN-A PRINT mode lamp Main cassette lamp RRC-A SCAN mode lamp Main cassette lamp DEN-B COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Main cassette lamp RRC-B COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-10, use the [ key. ][ 4) Measure the image loss amount (R mm) of the scale image. Set C = 10 X R (mm). (Example: Set the value of C to 30.) When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50) 5) Measure the distance (H mm) between the paper lead edge and the image print start position. Set A = 10 X H (mm). (Example: Set the value of A to 50.) When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is shifted to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50) 6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). When the value of B is increased by 10, the void amount is increased by about 1mm. For 25 or less, however, the void amount becomes zero. (Default: 50) (Example) Distance between paper lead edge and image: H = 5mm Image loss: R = 3mm 5mm ] 10mm The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lamps are as shown in the table below. Adjustment mode Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed) Print center offset (Manual paper feed) 2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) (1) Display item Lamp ON TRAY1 COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp TRAY2 COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp MFT COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp SIDE2 PRINT mode lamp Main cassette lamp (2) Image rear edge void amount adjustment 1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11" x 8 1/2" paper size as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper. B4 or 8 1/2″ × 14″ paper A4 size rear edge Lead edge adjustment 1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper. 2) Execute SIM 50-01 to select the image rear edge void amount adjustment mode. The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display. 3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge. Void amount (Standard value: 2 - 3mm) Scale image 2) Execute SIM 50-01 3) Set the print start position (AE lamp ON) (A), the lead edge void amount (TEXT lamp ON) (B), and the scan start position (PHOTO lamp ON) (C) to 0, and make a copy of a scale at 100%. (AR-203E/5420) For the AR-M200/M201, the following LED’s are lighted: • AE lamp/COPY mode lamp: (A) • TEXT lamp/PRINT mode lamp: (B) • PHOTO lamp/SCAN mode lamp: (C) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 3 Paper rear edge 4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure. The default value is 50. 2. Copy density adjustment Note: The rear edge void cannot be checked with the first sheet after entering the simulation mode, the first sheet after turning off/on the power, or the first sheet after inserting the cassette. Use the second or later sheet to check the rear edge void. The copy density adjustment must be performed in the following cases: (3) Center offset adjustment A. Copy density adjustment timing • When maintenance is performed. • When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted. • When the optical section is cleaned. • When a part in the optical section is replaced. 1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment so that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the document guide. • Test chart for the center position adjustment. Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2" x 11" paper in the paper transport direction. Document guide • When the optical section is disassembled. • When the OPC drum is replaced. • When the main control PWB is replaced. • When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced. • When the memory trouble (U2) occurs. B. Note for copy density adjustment 1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment • Clean the optical section. • Clean or replace the charger wire. Center • Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and the developing bias voltage are in the specified range. Copy paper (A4 or 8 1/2″ × 11″) C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment 2) Execute SIM 50-10 to select the print center offset (cassette paper feed) adjustment mode. The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display. • One of the following test charts: UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE • B4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper • The user program AE setting should be "3." 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W 3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properly positioned. The standard value is 0 ± 2mm from the paper center. Test chart comparison table (Copy A) 2.0mm or less Copy image Shift (Copy B) Copy paper folding line 2.0mm or less Copy image Shift Copy paper folding line (Paper feed direction) UKOG0162FCZZ DENSITY No. UKOG0089CSZZ DENSITY No. KODAK GRAY SCALE 1 2 0.1 3 4 0.2 1 5 6 7 8 0.3 2 3 4 9 10 W 0.5 1.9 0 19 A D. Features of copy density adjustment 4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure. When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is shifted by 0.1mm toward the rear frame. For the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function provided in the image process LSI is used. List of the adjustment modes • For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feed adjustment mode and perform the similar procedures. Auto mode Manual mode • Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by the CCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of document guide, there is no need to adjust manually. Photo mode Manual T/S mode T/S Auto mode AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 4 Brightness 1 step only Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 1 step only E. Copy density adjustment procedure Use SIM 46-1 to set the copy density for each copy mode. For selection of modes, use the [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201). (1) Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting 1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter) reference line on the document table. Then place a A4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper on the test chart and close the document cover. Adjustment mode Auto mode Text mode Photo mode Text T/S mode Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT Auto T/S mode TSAE Sharp gray chart adjustment level "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp "3" is slightly copied. SCAN mode lamp 3) Make a copy. Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of the exposure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale). Sharp Gray Scale adjustment level Non toner save mode White paper 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W 6 7 8 9 10 W Slightly copied. Not copied. Toner save mode 1 2 Test chart 3 4 5 Slightly copied. Not copied. (When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy quantity display. (When too dark): (2) Perform the adjustment in each mode. 1) Execute SIM 46-01 (300dpi). To adjust in 600dpi, execute SIM 46-02. Increase the value displayed on the copy quantity display. ∗ The value can be set in the range of 1 - 99. 3. High voltage adjustment 2) AR-203E/5420 Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select key. Set the exposure level to 3 for all adjustment. (Except for the auto mode.) A. Main charger (Grid bias) (1) • Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10MΩ or more measurement. (2) (1) Exposure mode select key/display lamp (2) [Exposure mode selector] key/ display lamp Adjustment mode Auto mode Manual mode Photo mode Manual T/S mode Auto T/S mode Exposure mode display lamp Auto lamp ON Manual lamp ON Photo lamp ON Manual lamp/Photo lamp ON Sharp gray chart adjustment level "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. Auto lamp/Photo lamp ON "3" is slightly copied. Note: • After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output. Do not reverse the sequence. Procedures 1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V. 2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3 (GRID) of high voltage section of the power PWB and set the negative side to the frame ground (power frame). 3) Execute SIM 8-2. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage HIGH output mode.) 4) Adjust the control volume (VRG1) so that the output voltage is 580 ± 12V. 2) AR-M200/M201 Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure key. Set the exposure level to 3 (center) for all adjustment. (Except for the auto mode.) VRG1 TEXT | | | | | 1 2 2 1 2 1 (1) Exposure mode, level display 2 1 (2) Exposure key AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 5 B. DV bias check Note: • A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1GΩ must be use for correct check. • The adjustment volume is locked, and no adjustment can be made. 2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below, in the S-D mode and the D-S mode. Scale (S-D mode) Scale (D-S mode) Procedures 1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V. 2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1 (DV BIAS) and set the negative side to the frame ground (power frame). 3) Execute SIM 8-1 to output the developing bias for 30sec, and check that the output is –400 ± 8V. VRDV 3) Execute simulation 50-18. Mode Display item Default LED OC memory reverse OC 50 COPY mode lamp output position SPF/RSPF memory SPF 50 PRINT mode lamp reverse output position Select the SPF/RSPF memory reverse output position, and press [START] key to make a copy. Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than 4.0 mm in the SPF/RSPF mode. An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in image loss. Front edge of paper The front edge of the scale on test chart less than 4 mm Void area 5 10 4. Duplex adjustment A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for duplex copying (AR-M200/M201) This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of a document set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge position of an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode. That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing mode (image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image data is once stored in memory. The image data is read, starting from its front end in the document delivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the OC mode)and stored in memory. This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position, in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data. In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be adjusted by changing the document read end position. (Adjustment procedure) 1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a sheet of A4 white paper or letter paper) 2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side) B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode (AR-M201) This is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end void) in duplex copying. In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from the rear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to make a void area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paper jam at the fusing part. There are two adjustment modes: 1) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (TEXT) 5 10 This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size is recognized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted by changing the trailing edge image laser OFF timing. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 6 2) Print start position (Duplex back surface) (SPF/RSPF) 50-19 (PHOTO) The size (length) of a document read from the SPF/RSPF is detected, the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut to make a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity at the time when the cassette paper size is not recognized.) The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image cut trailing edge void quantity (SPF/RSPF) is adjusted. (Adjustment procedure) (1) Paper trailing edge void quantity 2) Execute SIM 50-19 to turn on the SCAN mode lamp and make the printing mode in the S-D mode. 3) Remove and reinsert the cassette. Note: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy during this adjustment. 4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the image. Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm. An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in void area. Void position to be checked 1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper) 5. Automatic black level correction 2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below. a. Cases when the adjustment is required Document guide The trailing edge has a scale 1) When the main PWB is replaced. 2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. 3) When "U2" trouble occurs. 4) When repairing or replacing the optical section. b. Adjustment procedure Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance. When SIM 63-02 is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number. Table glass Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate left center. 3) Using the user simulation [18], set the paper size of the first cassette. 10 • Letter paper: 4 • A4 paper: 3 Chart back surface 4) Execute SIM 50-19 to turn on the PRINT mode lamp and make the printing mode in OC-D mode. Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale on the image. Void position to be check When [START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the correction value. Paper After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the display section. ∗ Default: 0 ∗ If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60. AR-M200/M201 c. Operation 1) Initial display The trailing edge void on the first printing surface is shown above. Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm. An increase in 1 of setting represents 0.1 mm in void area. (2) Print start position (Duplex back surface) 1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below. 63-02 BLACK LEVEL 0 2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key: Correction start 63-02 BLACK LEVEL EXECUTING... <During canceling - When [Clear]/[Clear All] key is pressed-> After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. THE JOB IS BEING CANCELED. 3) After execution 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** OK 3) In case of an error Scale (S-D mode) 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** ERR AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 7 [10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 1. Entering the simulation mode Sim No. 02 Sub code 03 06 08 To enter the serviceman simulation mode, press the keys as follows: AR-203E/AR-5420 [Clear] key → Exposure mode selector key → [Clear] key → Exposure mode selector key AR-M200/AR-M201 [#] key → [∗] key → [Clear] key → [∗] key 09 03 05 To cancel the simulation mode, press the [Clear All] key. 06 2. Key rule 07 AR-203E/AR-5420 [ ] [ ] key: Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE Setting of the adjustment values for the adjustment-related simulations When [%] key is pressed simultaneously, the value is displayed in the descending sequence such as [0] → [9], not as [0] → [1]. Settlement <In case of simulations for print> [START] key: Settlement / Print [START] key: [Exposure mode selector] key: [Clear] key: Selection of an item (Interrupting operation check) Returns to the upper hierarchy. On the initial display (00-00), it terminates the simulation. Exits from the simulation mode. For a simulation of adjustment, the display returns to the initial display (00-00). 08 09 02 04 10 14 16 20 21 22 AR-M200/AR-M201 [Numeric] key: [ ][ ] key: [OK]/[ENTER]/ [START] key: [Clear] key: [Clear All] key: Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE Selection of an item Setup of an adjustment value in case of simulations for adjustment Selection of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE Selection of an item Settlement <In case of simulations for print> [OK]/[ENTER] key: Settlement (Without print) [START] key: Settlement / Print (Interrupting operation check) Returns to the upper hierarchy. In case of simulation of operation check, terminates the operations. Exits from the simulation mode. For a simulation of adjustment, the display returns to the initial display (00-00). 3. List of simulations Sim No. 01 02 Sub code 01 02 06 01 02 Operation Mirror scan operation Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display Aging of mirror scanning SPF/RSPF aging operation (Only the AR-203E/ M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) SPF/RSPF sensor status display (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) 03 01 02 03 01 02 01 06 08 01 02 03 06 01 01 01 01 02 04 05 06 08 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 21 22 24 01 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 13 14 Operation SPF/RSPF Motor ON (Only the AR-203E/M200/ M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Resist clutch ON (SPF) (AR-203E only) RSPF paper feed solenoid operation check (Only the AR-M200/M201 with the RSPF installed) RSPF reverse solenoid operation check (Only the AR-M200/M201 with the RSPF installed) Shifter operation check (AR-M200/M201) Operation panel display check Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check Copy lamp ON Paper feed solenoid ON Resist solenoid ON Warm-up display and aging with jam Intermittent aging Shift to copy with the warm-up display Developing bias Main charger (Grid high) Grid voltage (Low) Transfer charger Duplex motor normal rotation operation check (AR-M201 only) Duplex motor reverse operation check (AR-M201 only) Duplex motor rotation speed adjustment (AR-M201 only) Toner motor aging Cancel of troubles other than U2 Cancel of U2 trouble Maintenance counter clear Maintenance cycle setting Maintenance counter display Maintenance preset display JAM total counter display Total counter display Developer counter display SPF/RSPF counter display (Only the AR-203E/ M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) FAX-related counter display (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Drum counter display CRUM type display ROM version display Duplex counter display (AR-M201 only) Copy counter display Printer counter display Scanner mode counter display (AR-203E/M200/M201) Scanner counter display SPF/RSPF JAM counter display (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) JAM total counter clear SPF/RSPF counter clear (Only the AR-203E/ M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Duplex counter clear (AR-M201 only) Developer counter clear Drum counter clear Copy counter clear Printer counter clear FAX counter clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Scanner counter clear SPF/RSPF JAM total counter clear (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 1 Sim No. 24 Sub code 15 25 01 26 30 41 10 02 03 04 06 07 20 30 37 39 40 42 43 54 62 01 06 07 43 46 01 04 05 14 01 02 12 13 14 15 18 19 20 29 30 31 32 39 48 01 05 49 50 01 01 06 10 Operation Scanner mode counter clear (AR-203E/M200/M201) Main motor operation check (Cooling fan motor rotation check) Polygon motor ON SPF/RSPF setup Second cassette setup Machine duplex setup Destination setup Machine conditions check Rear edge void setup CE mark support control ON/OFF Cancel of stop at developer life over Memory capacity check Polygon motor OFF time setup (Time required for turning OFF after completion of printing) Transfer ON timing control setup Side void setup γ life correction setting Energy-save mode copy lamp setup Paper sensor status display OC cover float detection level adjustment (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) OC cover float detection margin setting (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) Fusing temperature setting in multi copy Fusing temperature setup in duplex copy (AR-M201 only) Fusing start temperature setting Copy density adjustment (300dpi) Copy density adjustment (600dpi) Density adjustment in the FAX mode (Collective adjustment) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAX mode density adjustment (Normal text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) Exposure mode setup SPF/RSPF exposure correction (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) AE limit adjustment Image sharpness adjustment Copier color reproduction setup FAX mode sharpness adjustment (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Front/rear (main scanning) direction and scan (sub scanning) direction magnification ratio adjustment SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio in copying (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Flash ROM program writing mode Lead edge image position Copy lead edge position adjustment (SPF/RSPF) (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Center offset adjustment Sim No. 50 Sub code 12 18 19 51 53 02 08 61 63 03 01 02 12 13 01 01 64 66 02 03 04 05 07 10 11 12 13 17 18 21 24 30 33 34 37 38 67 50 Operation Document off-center adjustment Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy (Only the AR-M201, or the AR-M200 with the RSPF installed) Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment (AR-M201 only) Resist quantity adjustment SPF/RSPF scan position automatic adjustment (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Polygon motor check (HSYNC output check) Shading check Black level automatic correction Light quantity stabilization wait time setting Light quantity stabilization band setting Self print (1by2 mode) FAX soft SW setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment values) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAX PWB memory check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Signal send mode (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Signal send mode (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Image memory content print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Image memory content clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 300bps signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Dial test (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) DTMF signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAX information print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAST SRAM clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) TEL/LIU status change check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Signal detection check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Communication time measurement (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Speaker sound volume setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Time setting/check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) USB receive speed adjustment (USB1.1) (AR-203E only) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 2 4. Descriptions of various simulations Main code 01 Sub code 01 Contents Details of function/operation Mirror scan operation [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the home position is checked and the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio. During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed. The mirror home position sensor status is displayed with the "Drum replacement required lamp (or the copy mode indicator for the AR-M200/M201)". (When the mirror is in the home position, the lamp lights up.) During operation, the copy lamp lights up. When [Clear] key is pressed, if the operation is on the way, it is terminated and the machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 01-01 SCAN CHK - 100% + 2) [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key 01-01 SCAN CHK - 78% + 2) [ 3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 01-01 SCAN CHK EXECUTING... - 78% + ] key 01-01 SCAN CHK - 99% + 2) [ ] key 01-01 SCAN CHK - 101% + 02 Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display [Function] Monitors the mirror home position sensor, and makes the "Drum replacement required lamp (or the copy mode indicator for the AR-M200/M201)" turn on during the sensor ON status. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 01-02 MHP-SENSOR EXECUTING... 06 Aging of mirror scanning [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio. During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed. After 3sec, the mirror base performs full scan again. ∗ When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed once, the ready lamp remains OFF. The mirror home position sensor status is displayed on the "Drum replacement required lamp (or the copy mode indicator for the AR-M200/M201)." (The lamp is ON when the mirror is in the home position.) During aging, the copy lamp is ON. 02 01 SPF/RSPF aging operation (Only the AR-203E/M200/ M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) The operation is similar to simulation 01-01. [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the set magnification ratio is obtained. For the SPF, the single-face document transport is performed. For the RSPF, the duplex document transport is performed. However, the operating conditions don't matter and the operation is not stopped even in case of a jam. Also the magnification ratio is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) The operation is similar to simulation 01-01. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 3 Main code 02 Sub code 02 Contents Details of function/operation SPF/RSPF sensor status display (Only the AR-203E/ M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) [Function] The ON/OFF status of the SPF/RSPF sensors can be checked with the LCD/LED. When a sensor is ON, the sensor name is displayed on the LCD/LED. Display item (AR-M200/M201) SPID Sensor Document set sensor RSPF document transport sensor RSPF paper feed cover open/close sensor RSPF paper exit sensor SPPD SDSW Display item (AR-203E) TD cartridge replacement required lamp Misfeed lamp — SPOD — [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 02-02 SPF SENSOR 03 06 08 SPF/RSPF Motor ON (Only the AR-203E/M200/ M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Resist clutch ON (SPF) (AR-203E only) RSPF paper feed solenoid operation check (Only the AR-M200/M201 with the RSPF installed) 2) When the sensor is ON: 02-02 SPF SENSOR SPID SPPD SDSW SPOD [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the motor rotates for 10sec at the speed corresponding to the set magnification ratio. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) The operation is similar to simulation 01-01. When the [START] key is pressed, the SPF resist clutch (SRRC) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20 times. [Function] The RSPF paper feed solenoid (SPUS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the use of the solenoid drive control Bios. [Operation] 1) Initial display 02-08 SPF SPUS CHK EXECUTING... 09 RSPF reverse solenoid operation check (Only the AR-M200/M201 with the RSPF installed) [Function] The RSPF reverse solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the use of the solenoid drive control Bios. [Operation] 1) Initial display 02-09 RSPF SPFS CHK EXECUTING... 03 03 Shifter operation check (AR-M200/M201) [Function] The shifter is moved back and forth in four reciprocations. [Operation] 1) Initial display 03-03 SHIFTER CHK EXECUTING... AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 4 Main code 05 Sub code 01 Contents Details of function/operation Operation panel display check [Function] <LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)> When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, all the LCD's on the operation panel are turned ON (all pixels ON). After 5sec of ON, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. When [Mode Select] key is pressed under the all ON state, the mode is shifted to the individual ON mode, where the LED's are turned on one by one from the left upper end to the left lower side then from the right upper side to the right lower side. (All the pixels of LCD are lighted simultaneously.) After lighting all the LCD's sequentially, all the LCD's are lighted simultaneously. After 5sec from lighting all the LCD's simultaneously, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. (Cycle of individual ON mode: ON 300ms, OFF 20ms) When [Clear] key is pressed in the LED check mode, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. When [START] key is pressed, the machine goes into the key input check mode. <Key input check mode> When the machine goes into the key input check mode, the value display section indicates "– – –" (For the AR-M200/M201, 0 of the LCD is indicated). When any key is pressed after pressing a key on the operation panel, "+1" is added to the value. Once a key is pressed, it is not recounted. When [START] key is pressed, counting is made and the machine goes into the LED ON check mode (LED all ON status) after 3sec. When [Clear] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time, the key check mode is retained as well as when another key is pressed. (Note in the key input check mode) • Be sure to press [START] key at the last. (If it is pressed on the way, the machine goes into the LED ON check mode.) (LED all ON status) • Multi key input is ignored. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) <LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)> 1) Initial display ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ 2) When [Mode Select] key is pressed, the machine goes into the individual ON mode. <Key input check mode> 1) Initial display 2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 05-01 LCD/LED CHK. 0 05-01 LCD/LED CHK. ** 02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 5 times. During this period, the cooling fan motor rotates. Note: When the CE mark setting is ON, the slow start function may operate depending on the employed frequency. If the state of the heater lamp cannot be checked, temporarily set SIM 2630 to "0" and check the lamp state. After confirming that the heater lamp is ON, set SIM 26-30 to "1" again. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 05-02 HT LAMP CHK EXECUTING... 03 Copy lamp ON [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the copy lamp turns ON for 5sec. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 05-03 C-LAMP CHK EXECUTING... AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 5 Main code 06 Sub code 01 Contents Details of function/operation Paper feed solenoid ON [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the selected paper feed solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OF for 500ms 20 times. When tray select key (or [Numeric] key or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) is pressed, the paper feed solenoid setting is switched. Code number 0 1 2 Setting CPFS1 CPFS2 MPFS Remark Operation is possible only when No. 2 cassette is installed. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 2) [Numeric] key or [ 06-01 PSOL CHK 0:CPFS1 ] key 3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 06-01 PSOL CHK 1:CPFS2 2) [Numeric] key or [ 06-01 PSOL CHK EXECUTING... ] key 4) Returns to the initial display. 06-01 PSOL CHK 2:MPFS 02 Resist solenoid ON [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the resist solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 06-02 RES.R SOL CHK EXECUTING... 07 01 Warm-up display and aging with jam [Function] Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies. When the simulation is executed, warm-up is started and warm-up time is added for every second from 0 and displayed. When warm-up is completed, addition is stopped. When [Clear All] key is pressed, the ready lamp lights up. After that, enter the copy quantity with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to repeat copying of the set quantity (interval 0sec). To cancel the simulation, turn off the power or execute a simulation which causes hardware reset. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 2) After 10sec 07-01 W-UP/AGING 07-01 W-UP/AGING 0 06 Intermittent aging 10 [Function] Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies. When the simulation is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. Enter the copy quantity with the [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key, and copying is executed to make the set quantity of copies, and the ready state is kept for 3sec, and copying is executed again to make the set quantity of copies. These operations are repeated. To cancel the simulation, turn off the power or execute a simulation which executes hardware reset. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display (Basic display of copy) READY TO COPY 100% A4 08 Shift to copy with the warm-up display 0 [Function] Enter the simulation code, and warm-up is started and warm-up time is counted for every second from 0 and displayed. When [Clear All] key is pressed during counting up, "0" is displayed on the display and counting is stopped. However, warm-up is continued. After completion of warm-up, counting is terminated. (The aging function is removed from simulation 07-01.) [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 2) After 10sec 07-08 W-UP C-MODE 07-08 W-UP C-MODE 0 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 6 10 Main code 08 Sub code 01 Contents Details of function/operation Developing bias [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the developing bias signal is turned ON for 30sec. When, however, an actual output value is measured, use simulation 25-01. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 08-01 DVLP BIAS SET. EXECUTING... 02 Main charger (Grid high) [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid voltage HIGH move. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 08-02 MHV(H) SET. EXECUTING... 03 Grid voltage (Low) [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid voltage LOW move. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 08-03 MHV(L) SET. EXECUTING... 06 Transfer charger [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the transfer charger is outputted for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 08-06 THV SET. EXECUTING... 09 01 Duplex motor normal rotation operation check (AR-M201 only) [Function] Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the normal direction (paper exit direction) for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 09-01 DPLX ROT. EXECUTING... 02 Duplex motor reverse operation check (AR-M201 only) [Function] Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the reverse direction for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 09-02 DPLX ROT.REV. EXECUTING... 04 Duplex motor rotation speed adjustment (AR-M201 only) [Function] When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with [Numeric] key and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. The greater the set value is, the higher the speed is. The smaller the set value is, the lower the speed is. (Setting range: 1 - 13, Default: 8) [Operation] 1) Initial display 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 8( 1-13) 2) [Numeric] key 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 7( 1-13) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 7 3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 7( 1-13) Main code 10 Sub code Contents Details of function/operation Toner motor aging [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the toner motor is rotated for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the main code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 10-00 TONER MOTOR EXECUTING... 14 Cancel of troubles other than U2 [Function] Used to cancel troubles other than U2. ∗ Cancel troubles such as H trouble which writes data into EEPROM, and perform hardware reset. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 14-00 TRBL CANC. CLEARED 16 Cancel of U2 trouble [Function] Used to cancel U2 trouble. When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, check sum of the total counter in the EEPROM is rewritten and hardware reset is made. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 16-00 U2 TRBL CANC. CLEARED 20 01 Maintenance counter clear [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the maintenance count value is cleared and "000,000" is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display AR-203E/5420 The count value is displayed in 3 digits X 2 times repeatedly. 20-01 M-CNT CLR. CLEARED 000,000 <Display example: 012,345> 012 → Blank → 345 → Blank → 012 0.7s 0.3s 0.7s 1.0s 0.7s 21 01 Maintenance cycle setting [Function] The currently set code of the maintenance cycle is displayed, and the newly set data are saved. Enter the code number with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/ M201) and press [START] key. The entered value is saved and the display returns to the sub code input standby state. Code number 0 1 2 3 4 5 Setting 3,000 sheets 6,000 sheets 9,000 sheets 13,000 sheets 25,000 sheets Free (999,999 sheets) Remark Default [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) The current set value is displayed. 21-01 M-CYCLE 4:25,000 ( 0-5 ) 2) [ ] key or [Numeric] key 21-01 M-CYCLE 5:FREE ( 0-5 ) 2) [ ] key or [Numeric] key 21-01 M-CYCLE 3:13,000 ( 0-5 ) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 8 3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 21-01 M-CYCLE 5:FREE ( 0-5 ) Main code 22 Sub code 01 Contents Details of function/operation Maintenance counter display [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the maintenance counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 22-01 M-CNT ***,*** 02 Maintenance preset display [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the preset value (25,000 sheets, etc.) corresponding to the code set with simulation 21-01 is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 22-02 M-CNT PRESET ***,*** 04 JAM total counter display [Function] The JAM total counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 22-04 JAM TTL CNT ***,*** 05 Total counter display [Function] The total counter value is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 22-05 TTL CNT ***,*** 06 Developer counter display [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is obtained and displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 22-06 DVLP CNT ***,*** 08 SPF/RSPF counter display (Only the AR-203E/M200/ M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) [Function] The SPF/RSPF counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 22-08 SPF CNT ***,*** 11 FAX-related counter display (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] The FAX-related counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT COUNTER 1:PAGE 2:TIME ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Select 1 SEND PAGE:xxx,xxx RECV PAGE:xxx,xxx 2) Select 2 TX TIME:xxxxx:xx.xx RX TIME:xxxxx:xx.xx ("xxx,xxx" is the current value.) ("xxxxx: xx. xx" is the current value.) ∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". ∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 9 Main code 22 Sub code 12 Contents Details of function/operation Drum counter display [Function] The drum counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 22-12 DRUM CNT ***,*** 13 CRUM type display [Function] The CRUM type currently set (written) in the CRUM chip is displayed. Code number 00 01 02 03 99 CRUM type Not set BTA-A BTA-B BTA-C Conversion Display item 0 BTA-A BTA-B BTA-C CONVERSION [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) The CRUM type is displayed. 22-13 CRUM TYPE 01:BTA-A 14 ROM version display [Function] The P-ROM version is displayed. Press [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key or [ play version. Code number 0 1 2 Version Main unit Program F-IMC Program LCD DATA ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the dis- Display item MAIN PROG. F-IMC PROG. LCD DATA [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-14 ROM VER. MAIN PROG. 00.00 2) [Numeric] key or [ ] key 22-14 ROM VER. F-IMC PROG. 00.00 2) [Numeric] key or [ ] key 22-14 ROM VER. LCD DATA 00.00 AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 16 Duplex counter display (AR-M201 only) [Function] The duplex counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-16 DPLX CNT ***,*** 17 Copy counter display [Function] The copy counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 22-17 COPIES CNT ***,*** AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 10 Main code 22 Sub code 18 Contents Details of function/operation Printer counter display [Function] The printer counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 22-18 PRT.CNT ***,*** 19 Scanner mode counter display (AR-203E/M200/M201) [Function] The scanner mode counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 22-19 S-MODE CNT ***,*** 21 Scanner counter display [Function] The scanner counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 22-21 SCAN CNT ***,*** 22 SPF/RSPF JAM counter display (Only the AR-203E/ M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) [Function] The SPF/RSPF JAM counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 22-22 S JAM CNT ***,*** 24 01 JAM total counter clear [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the JAM total counter is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 24-01 JAM TTL CLR. CLEARED 000,000 04 SPF/RSPF counter clear (Only the AR-203E/M200/ M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the SPF/RSPF counter value is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 24-04 SPF CLR. CLEARED 000,000 05 Duplex counter clear (AR-M201 only) [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the duplex counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-05 DPLX CLR. CLEARED 000,000 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 11 Main code 24 Sub code 06 Contents Details of function/operation Developer counter clear [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 24-06 DVLP CLR. CLEARED 000,000 07 Drum counter clear [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the drum counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 24-07 DRUM CLR. CLEARED 000,000 08 Copy counter clear [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the copy counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 24-08 COPIES CLR. CLEARED 000,000 09 Printer counter clear [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the printer counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 24-09 PRT.CLR. CLEARED 000,000 10 FAX counter clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the FAX count value is set to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-10 FAX CLR. CLEARED 000,000 13 Scanner counter clear [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the scanner counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 24-13 SCAN CLR. CLEARED 000,000 14 SPF/RSPF JAM total counter clear (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the SPF/RSPF JAM total counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 24-14 S JAM TTL CLR. CLEARED 000,000 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 12 Main code 24 Sub code 15 Contents Details of function/operation Scanner mode counter clear (AR-203E/M200/M201) [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the scanner mode counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E 1) Initial display The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 24-15 S-MODE CLR. CLEARED 000,000 25 01 Main motor operation check (Cooling fan motor rotation check) [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the main motor (and the duplex motor in the case of a duplex model) is operated for 30sec. To reduce toner consumption, if the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the main charger, and the grid are also outputted. In this case, laser discharge is required when stopping the motor, the polygon motor is also operated at the same time. Check for installation of the developing unit. If it is not installed, the high voltage above is not outputted and only the motor is rotated. To check the developing bias, install the developing unit. After completion of 30sec operation, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 25-01 MAIN MOTOR CHK EXECUTING... 10 Polygon motor ON [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the Bios is called to rotate the polygon motor for 30sec. After completion of 30sec operation, the operation is turned off with the Bios and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 25-10 LSU CHK EXECUTING... 26 02 SPF/RSPF setup [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set SPF/RSPF is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired SPF/RSPF and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 2 SPF/RSPF SPF NO SPF YES RSPF YES Display item SPF OFF SPF ON RSPF ON For the AR-203E/5420, the code number cannot be set to 2. For the AR-M200/M201, the code number cannot be set to 1. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) The current set value is displayed. 26-02 SPF/RSPF 1:SPF ON (0- 2) 2) [Numeric] key or [ 26-02 SPF/RSPF 0:SPF OFF (0- 2) 03 Second cassette setup ] key 2) [Numeric] key or [ ] key 26-02 SPF/RSPF 2:RSPF ON (0- 2) 3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 1) Press [ ] [ ] key to change the code number. 2) Press [START] key to fix the code number. 26-02 SPF/RSPF 2:RSPF ON (0- 2) [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set second cassette is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired second cassette and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Second cassette Second cassette NO Second cassette YES Display item OFF ON For the AR-203E/5420/M200/M201, the code number cannot be set to 1. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 13 Main code 26 Sub code 04 Contents Details of function/operation Machine duplex setup [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set duplex is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired duplex and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Duplex Duplex NO Duplex YES* Display item OFF ON * AR-203E/5420/M200: cannot be executed. 06 [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set destination is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired destination and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Destination setup Code number 0 1 2 Destination Display item INCH AB – Inch series EX Japan AB series Japan AB series * Code number 2 cannot be selected. 07 Machine conditions check [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current machine setting is displayed. CPM 20 CPM Copy quantity 20 Remark [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) The machine setting is displayed. 26-07 CPM 20 CPM 20 Rear edge void setup [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set rear edge void is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired rear edge void and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 30 CE mark support control ON/OFF 39 Cancel of stop at developer life over Memory capacity check Display item OFF ON Remark Default [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set CE mark support control is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired CE mark support control and press [OK]/ [ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 37 Setting Rear edge void NO Rear edge void YES Setting CE mark support control OFF CE mark support control ON Display item OFF ON Remark Default (100V series) [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to change the setting. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 21-01. [Function] When the simulation is executed, the currently installed SDRAM of the main unit is displayed. Code number 8 16 Setting 8 MBYTE 16 MBYTE Remark [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Memory capacity display 26-39 MEM.CHK 8 MBYTE AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 14 Main code 26 Sub code 40 42 Contents Details of function/operation Polygon motor OFF time setup (Time required for turning OFF after completion of printing) [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired setting and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Transfer ON timing control setup Code number Setting 0 1 2 3 0sec 30sec 60sec 90sec Display item AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 0 SEC. 0 30 SEC. 30 60 SEC. 60 90 SEC. 90 Remark Default [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] AR-203E/5420 When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. Enter the code number and press the [START] key, and the setting will be changed. (For any number different from the following ones, the default time is automatically set.) <Paper lead edge adjustment table> Code number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Setting Default (236 msec) –20 msec –18 msec –16 msec –14 msec –12 msec –10 msec –8 msec –6 msec –4 msec –2 msec Code number 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Setting Default (236 msec) +2 msec +4 msec +6 msec +8 msec +10 msec +12 msec +14 msec +16 msec +18 msec +20 msec * The default value, "11," of the transfer ON timing indicates "236msec passed from PS release." * When set to "0," it is same as setting to the default, "11." * The transfer ON timing can be adjusted to 236msec ± 2ms. AR-M200/M201 For the AR-M200/M201, the adjustment can be made individually for each of the following modes. Mode Front surface paper lead edge Front surface paper rear edge Back surface paper lead edge Back surface paper rear edge Display item F-REAR F-END B-REAR B-END Default 11 50 11 50 Setting range 0 - 21 1 - 99 0 - 21 1 - 99 <Paper lead edge adjustment table> is the same as that of the AR-203E/5420 above. <Front/back surface of paper rear edge adjustment table> Code 1 ... 49 50 51 ... 99 Setting –98 msec ... –2 msec 0 msec +2 msec ... +98 msec Remark Default * The default "50" of the transfer OFF timing indicates "210msec passed from PPD1OFF." * The transfer OFF timing can be adjusted to 210msec ± 2ms. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display <Front surface lead edge setting> 26-42 TC ON TIMING F-REAR 11( 0-21 ) 2) [ ][ ] key: Mode selection 26-42 TC ON TIMING F-END 50( 1-99 ) 3) [Numeric] key: Value entry 26-42 TC ON TIMING F-END 51( 1-99 ) 4) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key: Settles the entered value. The display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 15 Main code 26 Sub code 43 Contents Details of function/operation Side void setup [Function] When this simulation is executed, the currently set code of the side void quantity is displayed (initial display), and the set data are saved. (Setting range: 0 – 10, Default: 4 (= One side 2.0mm)) Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 Setting 0 mm 0.5 mm 1.0 mm 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 2.5 mm Remark Default Code 6 7 8 9 10 Setting 3.0 mm 3.5 mm 4.0 mm 4.5 mm 5.5 mm Remark * When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the side void is changed as follows: Side void adjustment: The side void is increased by 0.5mm. (The side void of "Set value x 0.5mm" is made.) [Operation] AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 1) Initial display 1) Press [ ] [ ] key to change the code number. 26-43 SIDE VOID 4( 0-10) 2) Press [START] key to fix the code number. 2) [Numeric] key 26-43 SIDE VOID 5( 0-10) 3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 26-43 SIDE VOID 5( 0-10) 54 γ life correction setting [Function] Used to set the γ life correction. When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. (Setting range: 0 – 1, default: 1) Code number 0 1 62 Energy-save mode copy lamp setup 01 Paper sensor status display Display item OFF ON Remark Default [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] Used to set half-ON /OFF of the copy lamp in the pre-heat mode. When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 30 Setting OFF ON Setting Copy lamp OFF Copy lamp half-ON Display item OFF ON Remark Default [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] The paper sensor status is displayed on the LCD/LED. Sensor Paper exit sensor No. 1 tray paper width sensor (AR-M200/M201 only) No. 2 tray paper width sensor (AR-M200/ M201 only) Paper entry sensor Duplex sensor (AR-M201 only) No. 2 tray paper feed sensor New drum cartridge sensor Display item Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) (AR-M200/M201) POD Photoconductor cartridge replacement lamp PD1 — PD2 PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 DRST — Developer cartridge replacement lamp JAM lamp 2nd cassette lamp Zoom lamp ∗ Since the manual paper feed sensor is a single bypass sensor, its status is not displayed. ∗ The width sensor is available only in the FAX models. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 30-01 P-SENSOR 2) When sensor ON 30-01 POD PD1 PD2 PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 DRST AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 16 Main code 41 Sub code 06 Contents Details of function/operation OC cover float detection level adjustment (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. When [OK]/[ENTER]/ [START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the SPF/RSPF scan position to acquire the OC cover float detection level. When the mirror base unit returns to the home position, the acquired value is displayed. If the adjustment is NG, the following message is displayed. AR-203E/5420: Misfeed lamp lights up, and the 7seg display remains unchanged. AR-M200/M201: The LCD indicates "ERR." Note that, this simulation must be executed with the OC cover closed. ∗ If the value is 0, float detection is not performed in normal jobs. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display <Canceling - when [Clear]/[Clear All] key is pressed-> 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL 0 2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL EXECUTING... 07 43 01 OC cover float detection margin setting (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. THE JOB IS BEING CANCELED. 3) When the level is acquired: 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL **** OK 3) When the level is not acquired: 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL **** ERR [Function] For the number of pixels between black markers on the SPF/RSFP scanning position saved in "41-06: (OC cover float detection level adjustment)", if the number of pixels between the markers when processing float detection is less than the number of pixels set with this simulation, it is judged as the float error. When the set value of this simulation is "0," no float error occurs. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201), and press [START] key. The setting is saved and the display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu. Setting range: 0 – 99 (Copes with margin 0 – 99 pixels.) Default: 30 (30 pixels) [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 09-04. [Function] Used to set the fusing temperature of 3rd or later sheet. (For 1st and 2nd sheets, simulation 4314 is used.) When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Press [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the setting and press [OK]/[ENTER]/ [START] key to save the setting into the EERPOM. The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. The [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) is used to select the mode. Code 0 1 2 3 4 Set temperature (°C) 170 175 180 185 190 Remark Code 5 6 7 8 Set temperature (°C) 195 200 205 210 Display item (AR-M200/M201) Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed TRAY1 Manual paper feed MFT * The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly. Mode Remark Default Display item (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display <Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed setting> 43-01 FU TEMP TRAY1 6( 0-8 ) 2) [ ][ ] key: Mode selection 43-01 FU TEMP MFT 6( 0-8 ) 3) [Numeric] key: Value entry 43-01 FU TEMP MFT 6( 0-8 ) 4) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key Settles the entered value. The display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu. AR-203E/5420 1) Press [Exposure mode selector] key to change the mode. 2) Press [ ] [ ] key to set the value. 3) Press [START] key to fix the code number. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 17 Main code 43 Sub code 04 Contents Details of function/operation Fusing temperature setting in multi copy [Function] For 20th sheet or later in multi copy, the fusing temperature is automatically changed from the temperature set with simulation 43-01 to the temperature set with this simulation. When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to change the setting. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Set temperature (°C) 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 Remark Display item (AR-M200/M201) TRAY1 Mode Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed Manual paper feed Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed (small-size) Manual paper feed (small-size) MFT TRAY1 SH MFT SH Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp Default 3 TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp 3 1 AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp 1 ∗ The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly. 05 Fusing temperature setup in duplex copy (AR-M201 only) [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 43-01. [Function] In the case of duplex copy, the shift temperature set with this simulation is applied to the fusing temperature. When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code Shift temperature (°C) 0 ±0 1 –8 2 –6 3 –4 4 –2 14 Fusing start temperature setting Remark Default Code Shift temperature (°C) 5 ±0 6 +2 7 +4 8 +6 9 +8 Remark [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] When this simulation is started, the currently set code number is displayed. Press [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the setting, and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save it to the EEPROM. The machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode. Code Set temperature (°C) 0 160 1 165 2 170 3 175 4 180 5 185 Remark Code Set temperature (°C) 6 190 7 195 8 200 9 205 10 210 [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 43-01. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 18 Remark Default Main code 46 Sub code 01 Contents Details of function/operation Copy density adjustment (300dpi) [Function] Copy density is set for each mode. When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, the copy becomes lighter. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too. Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 – 99) The setting procedure of the magnification ratio is the same as that to copy operation. Mode AE mode (300dpi) TEXT mode (300dpi) PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) (300dpi) TS mode (AE) (300dpi) Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp AE mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp Default 50 50 50 50 50 [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 4) To fix the set value without printing, press [OK]/[ENTER] key. 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99) 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 50( 1-99) 2) [ ] key: Mode selection * To cancel manual feed paper empty MSG, press any key. 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 TSAE 100% 50( 1-99) 2) [ * When performing the AE mode exposure adjustment, place the test chart on the document table so that the center area of 10cm is not covered. ] key: Mode selection 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 TEXT 100% 50( 1-99) AR-203E/5420 1) Press [Exposure mode selector] key to change the mode. 3) [Numeric] key: Value entry 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99) 2) Press [ ] [ ] key to set the value. 4) [START] key: Fixing and printing value (No change on the LCD) 3) [START] Fixing and printing value * Print is started in the set mode. * Print is started in the set mode. 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99) 02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi) [Function] Copy density is set for each mode. When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, the copy becomes lighter. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too. Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 – 99) Mode AE mode (600dpi) TEXT mode (600dpi) PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) (600dpi) TS mode (AE) (600dpi) Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 19 Display lamp Default (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp 50 TEXT mode lamp 50 PHOTO mode lamp 50 TEXT mode lamp 50 PHOTO mode lamp AE mode lamp 50 PHOTO mode lamp Main code 46 Sub code 12 Contents Details of function/operation Density adjustment in the FAX mode (Collective adjustment) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is executed with the entered exposure adjustment value and the data stored on the FAX side is rewritten into the entered value. All data of the exposure adjustment values are rewritten into the same value. For the density adjustment table data, refer to simulation 46-13 (density adjustment (Normal text) in the FAX mode). [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. 3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED of [START] key is turned off. AUTO XX ("XX" is the exposure adjustment value of normal text stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value. ADJUST EXP. AUTO YY ADJUST SCAN EXP. AUTO YY 4) Print is started (self print). ADJUST PRINT EXP. AUTO YY After completion of printing, returns to “2)” display. ("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) 13 FAX mode density adjustment (Normal text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Scan is started with the exposure adjustment value entered with [START] key, and the stored data of the selected mode on the FAX side is rewritten into the input value. Density adjustment value data table Mode STD (Normal text) Fine (Fine text) Sfine (Super fine) Photo off on off on off Exposure adjustment value When initializing each data: 50 [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. STD XX ("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of normal text mode stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value with [Numeric] key. ADJUST EXP. STD YY 3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED of [START] key is turned off. ADJUST SCAN EXP. STD YY 4) Print is started (self print). ADJUST PRINT EXP. STD YY After completion of printing, returns to “2)” display. ("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) 14 FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value. For the density adjustment value table data, refer to simulation 46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment (Normal text).) [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. 3) Scan start (self print) FINE XX ("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the fine text mode stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value with [Numeric] key. ADJUST EXP. ADJUST SCAN EXP. FINE YY 4) Print start (self print) ADJUST PRINT EXP. AUTO YY After completion of printing, returns to “2)” display. FINE YY ("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 20 Main code 46 Sub code 15 Contents Details of function/operation FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value. For the density adjustment value table data, refer to simulation 46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment (Normal text).) [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. 3) Scan start (self print) ADJUST SCAN S-FINE XX ("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the super fine mode stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value with [Numeric] key. ADJUST EXP. EXP. S-FINE YY 4) Print start (self print) ADJUST PRINT EXP. S-FINE YY After completion of printing, returns to “2)” display. S-FINE YY ("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) 18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) [Function] Contrast is set for each mode. When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, the contrast becomes lower. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too. Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 – 99) Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE mode (300dpi) AE TEXT mode (300dpi) TEXT PHOTO mode PHOTO TS mode (TEXT) TSTXT (300dpi) TS mode (AE) TSAE (300dpi) Mode LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp * No density display on LCD/display. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 21 Display lamp Default (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp 50 TEXT mode lamp 50 PHOTO mode lamp 50 TEXT mode lamp 50 PHOTO mode lamp AE mode lamp 50 PHOTO mode lamp Main code 46 Sub code 19 Contents Details of function/operation Exposure mode setup [Function] <γ table setting> When this simulation is executed, the code number of the current set gamma table is displayed. (Default: 2) Enter the code number corresponding to the desired gamma table, and press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the mode and write into the EEPROM. <AE operation mode> ] key for the AR-M200/ When setting the γ table, press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ M201) to change to the AE operation mode, and the current set code number of the AE operation mode is displayed. (Default: 0) Enter the code number corresponding to the desired AE operation mode and press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the mode and write into the EEPROM. <PHOTO image process setting> When [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) is pressed in AE operation mode setting, the mode is changed to the PHOTO image process setting and the code number of the current set PHOTO image process setting is displayed. (Default: 1) Enter the code number corresponding to the desired PHOTO image process setting and press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the mode and write into the EEPROM. Mode Display item Display lamp Code (AR-M200/M201) (AR-203E/5420) number 1 γ GAMMA OFF 2 20 SPF/RSPF exposure correction (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) AE AE AE PHOTO PHOTO PHOTO 0 1 1 2 Setting content Image quality priority mode Toner consumption priority mode Lead edge stop Real time process Error diffusion process Dither process Remark Default Default Default [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 43-01. [Function] Used to adjust the exposure correction amount in the SPF/RSPF mode. The adjustment is made by adjusting Vref voltage variation for the OC mode. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. When the set value is increased, copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, copy becomes lighter. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99) Mode RSPF/SPF Display item (AR-M200/M201) SPF Display lamp (AR-203E) TEXT mode lamp [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 22 Default 50 Remark Main code 46 Sub code 29 Contents Details of function/operation Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) [Function] Contrast is set for each mode. When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, the contrast becomes lower. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too. Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 – 99) Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE mode (600dpi) AE TEXT mode (600dpi) TEXT PHOTO mode PHOTO TS mode (TEXT) TSTXT (600dpi) TS mode (AE) TSAE (600dpi) Mode LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp AE mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp Default 50 50 50 50 50 * No density display on LCD/display. 30 AE limit adjustment [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. [Function] Used to set the limit value in AE and AE (toner save). Change the setting and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to write the setting into the EEPROM. The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. By pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201), setting is changed. (Setting range: 0 – 31, Default: 0) Mode Limit value for AE Limit value for AE (toner save) Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE TEXT Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp Remark <Remark> When simulation 26-06 (Destination setting) or simulation 46-19 Auto Exposure mode is changed, the setting of this simulation is also changed to the default in connection. 31 Image sharpness adjustment [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-19. [Function] Used to adjust sharpening/blurring of image in each mode. Image quality Blurring Standard Sharpening Setting No 0 1 2 Remark Default When this simulation is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set value is displayed. (Default: 1) Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions. To change the mode, press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/ M201). The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the LCD/display. Mode AE mode TEXT mode PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) TS mode (AE) Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 23 Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp AE mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp Default 1 1 1 1 1 Main code 46 Sub code 32 Contents Details of function/operation Copier color reproduction setup [Function] Used to set color reproduction in each mode. Colors easy to be copied and colors difficult to be copied can be switched. Set value 0 1 2 Colors easy to be copied Purple, Blue, Red Water blue, Green, Blue Yellow, Red, Green Colors difficult to be copied Yellow, Green, Water blue Purple, Red, Yellow Blue, Water blue, Purple * This setting has virtually no effect on black-and-white documents. When this simulation is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set value is displayed. (Default: 0) Press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions . At that time, color components are changed for used in copying. To change the mode, press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/ M201). The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the LCD/display. Specification component Green Red Blue Mode AE mode (including TS) TEXT mode (including TS) PHOTO mode 39 FAX mode sharpness adjustment (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Setting No 0 1 2 Remark Default Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT PRINT mode lamp TEXT mode lamp 0 PHOTO SCAN mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp 0 Default 0 [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered sharpness adjustment value, and the data of the selected mode stored on the FAX side is changed to the entered value. Sharpness adjustment value data table 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Mode STD FINE S-FINE FINE/PHOTO S-FINE/PHOTO Sharpness adjustment value When initializing each data: 1 [Operation] 1) Initial display SHARPNESS SETTING PRESS ←,→ 2) [ ][ ] key or after 2sec 4) Enter a one-digit value (0-2) as the sharpness adjustment value with [Numeric] key. SHARPNESS SETTING ZZZZ(0-2) Y Every time when [ ] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1. ("Y" is the entered sharpness adjustment value.) When [ ] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. 5) Scan start (self print) SHARPNESS SET (1-5) 1:STD 3) Select the arrow key 1-5, and the LED of [START] key is lighted. SHARPNESS SETTING ZZZZ(0-2) X ("ZZZZ" is the mode selected among STD, FINE, S-FINE, FINE/PHOTO, and S-FINE/ PHOTO.) ∗ [Clear] key: Returns to “2)” display. SHARPNESS SETTING SCAN Y 6) Print start (self print) SHARPNESS SETTING PRINT Y After completion of printing, returns to “4)” display. ("X" is the corresponding sharpness adjustment value of the selected mode stored on the FAX side.) ∗ [Clear] key: Returns to “2)” display. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 24 Main code 48 Sub code 01 Contents Details of function/operation Front/rear (main scanning) direction and scan (sub scanning) direction magnification ratio adjustment [Function] Used to adjust the magnification ratio in the main scan (front/rear) direction and sub scan direction. Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201). Press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.) The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50) ][ ] Display item LED Display lamp Default (AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201) (AR-203E/5420) Main scan direction F-R PRINT mode TEXT mode lamp 50 magnification ratio lamp OC mode sub scan SCAN SCAN mode PHOTO mode 50 direction magnification ratio lamp lamp Mode 05 SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio in copying (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. [Function] Used to display the current SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio on the LCD/ display. When [START] key is pressed, the entered data is acquired and saved into the EEPROM, and a copy is made. (When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.) The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50) ][ ] When adjusting the RSPF, the mode is set to "Duplex → Single," single copies of two sheets are performed. For printing, regardless of the density mode and the density level, Density mode = MANUAL Density level = 3 Mode Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the front surface of SPF/RSPF document Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the back surface of RSPF document (AR-M200/ M201) Display item LED Display Initial value of (AR-M200/ (AR-M200/ lamp duplex setting M201) M201) (AR-203E) S-S SIDE1 COPY mode AE mode lamp lamp D-S SIDE2 PRINT mode lamp * When there is no document in SPF/RSPF, copy is inhibited. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 25 — Default 50 50 Main code 49 Sub code 01 Contents Details of function/operation Flash ROM program writing mode [Function] When this simulation is executed, "d" is displayed on the display (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD for the AR-M200/M201), the machine goes into the program writing mode from PC to Flash ROM. Use the writing tool on the PC and write the program. During writing, the display shows as follows: After completion of download, turn OFF/ON the power to reset. AR-M200/M201 Status Download data receiving Loader function transfer Date delete start Data write (Boot section) Data write (Program section) Data write (EEPROM) Data write (LCD) During SUM CHECK During BOOT SUM CHECK During EEPROM SUM CHECK Download complete Display item AR-203E/5420 Pre-heat Ready lamp lamp "d" ON ON OFF Remark Display RECEIVING LOADER COPYING FLASH ERASE BOOT WRITING PROGRAM WRITING E2PROM WRITING LCD DATE WRITING FLASH ROM SUM CHECK BOOT SUM CHECK AR-M200/M201 "d" ON "d" ON "d" ON OFF Blink Blink ON OFF Blink AR-M200/M201 AR-M200/M201 "d" ON ON ON AR-M200/M201 EEPROM SUM CHECK DOWNLOAD COMPLETE! Error state AR-M200/M201 "0FF" ON OFF OFF "E ∗" ON OFF OFF AR-203E/5420 * "∗" in an error display indicates the error position. 1 2 3 4 5 Data reception error Loader function transfer FLASH ROM delete FLASH ROM writing (Boot section) FLASH ROM writing (Program section) 6 7 8 9 10 Sum check (Loader section) Sum check (Boot section) Sum check (Program section) Sum check (EEPROM section) Data error In case of an error in download, the following message is displayed on the LCD. (AR-M200/M201) Error status PC data receiving Loader function transfer FLASH ROM delete Boot section FLASH ROM write Program section FLASH ROM write Loader section SUM CHECK Boot section SUM CHECK Program section SUM CHECK E2PROM SUM CHECK E2PROM write E2PROM read Verify E2PROM collating Verify Boot section lens check Program section lens check E2PROM lens check Total data size check IMC communication error IMC FRASH ROM write LCD section lens check LCD section FLASH ROM write LCD section SUM CHECK Display item E-01 PC TRANS E-02 LOADER COPY E-03 FLASH ERASE E-04 BOOT WRITE E-05 PROGRAM WRITE E-06 LOADER SUM E-07 BOOT SUM E-08 PROGRAM SUM E-09 E2PROM SUM E-10 E2PROM WRITE E-11 E2PROM READ E-12 E2PROM COLLATE E-13 BOOT LENGTH E-14 PROGRAM LENGTH E-15 E2PROM LENGTH E-16 DATE SIZE E-17 IMC TRANS E-18 IMC FLASH WRITE E-19 LCD DATE LENGTH E-20 LCD DATE WRITE E-21 LCD DATE SUM To enter the download mode, there is a method to use key operations as well as to use a simulation. With the power OFF, press and hold [Clear All] key + [ ] key, turn on the power. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display DOWNLOAD MODE AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 26 Main code 50 Sub code 01 Contents Details of function/operation Lead edge image position [Function] Used to adjust the copy image position and the lead edge void amount on copy paper. The adjustment is made by adjusting the image scan start position at 100% and the print start position (resist roller ON timing). When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50) When [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) is pressed, the setting mode and the display are changed. Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. When the adjustment is made by the main cassette paper feed, the adjustment values of all the paper feed ports become the same. (When the set value is increased by 1, shift is made by 0.1mm.) Mode Print start position (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Image lead edge void amount Image scan start position Display item (AR-M200/M201) TRAY1 TRAY2 MFT DEN-A RRC-A Image rear edge void amount (Cassette paper feed) DEN-B Image rear edge void amount (Manual paper feed) RRC-B LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp PRINT mode lamp Main cassette lamp SCAN mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp Main cassette lamp AE mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp AE mode lamp Manual feed lamp TEXT mode lamp Main cassette lamp PHOTO mode lamp Main cassette lamp AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp TEXT mode lamp Manual feed lamp Default 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 (*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. * When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size. * When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. [Adjustment procedure] 1) Set the print start position (AE lamp ON) (A), the lead edge void amount (TEXT lamp ON) (B), and the scan start position (PHOTO lamp ON) (C) to 0, and make a copy of a scale at 100%. (AR-203E/5420) For the AR-M200/M201, the following LED’s are lighted: • AE lamp/COPY mode lamp: (A) • TEXT lamp/PRINT mode lamp: (B) • PHOTO lamp/SCAN mode lamp: (C) 2) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale. Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.) When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50) 3) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position. Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.) When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is moved to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50). 4) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50) (Example) Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge, H = 5mm When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by about 0.1mm. (For 25 or less, however, the void amount is regarded as 0.) ∗ The SPF/RSPF adjustment is made by adjusting the SPF/RSPF image scan start position after OC adjustment. Image loss, R = 4mm 5mm 10mm [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 27 Main code 50 Sub code 06 Contents Details of function/operation Copy lead edge position adjustment (SPF/RSPF) (Only the AR-203E/M200/ M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) [Function] Used to adjust the SPF/RSPF copy lead edge. When the adjustment value of the document scan position adjustment is increased by 1, the scan start timing is advanced by 0.1mm. The print result is shifted to the opposite direction of the scan start position. The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50) ][ ] When scanning a back surface of document, the mode must be changed to operate the SPF/ RSPF by pressing [2-SIDED SCAN]/[2-SIDED COPY] key. Mode Front surface document scan position adjustment Back surface document scan position adjustment (AR-M200/M201) Rear edge void adjustment (RSPF) Initial value of duplex setting S-S Display item (AR-M200/ M201) SIDE1 LED (AR-M200/ M201) COPY mode lamp D-S SIDE2 PRINT mode lamp S-S END SCAN mode lamp Display lamp (AR-203E) AE mode lamp — PHOTO mode lamp Default 50 50 50 ∗ When there is no document in the SPF/RSPF, copy is inhibited. ∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. 10 Center offset adjustment [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. [Function] Used to adjust the center offset position of copy images on copy paper and that in scanning document. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. (When the set value is changed by 1, the center is shifted by 0.1mm.) When the adjustment value is increased, the center is shifted to right. When decreased, the center is shifted to left. The modes can be selected by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201). When the set value is changed largely, the area outside the shading area may be scanned to cause black streaks on the edges. When the SPF/RSPF is used, select the mode for use of the SPF/RSPF by [2-SIDED SCAN]/[2-SIDED COPY] key. Mode Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed) Print center offset (Manual paper feed) (**) 2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) Display item LED Display lamp Default (AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201) (AR-203E/5420) TRAY1 COPY mode lamp AE mode lamp 50 Main cassette lamp Main cassette lamp TRAY2 COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp AE mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp 50 MFT COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp PRINT mode lamp Main cassette lamp AE mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp TEXT mode lamp Main cassette lamp 50 SIDE2 50 (*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. (**): For Simplex models, skip. * When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size. * In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as 1to2/Short Edge from OC regardless of duplex setting. * When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 28 Main code 50 Sub code 12 Contents Details of function/operation Document off-center adjustment [Function] Used to adjust document scan off-center adjustment. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ [ ] key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50) ] When the adjustment value is increased, the print result is shifted to left. Mode Platen document scan SPF document front scan RSPF document back scan (AR-M200/M201) Initial value Display item LED of duplex (AR-M200/ (AR-M200/ setting M201) M201) S-S OC COPY mode lamp S-S SPF PRINT mode lamp D-S RSPF SCAN mode lamp Display lamp (AR-203E/ 5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp — Default 50 50 50 * When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. 18 Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy (Only the AR-M201, or the AR-M200 with the RSPF installed) [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set correction value is displayed. Enter the correction value and press [START] key to save the entered correction value. (Correction value range; 1 – 99, Default: 50) For S-D mode front surface print and print of even paged in D-S mode, reverse memory copy operation is performed from the rear edge of documents. When, therefore, the print position adjustment of output images is required, adjust as follows: In the reverse memory coping, when the document scan is made in the arrow direction, the output image is printed from the rear edge of scan image. When, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference position is on the rear edge, and use this simulation to adjust the set value so that the print lead edge is matched. Since printing is made from the image data most lately stored in memory to the lead edge data from the print start position, the image lead edge adjustment is made by changing the end data position stored in memory by the set value of this simulation. Since it is performed by changing the scan end position, the image position adjustment is made by changing the scan end position and the end data stored in memory. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [ Mode OC memory reverse output position (AR-M201 only) SPF/RSPF memory reverse output position Initial value of duplex setting S-D ][ Display item D-S LED Default OC COPY mode lamp 50 SPF PRINT mode lamp 50 Document transport direction Scan lead edge Document transport direction Print lead edge Lead edge void (1) Print start position Scan end position (Default: Scan cut by void (1)) Scan direction ] key. Rear edge void Print rear edge Scan rear edge * The initial value of duplex setting is "1to2/Long Edge" for the duplex model, or "2to1" for the simplex model. ∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 29 Main code 50 Sub code 19 Contents Details of function/operation Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment (AR-M201 only) [Function] Used to adjust the rear edge void amount in duplex copy. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50.) The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [ ][ ] key. (Adjustment range; 1 – 99) Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (The paper information is cleared for every copy.) When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by about 0.1mm. Mode Paper rear edge void amount Print start position (Duplex back surface) Display item DEN-B RRC-D LED PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Default 50 50 * The initial value for duplex setting is "1to2/Short Edge" for the OC setting, or "2to2" for the RSPF setting. ∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. 51 02 Resist quantity adjustment [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. [Function] Used to adjust the contact pressure of the main unit resist roller and the SPF/RSPF resist roller onto paper. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ [ ] key for the AR-M200/M201). ] Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. Display item LED (AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201) Main cassette TRAY1 COPY mode lamp paper feed Main cassette lamp (*) 2nd cassette TRAY2 COPY mode lamp paper feed 2nd cassette lamp Manual paper feed MFT COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp RSPF document SIDE1 COPY mode lamp paper feed PRINT mode lamp (Front surface) SCAN mode lamp (AR-M200/M201) Main cassette lamp RSPF document SIDE2 COPY mode lamp paper feed PRINT mode lamp (Back surface) Main cassette lamp (AR-M200/M201) (*) Duplex back DUP-2 PRINT mode lamp surface SCAN mode lamp (AR-M201 only) Main cassette lamp Mode Display lamp Default (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp 50 Main cassette lamp AE mode lamp 50 2nd cassette lamp AE mode lamp 50 Manual paper feed lamp — 50 — 50 TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp Main cassette lamp (*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 30 50 Main code 53 Sub code 08 Contents Details of function/operation SPF/RSPF scan position automatic adjustment (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) [Function] Place a A4 paper (white chart) so that it covers the SPF/RSPF scan glass and the OC glass together, and close the SPF/RSPF. When this simulation is executed, the current adjustment value is displayed as the initial display. * Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 – 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about 0.127mm * If the values are kept as the default values, SPF/RSPF scan is not performed properly. The front area of the proper scan position may be scanned. In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from the home position to the SPF/RSPF scan position with the adjustment value displayed. The SPF/RSPF glass cover edge position is calculated from the difference between the SPF/RSPF glass cover edge and the OC side document glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED lights up with the current set value displayed. During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, execution is performed again. Mode SPF/RSPF scan position auto adjustment SPF/RSPF scan position manual adjustment Display item LED Display lamp (AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201) (AR-203E) AUTO COPY mode lamp AE mode lamp MANU PRINT mode lamp TEXT mode lamp Default 1 1 [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. (In MANUAL) OK/ERR display in AUTO <When OK> 53-08 SPF AUTO AUTO 100% ** 61 03 Polygon motor check (HSYNC output check) <When ERR> OK 53-08 SPF AUTO AUTO 100% ** ERR [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is rotated for 30sec. At that time, the ZOOM lamp (or the COPY mode lamp for the AR-M200/M201) is lighted for 100msec every time when HSYNC is detected. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 61-03 LSU CHK EXECUTING... 63 01 Shading check [Function] Used to display the detection level of white plate for shading. When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading and the copy lamp is lighted. When the light quantity is stabilized, revision is made for every second, and the level of one pixel at the center of CCD which is not corrected is detected and the value is displayed in decimal values on the LCD/display. (3 digits) [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 63-01 SHADING CHK EXECUTING... 000 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 31 Main code 63 Sub code 02 Contents Details of function/operation Black level automatic correction [Function] Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance. When this simulation is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number. Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate left center. 10 Chart back surface When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the correction value. After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the LCD/display. * Default: 0 * If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 63-02 BLACK LEVEL 000 2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key: Correction start 63-02 BLACK LEVEL EXECUTING... <During canceling - When [Clear]/[Clear All] key is pressed-> After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. THE JOB IS BEING CANCELED. 3) After execution 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** OK 3) In case of an error 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** ERR 12 13 Light quantity stabilization wait time setting Light quantity stabilization band setting [Function] Used to set the wait time before entering the light quantity level stable evaluation process in the light quantity stable process of white balance. (Note: The light quantity stable level in the previous light quantity stable state is used as the target. When the light quantity level reaches the target during the wait time, the set time of this simulation is ignored and the operation enters the stable evaluation process.) When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. Setting range: 0 – 99 (Complying with the light quantity stable wait time of 0 – 99sec.) Default: 15 (15sec) [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 09-04. [Function] When the difference between the maximum and the minimum values of the light quantity level sampled for 3.2sec in the cycle of 100msec in the white balance light quantity stable process is within the range set with this simulation, it is judged as the light quantity is stable. (Note: The magnification ratio of the AFE gain setting is automatically reflected on the stable width.) When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. Setting range: 1 – 99 (Light quantity stable width: Complying with 1 – 99 in 4095 gradations.) Default: 16 [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 09-04. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 32 Main code 64 Sub code 01 Contents Details of function/operation Self print (1by2 mode) [Function] The status of the optical section is ignored and printing of one page is made. Also when the print command is received from the host, printing is made. When this simulation is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. (Since, however, the scanner is disabled, initializing is not made.) Enter the code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to start paper feed from the selected cassette and print in the selected pattern. Code number 0 1 2 3 Pattern 1by2 Grid pattern White paper Black background Display item 1 BY 2 CHECK WHITE BLACK * For 4 – 99, flip. 66 01 FAX soft SW setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] Use to check the FAX soft SW setting. Every time when the key is pressed, the bit on the first line is switched 0 and 1. [Operation] 1) Initial display ENTER FAX SOFT SW. # (3 DIGITS) SW.___ ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Enter a 3-digit value of soft SW No. (To enter the fourth digit, shift to the left.), and the press [OK]/[ENTER] key. No.### CHANGE? xxxxxxxx 1:YES 2:NO "xxxxxxxx" is the set content. ∗ Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry display. 3) Select 1 No.### xxxxxxxx USE # KEY 12345678 4) Change with 1-8 of [Numeric] key and the press [OK]/[ENTER] key. No.### STORED? xxxxxxxx 1:YES 2:NO "xxxxxxxx" is the set content. ∗ Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry display. 5) Select 1 STORED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display". 02 FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment values) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to initializing FAX soft SW. [Operation] 1) Initial display INITIALIZED After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 33 Main code 66 Sub code 03 Contents Details of function/operation FAX PWB memory check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the FAX PWB memory. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT CHECK MEMORY PRESS ←, → 2) [ ][ ] key or after 2sec Every time when [ → 2 → 3 → 1. When [ ] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 ] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT MEMORY (1-3) 1:DRAM SELECT MEMORY (1-3) 2:SRAM SELECT MEMORY (1-3) 3:FLASH ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key CHECKING MEMORY 4) After completion of check • When the result is OK • In case of address bus check error • In case of data bus check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT OK MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX A-BUS NG MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX D-BUS NG • In case of sum check error • In case of data check error • In case of erase check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX SUM NG MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX DATA NG MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX ERASE NG ∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". 04 Signal send mode (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the signal send mode (Max. value). Facsimile simulation design specifications. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 NO SIGNAL 33600bps(V34) 31200bps(V34) 28800bps(V34) 26400bps(V34) 24000bps(V34) 21600bps(V34) 19200bps(V34) 16800bps(V34) 14400bps(V34) 12000bps(V34) 9600bps(V34) 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7200bps(V34) 4800bps(V34) 2400bps(V34) 14400bps(V33) 12000bps(V33) 14400bps(V17) 12000bps(V17) 9600bps(V17) 7200bps(V17) 9600bps(V29) 7200bps(V29) 4800bps(V27ter) [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL (2 DIGITS) No.___ 2) 2-digit (1-35) with [Numeric] key / [ Pressing [ ] key or [ No. (1-35) 1:NO SIGNAL ][ ] key / 2sec after ] key reverses the sequence. ..... No. (1-35) 35:LINE ON HOOK ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key: Send after setting OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 34 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 2400bps(V27ter) 300bps(FLAG) 2100Hz(CED) 1100Hz(CNG) 300bps(V21) 2100Hz(ANSam) DUMMY RING NO VOICE ANSWER NO RING BACK TONE LINE OFF HOOK LINE ON HOOK Main code 66 Sub code 05 Contents Details of function/operation Signal send mode (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the signal send mode (Soft SW set value). Facsimile simulation design specifications. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 NO SIGNAL 33600bps(V34) 31200bps(V34) 28800bps(V34) 26400bps(V34) 24000bps(V34) 21600bps(V34) 19200bps(V34) 16800bps(V34) 14400bps(V34) 12000bps(V34) 9600bps(V34) 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7200bps(V34) 4800bps(V34) 2400bps(V34) 14400bps(V33) 12000bps(V33) 14400bps(V17) 12000bps(V17) 9600bps(V17) 7200bps(V17) 9600bps(V29) 7200bps(V29) 4800bps(V27ter) 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 2400bps(V27ter) 300bps(FLAG) 2100Hz(CED) 1100Hz(CNG) 300bps(V21) 2100Hz(ANSam) DUMMY RING NO VOICE ANSWER NO RING BACK TONE LINE OFF HOOK LINE ON HOOK [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL (2 DIGITS) No.___ 2) 2-digit (1-35) with [Numeric] key / [ Pressing [ ] key or [ No. (1-35) 1:NO SIGNAL ][ ] key / 2sec after ] key reverses the sequence. ..... No. (1-35) 35:LINE ON HOOK ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key: Send after setting OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". 07 Image memory content print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to print the image memory content. [Operation] • When print is allowed PRINT STORED After completion of printing, FAX control is terminated. 10 Image memory content clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) • When there is no print data NO DATA • When print is inhibited CAN NOT PRINT After 2 sec, FAX control is terminated. After 2 sec, FAX control is terminated. [Function] Use to clear the image memory content. [Operation] • When there are some print data CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY After completion of memory clear, the buzzer sounds. CLEARED PLEASE POWER OFF • When there are no print data CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY After completion of memory clear CLEARED After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. Remains unchanged until the power is turned off. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 35 Main code 66 Sub code 11 Contents Details of function/operation 300bps signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the 300bps signal send (Max. value). 1: NO SIGNAL 2: 11111 3: 11110 4: 00000 5: 010101 6: 00001 [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL PRESS ←, → 2) [ ][ ] key or after 2sec Every time when [ ] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1. When [ ] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 1:NO SIGNAL ..... SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 6:00001 ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". 12 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value). 1: NO SIGNAL 2: 11111 3: 11110 4: 00000 5: 010101 6: 00001 [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL PRESS ←, → 2) [ ][ ] key or after 2sec Every time when [ ] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1. When [ ] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 1:NO SIGNAL ..... SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 6:00001 ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 36 Main code 66 Sub code 13 Contents Details of function/operation Dial test (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to the dial test. [Operation] ■ Dial test (PULSE) ■ Dial test (DTMF) 1) Initial display 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL 1:PULSE 2:DTMF SELECT SIGNAL 1:PULSE 2:DTMF ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Select 1 INPUT MAKE TIME (0-15) ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Select 2 SELECT HIGH LEVEL 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW. __ ↓ 3) Enter the make time in 2 digits. INPUT DIAL # XXXX XXXX: Default ∗ After deleting with [Clear] key, input can be made. ↓ 3) ↓ Select 1 ↓ ∗ Select 2: Returns to “2)” display. 5) Select 1 Switched to 10/20PPS set with pulse selection inside. 6) After setting SENDING yyPPS xxms 7) After completion of sending TERMINATE ? 1:YES 2:NO ∗ Select 2: Returns to “4)” display. 8) Select 1 TERMINATED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display". Select 2 INPUT VALUE (0-15) ↓ SEND yyPPS xxms 1:YES 2:NO "xx" is the input value. __ SELECT LOW LEVEL 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW. 4) [OK]/[ENTER] key "yy" is the selected pulse 10 or 20. Select 2 INPUT VALUE (0-15) __ ↓ 4) Select 1 INPUT DIAL # XXXX XXXX: Default ∗ After deleting with [Clear] key, input can be made. 4) [OK]/[ENTER] key H:xx 1:YES 2:NO L:yy "xx" indicates HI, and "yy" indicates Low Soft SW. ∗ Select 2: Returns to “4)” display. 5) Select 1 HI/LO is selected with the signal level inside. 6) After setting the signal send level SENDING DTMF 7) After completion of sending TERMINATE ? 1:YES 2:NO ∗ Select 2: Returns to “4)” display. 8) Select 1 TERMINATED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display". 17 DTMF signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the DTMF signal send (Max. value). [Operation] 1) Initial display INPUT DIAL # ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) [Numeric] key input 3) Communication is started after setting the signal send level. SENDING SIGNAL MAX PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". The content selected with signal send level selection is set inside. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 37 Main code 66 Sub code 18 Contents Details of function/operation DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value). [Operation] 1) Initial display 3) Communication is started after setting the signal send level. INPUT DIAL # SENDING SIGNAL SSW PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. ∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". 2) [Numeric] key input The content selected with signal send level selection is set inside. 21 FAX information print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to print the FAX information. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT REPORT (1-3) PRESS ←, → 2) [ ][ ] key or after 2sec Every time when [ → 3 → 1. When [ ] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 → 2 ] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT REPORT (1-3) 1:USER SW. LIST SELECT REPORT (1-3) 2:SOFT SW. LIST SELECT REPORT (1-3) 3:PROTOCOL ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key • When print is allowed PRINT STORED After completion of printing, FAX control is terminated. 24 FAST SRAM clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) • When print is inhibited CAN NOT PRINT After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. [Function] Use to clear the FAST SRAM. [Operation] 1) Initial display 2) After completion of clearing CLEARED CLEAR FAST SRAM After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. 30 TEL/LIU status change check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the TEL/LIU status change. [Operation] 1) Initial display HS2 :xxx RHS :xxx HS1 :xxx EXHS:xxx ↑ The display is switched every 2sec. ↓ CHECKING PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 38 Main code 66 Sub code 33 Contents Details of function/operation Signal detection check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the signal detection. [Operation] 1) Initial display CHECKING NONE PRESS CLEAR TO STOP When a signal is detected, the display is changed from NONE to the following. CI/CNG/CED/BT/DT/Flag/SDT/DTMF ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 34 Communication time measurement (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to measurement the communication time. [Operation] 1) Initial display COMM. TIME xx:xx:xx:xxx msec "xx:xx:xx:xxx" indicates o'clock, minute, second, millisecond. ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 37 Speaker sound volume setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the speaker sound volume. 1: 2: 3: 4: NO SOUND LOW MID HIGH [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT SPEEKER VOL. PRESS ←, → 2) [ ][ ] key or after 2sec Every time when [ → 3 → 4 → 1. When [ ] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 → 2 ] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT (1-4) 1:NO SOUND SELECT (1-4) 2:LOW ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key STORED xxx xxx: Set content After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 39 ..... Main code 66 Sub code 38 Contents Details of function/operation Time setting/check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the time setting. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT TO SET 1:DATE 2:TIME ∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Select 1 2) Select 2 xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO xx:xx CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO "xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)" is the current value. (No revision of display) "xx:xx" is the current value. 3) 3) Select 1 Select 1 INPUT YEAR (4 DIGITS)____.__.__ ∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". 4) Enter the year in 4 digits. INPUT HOUR (0-24) __:__ ∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". 4) Enter o'clock in 2 digits. INPUT MONTH (1-12) 1998.__.__ INPUT MINUTE (00-59) 5) Enter the month in 2 digits. 01:__ 5) Enter minute in 2 digits. INPUT DAY (1-31) 1998.01.__ xx:xx STORED? 6) Enter the day in 2 digits. 1:YES 2:NO "xx:xx" is the current value. xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) STORED? 1:YES 2:NO ∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". "xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) is the entered value. ∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". 7) Select 1 6) Select 1 STORED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display". STORED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display". 67 50 USB receive speed adjustment (USB1.1) (AR-203E only) Used to set the limitation on the print data receive speed of USB2.0 (Full speed) port (USB port on the machine). → When print images from USB2.0 (Full speed) port are disturbed, change the setting and try again. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the adjustment value, and press [START] key to change the setting. Code number 1 2 3 4 Setting FAST NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW Speed ↑ Fast ↓ Slow 5. Trouble codes A. Trouble codes list Main Sub Details of trouble code code E1 00 IMC communication trouble 10 IMC trouble 13 IMC flash ROM error 81 IMC communication interface error (Parity) 82 IMC communication interface error (Overrun) 84 IMC communication interface error (Framing) E7 01 Duplex model memory setup error, memory notdetected error 02 LSU trouble 10 Shading trouble (Black correction) 11 Shading trouble (White correction) Main Sub Details of trouble code code E7 16 Abnormal laser output F2 02 Toner supply abnormality 04 Improper cartridge (Destination error, life cycle error) F5 02 Copy lamp lighting abnormality F6 10 FAX board trouble H2 00 Thermistor open H3 00 Heat roller high temperature detection H4 00 Heat roller low temperature detection L1 00 Feeding is not completed within the specified time after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch is locked) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 40 Main Sub Details of trouble code code L3 00 Scanner return trouble L4 01 Main motor lock detection 32 Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection U1 03 FAX board battery error U2 04 EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication error) 11 Counter check sum error (EEPROM) 40 CRUM chip communication error B. Details of trouble codes Main Sub Details of trouble code code E1 00 Content IMC communication trouble Detail An abnormality occurs in communication between the CPU and the IMC. Cause IMC abnormality IMC memory defect/data abnormality Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one. and remedy 10 Content IMC trouble Detail An abnormality occurs in the IMC. Cause USB chip error/CODEC error on the IMC. Check Replace the MCU PWB with a new one. and remedy 13 Content IMC flash ROM error Detail An abnormality occurs in the IMC flash ROM. Cause IMC abnormality Check Replace the MCU PWB with a new one. and If downloading of the program is abnormally remedy terminated, it may cause an error. Download the program again to avoid this. 81 Content IMC communication interface error (Parity) Detail A parity error occurs in communication between the CPU and the IMC. Cause IMC abnormality IMC memory defect/data abnormality Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one. and remedy E1 82 Content IMC communication interface error (Overrun) Detail An overrun error occurs in communication between the CPU and the IMC. Cause IMC abnormality IMC memory defect/data abnormality. Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one. and remedy 84 Content IMC communication interface error (Framing) Detail A framing error occurs in communication between the CPU and the IMC. Cause IMC abnormality IMC memory defect/data abnormality. Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one. and remedy Main Sub Details of trouble code code E7 01 Content Duplex model memory setup error, memory not-detected error Detail The memory is not set properly or the memory capacity is not set to the duplex setup (6M). Check Set SIM 26-39 code number to 2. and remedy 02 Content LSU trouble Detail The BD signal from the LSU cannot be detected in a certain cycle. (Always OFF or always ON) Cause LSU connector or LSU harness defect or disconnection Polygon motor rotation abnormality Laser beams are not generated. MCU PWB abnormality. Check Check connection of the LSU connector. and Execute SIM 61-03 to check the LSU remedy operations. Check that the polygon motor rotates normally. Check that the laser emitting diode generates laser beams. Replace the LSU unit. Replace the MCU PWB. 10 Content Shading trouble (Black correction) Detail The CCD black scan level is abnormal when the shading. Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable CCD unit abnormality MCU PWB abnormality Check Check connection of the CCD unit flat cable. and Check the CCD unit. remedy 11 Content Shading trouble (White correction) Detail The CCD white scan level is abnormal when the shading. Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable Dirt on the mirror, the lens, and the reference white plate Copy lamp lighting abnormality CCD unit abnormality MCU PWB abnormality (When occurred in the SPF/RSPF scan position.) Improper installation of the mirror unit Check Clean the mirror, lens, and the reference and white plate. remedy Check the light quantity and lighting status of the copy lamp (SIM 05-03). Check the MCU PWB. 16 Content Abnormal laser output Detail When the laser output is stopped, HSYNC is detected. Cause Laser abnormality MCU PWB abnormality. Check Check the laser emitting diode operation. and Replace the MCU PWB. remedy AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 41 Main Sub Details of trouble code code F2 02 Content Toner supply abnormality Detail The maximum toner supply time is greatly exceeded. Cause CRUM chip trouble Improper developing unit Check Replace the CRUM chip. and Replace the developing unit. remedy 04 Content Improper cartridge (Destination error, life cycle error) Detail The destination of the main unit differs from that of the CRUM. When the life cycle information is other than Not Used (FFh). Cause CRUM chip trouble Improper developing unit Check Replace the CRUM chip. and Replace the developing unit. remedy F5 02 Content Copy lamp lighting abnormality Detail The copy lamp does not turn on. Cause Copy lamp abnormality Copy lamp harness abnormality CCD PWB harness abnormality. Check Use SIM 5-3 to check the copy lamp operations. and remedy When the copy lamp lights up. Check the harness and the connector between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB. When the copy lamp does not light up. Check the harness and the connector between the copy lamp unit and the MCU PWB. Replace the copy lamp unit. Replace the MCU PWB. F6 10 Content FAX board trouble Detail Communication trouble between MCU and FAX control PWB Cause FAX control PWB connector disconnection Defective harness between FAX control PWB and MCU PWB Motherboard connector pin breakage FAX control PWB ROM error/Data error IC on FAX PWB causes abnormality Check Check connector/harness of FAX control and PWB and MCU PWB. remedy Check the grounding of the copier. Check FAX control PWB ROM. Replace the FAX PWB. H2 00 Content Thermistor open Detail The thermistor is open. The fusing unit is not installed. Cause Thermistor abnormality Control PWB abnormality Fusing section connector disconnection The fusing unit is not installed. Check Check the harness and the connector and between the thermistor and the PWB. remedy Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic display. Main Sub Details of trouble code code H3 00 Content Heat roller high temperature detection Detail The fusing temperature exceeds 240°C. Cause Thermistor abnormality Control PWB abnormality Fusing section connector disconnection. Check Use SIM 5-02 to check the heater lamp and blinking operation. remedy When the lamp blinks normally. Check the thermistor and its harness. Check the thermistor input circuit on the control PWB. When the lamp keeps ON. Check the power PWB and the lamp control circuit on the MCU PWB. Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic display. H4 00 Content Heat roller low temperature detection Detail 1) When the target temperature (165°C) is not reached in 55 sec after starting warming-up. 2) When the temperature below 100°C is detected for 300ms under the ready print state. ∗ "Starting warming-up" means not only that in power supply but also reset that in reset from shut-off and in side door close. (The timing of generating H4 is not limited to that in power supply.) Cause Thermistor abnormality Heater lamp abnormality Thermostat abnormality Control PWB abnormality Check Use SIM 5-02 to check the heater lamp and blinking operation. remedy When the lamp blinks normally. Check the thermistor and its harness. Check the thermistor input circuit on the control PWB. When the lamp does not light up. Check for disconnection of the heater lamp and the thermostat. Check the interlock switch. Check the power PWB and the lamp control circuit on the MCU PWB. Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic display. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 42 Main Sub Details of trouble code code L1 00 Content Feeding is not completed within the specified time after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch is locked) Detail The white area and the black marking on the shading plate are used to obtain the difference in the CCD level values for judgment of lock. When the difference in the levels of which and black is small, it is judged that the black mark could not be scanned by lock and the trouble code "L1" is displayed. Cause The scan head is locked by the lock switch. Mirror unit abnormality The scanner wire is disconnected. The origin detection sensor abnormality Mirror motor harness abnormality Check Check to confirm that the scan head lock and switch is released. remedy Use SIM 1-1 to check the mirror reciprocating operations. When the mirror does not feed. Check for disconnection of the scanner wire. Check the harness and the connector between the mirror motor and the MCU PWB. Replace the mirror unit. Replace the MCU PWB. When the mirror does feed. Use SIM 1-2 to check the mirror home position sensor. L3 00 Content Scanner return trouble Detail When the mirror base is returned for the specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing after turning on the power, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON. Or when the mirror base is returned for the specified time (about 6 sec) after start of copy return, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON. Cause Mirror unit abnormality Scanner wire disconnection Origin detection sensor abnormality Mirror motor harness abnormality Check Use SIM 1-1 to check the mirror and reciprocating operations. remedy When the mirror does not return. Check for disconnection of the scanner wire. Check the harness and the connector between the mirror motor and the MCU PWB. Replace the mirror unit. Replace the MCU PWB. When the mirror does feed. Use SIM 1-2 to check the mirror home position sensor. L4 01 Content Main motor lock detection Detail When the main motor encoder pulse is not detected for 100 msec. Cause Main motor unit abnormality Improper connection or disconnection the main motor and the harness. MCU PWB abnormality Check Use SIM 25-01 to check the main motor and operations. remedy Check connection of the main motor harness/connector. Replace the main motor. Replace the MCU PWB. Main Sub Details of trouble code code L4 32 Content Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble Detail The error detection is started after 2 sec from starting rotation of the exhaust fan motor. 1) The continuous rotation state of 250ms is not detected for 1 sec after starting detection. 2) When the lock sensor (in the exhaust fan) detects the HIGH level (unstable) after detection the lock state (stable state). Cause Exhaust fan motor connector connection trouble Exhaust fan motor trouble MCU PWB trouble Check Exhaust fan motor connector connection and check remedy Exhaust fan motor replacement Replace the MCU PWB. L6 10 Content Polygon motor lock detection Detail The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does not return within a certain time (about 20 sec) from starting the polygon motor rotation. Cause Polygon motor unit abnormality Improper connection or disconnection of the polygon motor and the harness. MCU PWB abnormality Check Use SIM 61-1 to check the polygon motor and operations. remedy Check connection of the polygon motor harness/connector. Replace the polygon motor. Replace the MCU PWB. U1 03 Content FAX board battery error Details The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX PWB falls. Cause The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX PWB falls. Check Check voltage of the SRAM back up battery. and Replace the battery. remedy U2 04 Content EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication error) Detail EEPROM access process error Cause EEPROM abnormality Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set. and Use SIM 16 to cancel the trouble. remedy Replace the MCU PWB. 11 Content Counter check sum error (EEPROM) Detail Check sum error of the counter area in the EEPROM Cause EEPROM abnormality Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set. and Use SIM 16 to cancel the trouble. remedy Replace the MCU PWB. 40 Content CRUM chip communication error Detail An error occurs in MCU-CRUM chip communication. Cause CRUM chip trouble Defective contact of developing unit MCU PWB trouble Check Replace the CRUM chip. and Check installation of the developing unit. remedy Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power. Replace the MCU PWB. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 43 [11] MAINTENANCE 1. Maintenance table : Check (Clean, adjust, or replace when required.) Section Developing Process peripheral Parts Developer DV blade DV side seal (F/R) DV doctor Drum 25K 50K 75K : Clean 100K : Replace 125K : Adjust ✩: Lubricate Remark White streaks are made on the image. 2. Maintenance display system Toner Life Remaining quantity LED Machine Life LED Machine Developer 8K EMPTY NEAR EMPTY About 12.5% ON Operation allowed Flash Stop 25K ON at 25K of the developer count. Selection is available between Not Stop and Stop by Service Simulation (SIM 26-37) Setup. (If Stop is selected, the LED will flash and stop at 25K.) ∗ Default: Not Stop Maintenance ∗ Clear: SIM 24-06 Selection is available among 25K, 13K, 9K, 6K, 3K, and free (no lighting) with SIM 21-1. ∗ Default: 25K LED ∗ Clear: SIM 20-1 Not stop. Machine Note: When developer is replaced, be sure to execute simulation No. 24-06 to reset the counter. 3. Remaining toner indication TONER FULL Display for users Remaining toner indication 100% 75% Lo 50% LOW LEVEL 25% 100-76% 75-51% 50-26% 25-13% 12.5% or less • The remaining toner indication is based on the number of revolutions of the toner motor. • The toner END indication appears when the END is detected by the toner sensor. • The remaining toner indication is a rough indication of the remaining toner quantity. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 MAINTENANCE 11 - 1 [12] USER PROGRAM The conditions of factory setting can be changed according to the use conditions. 3) To enter the toner save mode, press the light ( ) key. The light and dark indicator marked "1" will light up, indicating the toner save mode is selected. 1. Functions that can be set with user programs Toner save mode Reduces toner consumption by approximately 10%. Power save modes The unit has two power save modes of operation: preheat mode and auto power shut-off mode. Preheat mode When the unit enters the preheat mode, the power save ( ) indicator will light up and other indicators will remain on or off as before. In this condition, the fuser in the unit is maintained at a lower heat level, thereby saving power. To copy from the preheat mode, make desired copier selections and press the start ( ) key using the normal copying procedure. Auto power shut-off mode When the unit enters the auto power shut-off mode, the power save ( ) indicator will light up and other indicators except the ONLINE indicator will go out. The auto power shut-off mode saves more power than the preheat mode but requires a longer time before starting copying. To copy from the auto power shut-off mode, press the start ( ) key. Then make desired copier selections and press the start ( ) key using the normal copying procedure. Auto clear The unit returns to the initial settings a preset amount of time after the end of job. This preset amount of time (auto clear time) can be changed. Resolution of AUTO & MANUAL mode You can set the copy resolution used for AUTO and MANUAL ( ) exposure mode. 2. Toner save mode (AR-203E/5420) 1) Press the exposure mode selector key to select the MANUAL ( ) mode. 4) Press the exposure mode selector key. The PHOTO ( ) indicator will stop blinking and light up steadily. The light and dark indicator marked "3" will light up. The toner save mode is now active. Note: To return to the standard mode, repeat the procedure but use the dark ( ) key to select exposure level "5" in step 3). 3. User programs (AR-203E/5420) The user programs allow the parameters of certain functions to be set, changed, or canceled as desired. Set the power save modes, auto clear time, preheat mode, SPF automatic original discharge time, resolution of AUTO & MANUAL mode and reset factory setting. 1) Press and hold down the light ( ) key simultaneously for more than 5 seconds until all the alarm indicators ( , , , ) blink and " " appears in the display. 2) Use the left copy quantity ( ) key to select a user program number (1: Auto clear time, 2: Preheat mode, 3: Auto power shut off mode, 4: Auto power shut off timer, 6: SPF automatic original discharge time, 10: Resolution of AUTO & MANUAL mode, 21: Reset factory, 24: Prevention of OC copies when the SPF is up function, 25: Copy effective paper width setting function (Bypass tray), 26: Copy effective paper width setting function (Tray), 28: Selection of copy start state (Polygon rotation on/off), 29: Fusing temperature setting when the bypass tray is used). The selected number will blink in the left side of the display. 3) Press the start ( ) key. The entered program number will be steadily lit and the currently selected parameter number for the program will blink on the right side of the display. 4) Select the desired parameter using the right copy quantity ( ) key. The entered parameter number will blink on the right of the display. Program Mode No. 1 Auto clear time 2) Press and hold down the exposure mode selector key for approximately 5 seconds. The MANUAL ( ) indicator will go out and the PHOTO ( ) indicator will begin to blink. The light and dark indicator marked "5" will light up, indicating the standard toner mode is active. 2 3 4 6 10 21 24 Parameters 1 → 10 sec., 2 → 30 sec., *3 → 60 sec., 4 → 90 sec., 5 → 120 sec., 6 → OFF Preheat mode *1 → 30 sec., 2 → 60 sec., 3 → 5 min., 4 → 30 min., 5 → 60 min., 6 → 120 min., 7 → 240 min. Auto power shut off mode *1 → ON, 2 → OFF Auto power shut off timer *1 → 5 min., 2 → 30min., 3 → 60 min., 4 → 120 min., 5 → 240 min. SPF automatic original 1 → 5 min., *2 → 30 min., discharge time 3 → 60 min., 4 → 120 min., 5 → 240 min., 6 → OFF Resolution of AUTO & *1 → 300dpi, 2 → 600dpi MANUAL mode Reset factory 1 → YES, *2 → NO Prevention of OC copies *1 → ON, 2 → OFF when the SPF is up function AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 1 Program Mode No. 25 Copy effective paper width setting function (Bypass tray) 26 Copy effective paper width setting function (Tray) 28 Parameters *1 → Large (A4 width/ LETTER), 2 → Small (B5R width/INVOICE) *1 → Large (A4 width/ LETTER), 2 → Small (B5R width/INVOICE) *1 → ON, 2 → OFF Selection of copy start state (Polygon rotation on/ off) Fusing temperature 1 → Low, *2 → High setting when the bypass tray is used 29 3) Press the [ ] key [ ] or [ ting of the selected item. ] key [ ] to change the set- • See "1. User programs" for the program code. PREHEAT MODE 1:1 MIN 1 2 2 1 2 1 PREHEAT MODE 1:1 MIN 2 1 NOTE: • If you mistakenly select the wrong item, press the [Clear] key ( ) and repeat the procedure from step 2). ∗ Factory default settings are indicated with an asterisk (*). • To cancel a setting for a user program, press the [MENU] key. 5) Press the start ( ) key. The right-hand number in the display will be steadily lit and the entered value will be stored. 4) Note: To change the setting or to set another mode, press the clear key. The unit will return to step 2). 6) Press the light ( ) key to return to the normal copy mode. 4. User programs (AR-M200/M201) Press the [OK]/[ENTER] key. Your selection appears briefly and then the previous screen appears. NOTE: When "AE LEVEL ADJUST" is selected in the user programs and the [OK]/[ENTER] key is pressed, the automatic exposure adjustment screen appears. Adjust the exposure and press the [OK]/[ENTER] key. 1) Press the [MENU] key and then press the [OK]/[ENTER] key. In printer mode, the user programs are accessed by simply pressing the [MENU] key. MAIN MENU 1:USER PROGRAM 1 2 2 1 2 1 MAIN MENU 1:USER PROGRAM 2 1 ] or [ ] key [ ] to select the item 2) Press the [ ] key [ that you wish to configure in the USER PROGRAM items, and then press the [OK]/[ENTER] key. • See "1. User programs" for the program name and program code. • You can also select a program by directly entering the program number with the numeric keys. USER PROGRAM 2:PREHEAT MODE 1 2 2 1 2 1 USER PROGRAM 2:PREHEAT MODE Audible signals (key entry beep, invalid key beep, base setting beep) The machine sounds three different types of beep signals: a key entry beep that sounds when a valid key is pressed, an invalid key beep that sounds when an invalid key is pressed, and a base setting beep that sounds when a setting is the same as the base setting (base settings are explained below). The base setting beep is initially disabled. If you wish to enable the base setting beep, see "SOUND AT DEFAULT". If you wish to change the volume of the beep signals or disable them, see "KEY TOUCH SOUND". The beep patterns of each type of beep signal are as follows: Key entry beep: One beep Base setting beep: Three beeps Invalid key beep: Two beeps Base settings The base settings are preset standard selections for each copy setting. The base settings are as follows: Copy ratio: 100% Light and Dark level: Center 2 1 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 2 Paper feed location: Tray 1 (Upper paper tray) AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO: AUTO A. Copy mode Program number Program name Setting codes (factory default setting appears in bold) Explanation 1 AUTO CLEAR 1: 10 SEC. 2: 30 SEC. 3: 60 SEC. 4: 90 SEC. 5: 120 SEC. 6: OFF • Auto clear time automatically returns the copy settings to the initial settings if no keys are pressed for a preset period of time following the end of a copy job. • This program is used to select the period of time. Auto clear time can also be disabled. 2 PREHEAT MODE 1: 30 SEC. 2: 1 MIN. 3: 5 MIN. 4: 30 MIN. 5: 60 MIN. 6: 120 MIN. 7: 240 MIN. • This function automatically switches the machine to a low power consumption state if the set duration of time elapses without the machine being used when the power is on. The power save indicator lights up, however, the keys on the operation panel can be used. Normal operation automatically resumes when a key on the operation panel is pressed, an original is placed, a print job is received. 3 AUTO SHUT-OFF 1: ON 2: OFF • Use this setting to enable or disable auto power shut-off mode. 4 AUTO SHUT-OFF TIME 1: 5 MIN. 2: 30 MIN. 3: 60 MIN. 4: 120 MIN. 5: 240 MIN. • This function automatically switches the machine to a state that consumes even less power than preheat mode if the set duration of time elapses without the machine being used when the power is on. All lights except the power save indicator go off. To resume normal operation, press the [START] key ( ). Normal operation also resumes automatically when a print job is received or scanning is begun from a computer. While in auto power shut-off mode, no keys (except the [START] key ( )) can be used. 7 LAYOUT IN 2IN1 1: PATTERN 1 2: PATTERN 2 • Use this setting to select the layout pattern when two original pages are copied onto a single sheet of paper. 8 OFFSET FUNCTION 1: ON 2: OFF • When enabled, this function offsets the position of each set of copies in the output tray in copy mode, and each print job in printer mode. 9 ROTATE ORIG. IMAGE (AR-208D only) 1: ON 2: OFF • When two-sided copying is performed, this function rotates the image on the back of the original. This is convenient when binding the copies at the top (tablet binding). 10 AE/TEXT RESOLUTION 1: 300dpi 2: 600dpi • This setting is used to change the copy resolution in AUTO and TEXT mode from 600 x 300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high-quality mode). Scanning is slower when high-quality mode is used. 11 2-SIDED COPY MODE (AR-208D only) 1: HI-SPEED 2: NORMAL • If the memory fills up when two-sided copying is performed, "NORMAL" can be selected to make copying possible. However, "NORMAL" results in a slower copying speed. Normally "HI-SPEED" is selected to enable fast two-sided copying. 12 MARGIN WIDTH 1: 1/4" 2: 1/2" 3: 3/4" 4: 1" • Use this setting to set the margin width. 13 MEM. FOR PRINTER 1: 30% 2: 40% 3: 50% 4: 60% 5: 70% • Use this to change the proportion of machine memory used for printer mode. 14 AUTO KEY REPEAT 1: ON 2: OFF • Use this setting to select whether or not holding down a key causes repeated input of the key. For keys that normally cause a set value to decrease or increase when held down (for example, the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )), this program can be used to have the set value not change when the key is held down. 15 KEY PRESS TIME 1: NORMAL 2: 0.5 SEC. 3: 1.0 SEC. 4: 1.5 SEC. 5: 2.0 SEC. • Use this setting to select how long a key must be pressed for the input to be accepted. By selecting a longer time, you can prevent settings from being changed by the accidental pressing of a key. 16 KEY TOUCH SOUND 1: LOW 2: HIGH 3: OFF • This sets the volume of beep signals. 17 SOUND AT DEFAULT 1: ON 2: OFF • Use this to sound a beep when a base setting is selected. 18 TONER SAVE MODE 1: ON 2: OFF • This mode reduces toner usage by about 10% when copying. Toner save mode is effective when the exposure mode is AUTO or TEXT. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 3 Setting codes (factory default setting appears in bold) Program number Program name 19 AE LEVEL ADJUST 1: SPF/RSPF (Adjustment to 5 levels is possible.) 2: DOCUMENT GLASS (Adjustment to 5 levels is possible.) • This is used to adjust the exposure level. • The automatic exposure level can be adjusted separately for the document glass and the RSPF. • For the procedure for adjusting the exposure and guidelines for numeric values. The factory default setting for the exposure level is center. 20 LANGUAGE 1: AMERICAN ENGLISH 2: ENGLISH 3: FRENCH 4: SPANISH : : • This is used to set the language used in the display. 21 RESET FACTORY 1: Yes 2: No • This is used to return all settings to the factory default settings. 22 SORT AUTO SELECT 1: ON 2: OFF • Use this setting to enable or disable sort auto select mode. 24 CHECK RSPF OPEN 1: ON 2: OFF • You can set the operation that takes place if the [START] key ( ) is pressed when the RSPF is not completely closed. (Valid only when the multi-bypass paper feed is used.) 25 VALID COPY WIDTH 1: 8.5x11 2: 5.5x8.5 • Set the allowed paper sizes for copying from the bypass tray. When "5.5x8.5" is selected, a copy of a letter size original will only be printed up to invoice size. 28 LSU SETTING 1: ON 2: OFF • Select whether copying is only allowed when the polygon motor is rotating, or also when the polygon motor is stopped. 29 PAPER TYPE 1: PLAIN PAPER 2: HEAVY PAPER • Set the temperature of the fusing unit when the bypass tray is used. Normally "HEAVY PAPER" should be selected. 30 DISPLAY CONTRAST 1: LIGHTER 2: LIGHT 3: NORMAL 4: DARK 5: DARKER • Set the contrast of the display. Explanation B. Print mode Program number Program name Setting codes (factory default setting appears in bold) Explanation 1 FORCED OUTPUT 1: ON 2: OFF • When this function is enabled, printing in printer mode will automatically continue using a different size of paper if the specified size of paper runs out in all trays. This feature does not function in copy mode. 2 USB 2.0 MODE SWITCH *1 1: FULL-SPEED 2: HI-SPEED • This sets the USB 2.0 data transfer speed. To obtain the fastest speed when using the USB 2.0 connector, first verify that your computer meets the system requirements (operating system and driver), and then use this program to change the USB 2.0 mode to "Hi-Speed". Note that the setting should not be changed while running a TWAIN driver. 3 AUTO TRAY SWITCH*2 1: ON 2: OFF • If the paper runs out during printing and there is paper of the same size in another tray, this function automatically switches to that tray (excluding the bypass tray). The function can be disabled. *1: The scanning speed increases when the USB 2.0 mode is set to "HI-SPEED", however, the printing speed does not increase considerably. *2: When the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 4 CCD Driver MCU-PWB 5V AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 1 12V Driver 24V A G C A5V USB I/F Sensor/SW PAPD,PPD3, PD2,CED2 Mechanical load CPFS2 MainMotor USB1T20 Scanner CLK(48MHz) 2nd Cassette (AR-203E Optional only) Fan Motor (2speed with Lock detect) C D S Printer CLK (18.3856MHz) R G B /MMD CCD (ILX558X) NF AFE(HT82V24) MMCLK USB2.0 FullSpeed (expect for AR-5420) 5V M P X /MMRDY 12V AD 8bits(MSB/LSB) 5V Mirror Motor Driver (296pin) KRONOS ASIC Reg Toner Motor Driver 3.3V 16bits 3.3V LASER LSU PWM HC151 MHPS POWER SUPPLY AC Code /POFF,HL,PR FW 3.3V,5VEN,5V,12V,24V PSW TC, GRID, MC, BIAS HVU EEPROM (CRUM) I2C Bus 8Kbyte EEPROM SELIN1,2,3 KEYIN1,2 PSL ONL OP-CLK OP-LATCH OP-DATA I2C Bus Driver SPF Motor (AR-203E optional only) CPU CLK(19.6608MHz) SSCG CPU H8S/2321 (19.6608MHz) System Reset 16Mbyte or 8Mbyte SDRAM HOME POSITION SENSOR SRAM 1Mbit Flash ROM 16Mbit D[15…0] A[19…1] Reset IC 3.3V Polygon Motor DC-DC 0 - 24V Lamp Inverter for CCFL CCFL x 2 PMD CCD PWB PMCLK Carriage Unit HC151 x 2 PSL LED ONL LED OPE PWB 16bit LED Driver LED Interlock SW Cassette detector X 2 Drum Initial detector PPD1 POD MFD PPD2 SPOD PD1 START KEY KEY Matrix CPU I/O CPU INTERRUPT SPPD Sensor/SW (Electorical detector/SW/Sensor) MPFS,RRS,CPFS1 Mechanical Load [13] ELECTRICAL SECTION 1. Block diagram A. Overall block diagram (AR-203E/5420) Fan Motor Shifter Motor Duplex Motor AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 2 Driver Driver A G C 18.3856MHz Printer CLK /MMD Sensor/SW PPD3, PD2, CED2 M P X /MMLD Main Motor Mechanical load CPFS2 Driver 24V 12V 2nd Cassette Duplex Model Only C D S SSCG Scanner CLK (12MHz x4 48MHz) MCU-PWB CCD Driver R G B A5V MMCLK 5V CCD (ILX558K) Reg AFE(HT86V26) 12V Mirror Motor Driver LSU LASER D[15…0] A[19…1] Reset IC 3.3V Polygon Motor OP-CLK OP-LATCH OP-DATA EEPROM I2C Bus 8Kbyte UART /ESPRD Driver POWER SUPPLY AC Code HVU TC, GRID, MC, BIAS EEPROM (CRUM) D[7..0] RD CS INT LCD E LCD RS LCD R/W (TBD) LCD DB7-4 PSW KEYSCAN1 - 3 SELIN1,2,3 KEYIN SDRAM 256Mbx2 PSL RSPF Motor (AR-M200/M201 optional only) CPU CLK (19.6608MHz) SSCG /POFF,HL,PR FW 3.3V,5VEN,5V,12V,24V D[15…8] CPUCLK MHPS CPU H8S/2321 (19.6608MHz) System Reset Image BUS(PI-Bus) Image BUS(PO-Bus) SDRAM 8Mbyte HOME POSITION SENSOR SRAM 1Mbit Flash ROM 16Mbit 8 8 IO ASIC DC-DC 0 - 24V Lamp Inverter for CCFL CCFL x 2 PWM 8bits (MSB/LSB) KRONOS ASIC (296pin) Toner Motor Driver 3.3V AD 16bits 3.3V PMRDY PMD 12V PMCLK Carriage Unit 8Mb or 16Mb OA982 P-Bus 8bit LCD (2 x 20) START KEY Speaker Buzzer KEY Matrix LED 18.3856MHz ISP1583 12MHz LED Driver HC238 (3 to 8 decode) 8bit HC151 PSL LED OPE PWB Flash ROM FAX I/F FAX Main PCBA AR-FX13 (Option) NW PWB Network Box 100Base-T AR-NB2A (Option) AR-FX13 CPU I/O LED SPID SRJD SCOD Interlock SW Cassette detector X 2 Drum Initial detector PPD1 POD MFD PPD2 CPU INTERRUPT SPPD Sensor/SW (Electorical detector/SW/Sensor) KEY Matrix FAX OPE PWB FAX Model Only Ethernet (RSPF UNIT) SPUS,SRVC MPFS,RRS,CPFS1 Mechanical Load B. Overall block diagram (AR-M200/M201) USB2.0 High-speed 24V P-GND /PMD PMRDY PMCLK_A AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 3 1 2 3 4 5 MPFS SOLENOID PPD1 CED1 D-GND CASSETTE PAPER SOLENOID RESIST ROLLER SOLENOID TONER MT CED1 LD - HSYNC D-GND +5V D-GND - LDEN - VIDEO - S/H D-GND 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 POLYGON MT MAIN MT INT24V PGND /MMD MMLD /MMCLK POD 1 2 3 4 5 DSW CN16 1 LEDPPD1 2 PPD1 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-R DHAI-0289QSZZ CN15 1 24V 2 24V1(DSWS) B2P-VH-R CN26 24V /MPFS 5䌖 MFD DGND B5B-PH-K-R CN7 1 CED1 2 D-GND 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-K 1 2 3 B3B-PH-K-S CN10 24V /CPFS1 1 2 3 B3B-PH-K-E CN12 24V /RRS CN23 1 TMA_O 2 TMB_O B2P-VH CN6 1 INT24V 2 PGND 3 /MMD 4 MMLD 5 /MMCLK B5B-PASK-1 DHAI-0269QSZZ DHAI-0514QSPZ CN25 1 2 PD1 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-M CN41 1 24V 2 P-GND 3 /PMD 4 PMRDY 5 PMCLK_A B05B-CZHK-B CN19 1 LEDPOD 2 POD 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-S CN11 1 VFMOUT 2 FANLK 3 /VFMCNT 4 PGND B4B-PH-K-S CN22 1 LEDPPD2 2 PPD2 3 D-GND 4 RTH_IN 5 D-GND B5B-PH-K-S DHAI-0529QSPZ DHAI-0272QSZZ DHAI-0287QSZZ CN42 1 /SYNC 2 D-GND 3 INT5V 4 D-GND 5 /LDEN 6 /VIDEO 7 SHOLD 8 D-GND B08B-CZHK-B 1 2 1 2 3 DHAI-0530QSPZ DHAI-0286QSZZ RTH_IN D-GND 1 2 Thermistor Fan MT LEDPPD2 PPD2 D-GND 1 2 3 DHAI-0519QSPZ PPD2 MCU PWB CN1 D-GND 9 P-GND 10 D-GND 11 3.3VIN 12 EN5V 13 3.3VIN 14 5V 15 /POFF 16 12VIN 17 24V 18 FW 19 24V 20 /PR 21 HLOUT 22 P-GND 23 P-GND 24 B24B-PNDZS-1 1 2 3 4 /BIAS 5 /TC 6 /GRIDL 7 /MC 8 B24B-PNDZS-1 CN1 INT5V INT24V CN5 24V 1 TCS 2 DVSEL 3 D-GND 4 B4B-PH-K-R 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 9 10 B10B-PHDSS-B CN5 5VEN (CRUMSDA) (CRUMSCL) PGND 24V TCS DVSEL D-GND CN3 P-GND 1 P-GND 2 VCL 3 VCL 4 12V 5 12V 6 EN5V 7 D-GND 8 (VSAMP) 9 CCD-TG 10 D-GND 11 CCD-RS 12 (BSAMP) 13 CCD-CP 14 (AFE_SDI) 15 CCD_PHI2 16 D-GND 17 CCD_PHI1 18 (AFE_SEN) 19 (ADCLK) 20 D-GND 21 (AFE_SCK) 22 (AFE_DB7) 23 mt_at_home 24 (AFE_DB5) 25 (AFE_DB6) 26 D-GND 27 (AFE_DB4) 28 (AFE_DB3) 29 30 (AFE_DB2) 31 (AFE_DB1) 32 (AFE_DB0) FF4-32-S15D5 CN4 OUTA+ 1 OUTB+ 2 OUTA3 OUTB4 B4B-PH-K-R CN2 D-GND 1 KEYIN1# 2 SELIN3 3 STROBE 4 SELIN1 5 OP-CLK 6 SELIN2 7 OP-LATCH 8 OP-DATA 9 EN5V 10 D-GND 11 PSL 12 ONL 13 PSW 14 KEYIN2# 15 5V 16 DRST 17 D-GND 18 IMSA-9619S-18A DHAI-0525QSPZ DHAI-0516QSPZ DHAI-0268QSZ4 DHAI-0513QSPZ P-GND P-GND VCL VCL 12V 12V EN5V D-GND (VSAMP) CCD-TG D-GND CCD-RS (BSAMP) CCD-CP (AFE_SDI) CCD_PHI2 D-GND CCD_PHI1 (AFE_SEN) (ADCLK) D-GND (AFE_SCK) (AFE_DB7) MHPS (AFE_DB5) (AFE_DB6) D-GND (AFE_DB4) (AFE_DB3) (AFE_DB2) (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB0) CN304 D-GND KIN1 SELIN3 OP-STB SELIN1 OP-CLK SELIN2 OP-LATCH OP-DATA 5VEN D-GND PSL ONL PSW KIN2 5V DRST D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 D-GND P-GND D-GND 3.3VIN EN5V 3.3VIN 5V /POFF 12VIN 24V FW 24V /PR HLOUT P-GND P-GND /BIAS /TC /GRIDL /MC INT5V INT24V BIAS F-GND DHAI-0526QSPZ VCL P-GND L N HLN HLL BC TC MCFB GRID MC 1 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 4 1 1 2 OPE PWB CCD PWB HVT PWB POWER SUPPLY PWB CRUM 2 5VEN 4 (CRUMSDA) 3 (CRUMSCL) 1 PGND P18-FX-4S-C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 24V TCS DVSEL D-GND BIAS AC-INLET L N PGND DHAI-0536QSPZ DHAI-0267QSPZ DHAI-0292QSZZ DHAI-0273QSZZ DHAI-0515QSPZ 1 2 6 5 8 1 2 1 2 6 5 8 INVERTER PWB HLL HLN SCANNER UN SCANNER MT AC-CORD 1 2 TCS CL CL DHAI-0537QSPZ DV un HL THERMOSTAT 2. Actual wiring diagram A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420) 1 2 3 4 5 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 4 MPFS SOLENOID PPD1 CED1 PD1 CED1 D-GND CASSETTE PAPER SOLENOID RESIST ROLLER SOLENOID TONER MT MAIN MT INT24V PGND /MMD MMLD /MMCLK 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 POLYGON MT 24V P-GND /PMD PMRDY PMCLK_A LD 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DHAI-0519QSPZ - HSYNC D-GND +5V D-GND - LDEN - VIDEO - S/H D-GND FAX Model only POD Duplex Model only DUPLEX MT SHIFTER MT Fan MT Thermistor PPD2 D-GND LEDPPD2 PPD2 D-GND CN27 24VSFTMT /SFTMT_0 /SFTMT_1 /SFTMT_2 /SFTMT_3 DSW CN24 1 LEDPPD1 2 PPD1 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-R DHAI-0289QSZZ CN10 1 24V 2 24V1(DSWS) B2P-VH-R CN14 1 24V 2 /MPFS 3 5䌖 4 MFD DGND 5 B5B-PH-K-R CN21 1 CED1 2 D-GND 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-K CN15 1 24V 2 /CPFS1 3 B3B-PH-K-S CN18 1 24V 2 /RRS 3 B3B-PH-K-E CN25 1 TMA_O 2 TMB_O B2P-VH CN12 1 INT24V 2 PGND 3 /MMD 4 MMLD 5 /MMCLK B5B-PASK-1 CN28 1 2 PD1 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-M DHAI-0269QSZZ DHAI-0514QSPZ DHAI-0423QSZZ CN41 1 24V 2 P-GND 3 /PMD 4 PMRDY 5 PMCLK_A B05B-CZHK-B CN26 1 LEDPOD 2 POD 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-S CN20 1 24VDupMT 2 /DMT_0 3 /DMT_1 4 /DMT_2 5 /DMT_3 B05B-XASK-1 1 2 3 4 5 CN16 1 VFMOUT 2 FANLK 3 /VFMCNT 4 PGND B4B-PH-K-S CN11 1 LEDPPD2 2 PPD2 3 D-GND 4 RTH_IN 5 D-GND B5B-PH-K-S DHAI-0529QSP1 DHAI-0272QSZZ DHAI-0287QSZZ CN42 1 /SYNC 2 D-GND 3 INT5V 4 D-GND 5 /LDEN 6 /VIDEO 7 SHOLD 8 D-GND B08B-CZHK-B 2 1 2 3 DHAI-0530QSP1 DHAI-0286QSZZ 2 1 2 3 MCU PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 CN2 D-GND 9 P-GND 10 D-GND 11 3.3VIN 12 EN5V 13 3.3VIN 14 5V 15 /POFF 16 12VIN 17 24V 18 FW 19 24V 20 /PR 21 HLOUT 22 P-GND 23 P-GND 24 B24B-PNDZS-1 CN2 INT5V 1 INT24V 2 P-GND 3 P-GND 4 /BIAS 5 /TC 6 /GRIDL 7 /MC 8 B24B-PNDZS-1 CN6 24V 1 TCS 2 DVSEL 3 D-GND 4 B4B-PH-K-R 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 9 10 B10B-PHDSS-B CN7 5VEN (CRUMSDA) (CRUMSCL) D-GND 24V TCS DVSEL D-GND CN4 P-GND 1 P-GND 2 VCL 3 VCL 4 12V 5 12V 6 EN5V 7 D-GND 8 (VSAMP) 9 CCD-TG 10 D-GND 11 CCD-RS 12 (BSAMP) 13 CCD-CP 14 (AFE_SDI) 15 CCD_PHI2 16 D-GND 17 CCD_PHI1 18 (AFE_SEN) 19 (ADCLK) 20 D-GND 21 (AFE_SCK) 22 (AFE_DB7) 23 mt_at_home 24 (AFE_DB5) 25 (AFE_DB6) 26 D-GND 27 (AFE_DB4) 28 (AFE_DB3) 29 (AFE_DB2) 30 31 (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB0) 32 FF4-32-S15D5 CN22 OUTA+ 1 OUTB+ 2 OUTA3 OUTB4 B4B-PH-K-R CN3 D-GND BL INFOLED OP_LATCH D-GND OP_CLK OP_DATA PSW PSL DRST LCDD7 LCDD6 LCDD5 LCDD4 LCDE LCDRS LCDCONT BZR KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 KEYIN SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 D-GND EN5V D-GND 5V D-GND VCC3 D-GND DHAI-0525QSPZ DHAI-0525QSPZ DHAI-0516QSPZ DHAI-0268QSZ4 DHAI-0517QSPZ P-GND P-GND VCL VCL 12V 12V EN5V D-GND (VSAMP) CCD-TG D-GND CCD-RS (BSAMP) CCD-CP (AFE_SDI) CCD_PHI2 D-GND CCD_PHI1 (AFE_SEN) (ADCLK) D-GND (AFE_SCK) (AFE_DB7) MHPS (AFE_DB5) (AFE_DB6) D-GND (AFE_DB4) (AFE_DB3) (AFE_DB2) (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB0) CN302 D-GND BL INFOLED OP_LATCH D-GND OP_CLK OP_DATA PSW PSL DRST LCDD7 LCDD6 LCDD5 LCDD4 LCDE LCDRS LCDCONT BZR KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 KEYIN SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 D-GND EN5V D-GND 5V D-GND VCC3 D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 D-GND P-GND D-GND 3.3VIN EN5V 3.3VIN 5V /POFF 12VIN 24V FW 24V /PR HLOUT P-GND P-GND INT5V INT24V P-GND P-GND /BIAS /TC /GRIDL /MC BIAS F-GND DHAI-0526QSPZ L N HLN HLL HVT PWB MC 1 2 1 BC 1 2 3 1 1 4 1 1 2 TC MCFB GRID CCD PWB VCL P-GND CN301 F-KEYSC3 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC1 F-KEYIN7 F-KEYIN6 F-KEYIN5 F-KEYIN4 F-KEYIN3 F-KEYIN2 F-KEYIN1 LED_V3 LED_V2 LED_V1 DATA1 D-GND 24V TCS DVSEL D-GND BIAS DHAI-0267QSPZ DHAI-0292QSZZ DHAI-0273QSZZ 1 2 6 5 8 CN3 AC VOUT GND INVERTER PWB CN2 AC VOUT GND DHAI-0515QSPZ 1 2 6 5 8 CN401 15 F-KEYSC3 14 F-KEYSC2 13 F-KEYSC1 12 F-KEYIN7 11 F-KEYIN6 10 F-KEYIN5 9 F-KEYIN4 8 F-KEYIN3 7 F-KEYIN2 6 F-KEYIN1 5 LED_V3 4 LED_V2 3 LED_V1 2 DATA1 1 D-GND HLL HLN DHAI-0491QSZZ AC-INLET For 200V area AC-CORD For 120V area 1 2 1 3 1 3 SCANNER Carriage UN SCANNER MT DHAI-0543QSPZ DHAI-0510QSP1 (for 100V area) DHAI-0536QSPZ (for 200V area) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 LCD_OPE PWB POWER SUPPLY PWB CRUM 2 5VEN 4 (CRUMSDA) 3 (CRUMSCL) 1 P-GND P18-FX-4S-C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 DV un HL THERMOSTAT AC-CORD DHAI-0511QSP1 (for 100V area) DHAI-0537QSPZ (for 200V area) TCS CCFL CCFL FAX_OPE PWB FAX Model/FX13 Optional KIT only B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201) C. SPF unit (AR-203E optional only) MCU PWB CN24 24VSPFMT 24VSPFMT SPMT_0 SPMT_2 SPMT_1 SPMT_3 SPID DGND LEDSPID SPPD DGND LEDSPPD B12B-PH-K-S DHAI-0532QSP1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 2 4 6 3 1 COMA COMB A /A B /B 1 2 3 SPID DGND LEDSPID SPID 1 2 3 SPPD DGND LEDSPPD SPPD SPMT SPF UNIT D. RSPF unit (AR-M200/M201 optional only) MCU PWB CN30 LED_SRJD DGND SRJD LED_SPPD DGND SPPD LED_SCOD DGND SCOD LED_SPID DGND SPID 24VSPFSOL SPUS 24VSPFSOL SRVC SPMT_3 24VSPFMT SPMT_1 SPMT_0 24VSPFMT SPMT_2 24VSPFSOL NC DHAI-0533QSPZ DHAI-0541QSPZ 1 3 5 2 4 6 7 9 11 8 10 12 17 19 21 23 14 22 16 20 24 18 13 15 3 2 1 1 2 LED_SRJD D-GND SRJD 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 LED_SPPD D-GND SPPD 3 2 1 3 2 1 LED_SPID D-GND SPID 3 2 1 1 2 24V SRVC 1 2 LEDSRJD DGND SRJD SRJD DHAI-0540QSPZ 3 2 1 LEDSPPD DGND SPPD SPPD 3 2 1 LEDSCOD DGND SCOD SCOD 3 2 1 LEDSPID DGND SPID SPID 1 2 24V _SPUS DHAI-0539QSPZ B24B-PNDZS-1 SPUS RSPF UNIT SRVC 1 2 3 4 5 6 /B COMB B A COMA /A SPMT E. 2nd cassette unit (AR-203E/M200/M201 optional only) 2 1 CPFS2 PPD3 5V PPD3 D-GND 3 2 1 PD2 PD2 D-GND 1 2 CED2 CED2 D-GND 1 2 /CPFS2 24V 2 1 DHAI-0442QSZZ 14 13 11 8 7 6 4 2 1 9 12 10 5 3 /CPFS2 24V 5V PPD3 D-GND PD2 D-GND CED2 D-GND FG 1 2 4 7 8 9 11 13 14 6 3 5 10 12 DHAI-0441QSZZ AR-203E: CN18 AR-M200/AR-M201: CN19 1 /CPFS2 2 24V 4 5V 7 PPD3 8 D-GND 11 PD2 12 D-GND 13 CED2 14 D-GND 3 5 6 9 10 B14B-PHDSS-B MCU PWB 2nd CASSETTE UN AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 5 F. Network box and FAX (AR-M200/M201 optional only) FAX Model / FX13 Optional Model Only DHAI-0538QSPZ CN5 1 MODEM_IN 2 D-GND 3 MCU_D6 4 MCU_D7 5 MCU_D4 6 MCU_D5 7 MCU_D2 8 MCU_D3 9 MCU_D0 10 MCU_D1 11 MCU_nCS 12 /RD 13 PB_DATA7 14 MCU_INT 15 PB_DATA5 16 PB_DATA6 17 PB_DATA3 18 PB_DATA4 19 PB_DATA1 20 PB_DATA2 21 PB_ADDR7 22 PB_DATA0 23 PB_DATA5 24 PB_ADDR6 25 PB_ADDR3 26 PB_ADDR4 27 PB_ADDR1 28 PB_ADDR2 29 PB_NCS1 30 PB_ADDR0 31 PB_NWE 32 PB_NAE0 33 FAX_RST 34 PB_NOE 35 24V 36 MDM_IRQ 37 VCC3 38 EN5V 39 D-GND 40 P-GND MCU PWB To LAN CN8 TPTX+ TPTXTPRX+ NC NC TPRXNC NC ST_LED 5V LK_LED 5V PJ1 VCC GND USB Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VBUS DD+ GND FG 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 34 33 36 35 38 37 40 39 CN2 MODEM_IN D-GND MCU_D6 MCU_D7 MCU_D4 MCU_D5 MCU_D2 MCU_D3 MCU_D0 MCU_D1 MCU_nCS /RD PB_DATA7 MCU_INT PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_ADDR7 PB_DATA0 PB_DATA5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_NCS1 PB_ADDR0 PB_NWE PB_NAE0 FAX_RST PB_NOE 24V MDM_IRQ VCC3 EN5V D-GND P-GND CN3 1 BT1 2 LT1 B02B-PH-K-S Speaker FAX Main PWB MJ2 1 BT1 2 LT1 3 TEL1 4 TEL2 5 LT2 6 BT2 To TEL Communication Line MJ1 1 NC 2 NC 3 L1 4 L2 5 NC 6 NC To TEL Communication Line CN1 5V DD+ GND FG CN9 NW Box PWB 2 3 1 2 AC adapter L N DHAI-0544QSPZ 1 2 CN3 1 L 3 N POWER SUPPLY PWB AR-NB2A Optional Model only 3. Signal name list Signal name (ADCLK) (AFE_DB0) (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB2) (AFE_DB3) (AFE_DB4) (AFE_DB5) (AFE_DB6) (AFE_DB7) (AFE_SCK) (AFE_SDI) (AFE_SEN) (BSAMP) (VSAMP) /BIAS /CPFS1 /CPFS2 /DMT_0 /DMT_1 /DMT_2 /DMT_3 /FAX_RST /GRIDL /LDEN /MC /MDM_IRQ /MMCLK /MMD /MPFS /PMD /POFF /PR Name AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE HV bias signal 1st CS pickup solenoid 2nd CS pickup solenoid DUP motor DUP motor DUP motor DUP motor FAX PWB reset signal HV grid signal Laser HV MC signal FAX PWB interrupt Main motor Main motor Multi bypass solenoid Polygon motor Low voltage power Heater lamp Function/Operation AFE control signal Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data AFE control signal AFE serial data AFE control signal AFE control signal AFE control signal HV bias drive DUP motor phase control DUP motor phase control DUP motor phase control DUP motor phase control Main charger grid control Laser circuit control signal Main charger control Clock signal to the polygon motor Polygon motor drive signal Polygon motor drive signal Output power control Power relay control AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 6 Section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Process section Paper transport section 2nd cassette section Duplex drive section Duplex drive section Duplex drive section Duplex drive section FAX optional section Process section LSU Process section FAX optional section Main drive section Main drive section Paper transport section LSU Power section Power section Signal name /RD /RRS /RSV_SOL /SFTMT0 /SFTMT1 /SFTMT2 /SFTMT3 /SPUS /SRVC /SYNC /TC /VFMCNT /VIDEO BZR CCD_PHI1 CCD_PHI2 CCD-CP CCD-RS CCD-TG CED1 CED2 DVSEL FANLK FW HLOUT KEYIN KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 LCDCON LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 LCDE LCDRS LEDPOD LEDPPD1 LEDPPD2 LEDSCOD LEDSPID LEDSPID LEDSPPD LEDSPPD LEDSRJD MCU_D0 MCU_D1 MCU_D2 MCU_D3 MCU_D4 MCU_D5 MCU_D6 MCU_D7 MCU_INT MCU_NCS MHPS MMLD MODEM_IN ONL OP_CLK OP-DATA OP-LATCH OUTAOUTA+ Name Control signal 1st transport solenoid Reverse solenoid Shifter motor Shifter motor Shifter motor Shifter motor Paper feed solenoid Reverse clutch Laser HV TC signal Fan speed signal Laser Buzzer signal CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD Machine cassette detection 2nd CS cassette detection Developing tank detection Fusing fan Low voltage power Heater lamp Key scan input Key scan output Key scan output Key scan output LCD control signal LCD data signal LCD data signal LCD data signal LCD data signal LCD control signal LCD control signal POD sensor power PPD sensor power PPD2 sensor power SCOD sensor power SPID sensor power SPID sensor power SPPD sensor power SPPD sensor power SRJD sensor power Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal MCU interrupt Control signal MHPS sensor Main motor FAX connection detection signal Online LED LED driver control LED driver control LED driver control Scanner motor Scanner motor Function/Operation MCU bus control signal Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor phase control Horizontal sync signal from the LSU Transfer charger grid control Fan rotation speed control Laser drive signal Buzzer CCD control signal CCD control signal CCD control signal CCD control signal CCD control signal Fan lock detection signal Zero cross detection Heater lamp control Key detection control Key scan output Key scan output Key scan output Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal Carriage HP detection Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal Scanner motor phase control Scanner motor phase control AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 7 Section FAX optional section Paper transport section RSPF section Shifter motor section Shifter motor section Shifter motor section Shifter motor section RSPF section RSPF section LSU Process section Optical section LSU Operation section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Paper transport section 2nd cassette section Developing section Optical section Power section Power section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Paper exit section Paper transport section Fusing section RSPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section Optical section Main drive section FAX optional section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Optical drive section Optical drive section Signal name OUTBOUTB+ PB_ADDR0 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR7 PB_DATA0 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA7 PB_NAE0 PB_NCS1 PB_NOE PB_NWE PD1 PD2 PMCLK_A PMRDY POD PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 PSL PSW RTH_IN SCOD SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 SHOLD SPID SPID SPMT_0 SPMT_0 SPMT_1 SPMT_1 SPMT_2 SPMT_2 SPMT_3 SPMT_3 SPPD SPPD SRJD STROBE TCS TMA_O TMA_O TMB_O TMB_O USB +D USB -D VCL VFMOUT Name Scanner motor Scanner motor Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Control signal Control signal Control signal Control signal PD SW sensor PD2 SW sensor Polygon motor Polygon motor POD sensor PPD sensor PPD2 sensor PPD3 sensor Power save LED Start button control Thermistor SCOD sensor Select signal Select signal Select signal Laser SPID sensor SPID sensor RSPF motor SPF motor RSPF motor SPF motor RSPF motor SPF motor RSPF motor SPF motor SPPD sensor SPPD sensor SRJD sensor LED driver control Toner sensor Toner motor Toner motor Toner motor Toner motor USB signal USB signal Copy lamp Fusing fan Function/Operation Scanner motor phase control Scanner motor phase control Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal 1st CS paper width sensor 2nd CS paper width detection Clock signal to the polygon motor Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal Paper transport detection Paper transport detection Paper transport detection 2nd CS paper transport detection Fusing section thermistor temperature detection RSPF cover open sensor HC151 select signal HC151 select signal HC151 select signal Laser APC signal RSPF UN paper entry sensor SPF UN paper entry sensor RSPF motor phase control SPF motor phase control RSPF motor phase control SPF motor phase control RSPF motor phase control SPF motor phase control RSPF motor phase control SPF motor phase control RSPF transport detection SPF transport detection RSPF paper exit sensor Toner quantity detection Toner motor phase control Toner motor phase control Toner motor phase control Toner motor phase control Copy lamp control Fan drive signal AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 8 Section Optical drive section Optical drive section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section Paper transport section 2nd cassette section LSU LSU Paper exit section Paper transport section Fusing section 2nd cassette section Operation section Operation section Fusing section RSPF section Operation section Operation section Operation section LSU RSPF section SPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section Operation section Developing section Toner motor drive section Toner motor drive section Toner motor drive section Toner motor drive section USB section USB section Scanner unit section Optical section A B C 0J 680J OPEN OPEN OPEN 15pF 15pF 0J 27pF 27pF R3(*2) C5(*5) C1(*6) CPU3.3 5 (2) /CS2 (3) /CS1 (3) /CS0 (8) PSL (2) /SCANSP (2) /SCANST (2) /TRANSST (5) PMCLK (4) SPFMT3 (4) SPFMT2/MIRCNT (4) SPFMT1 (4) SPFMT0 *R3,R4,C1, and C5 are temtative OPEN 22J R8(*4) 0J R6 TP255 N.M. R2 10u/16V C19 PSL TP2 + TP231 TP232 TP233 TP234 TP235 TP236 TP237 TP238 (3) RY/BY 33Jx4 BR21 VCC3 4 3 2 1 /CS3# /CS2# /CS1# /CS0# TP245 TP240 TP241 TP242 TP243 TP244 TP246 (8) ONL (4) (KEYIN2) (2) /PRINTST (2,3) /RD (3) /HWR (2) /LWR TP257 1 8 5 2 R18 /SCANSP# TP239 33J /MSU_ST1 /ES_PAGE 0J (1608) XIN/CLKIN XOUT SSCLK VSS CY25811SC VDD FRSEL S0 S1 IC1 L1 ZJSR5101-223(open) L11 7 6 4 3 C5 IC2 4 R12 R13 R14 ONL (KEYIN2) /ESSRDY RY/BY TP222 TP224 TP226 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 100J R8 R7 X1 HC-49U/S 19.6608MHz R4 /PRINTST /RD# /HWR# /LWR# *4 *3 *1 TP131 TP132 AVcc Vref P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6/DA0 P47/AN7/DA1 AVss Vss P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P14/PO12/TIOCA1 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0 MD0 MD1 MD2 PG0/CAS PG1/CS3 PG2/CS2 *5 TP256 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 *2 C1 *6 TP1 R9 TP218 R10 TP220 R11 R3 Spreading Range : +/- 1.2% 5 TP248 6 TP154 7 8 TP155 SPFMT3 SPFMT2/MIRCNT SPFMT1 SPFMT0 /SCANST /TRANSST C11 N.M. (4) (KEYIN1) (5) RTH (5) (TCS_AN) (4) (SIN1) (4) (SIN2) (4) (SIN3) TP253 0.1u C2 (4) SELIN3 (4) SELIN2 (4) SELIN1 N.M. R5 TP254 N.M. R1 VCC3 C14 N.M. R4(*1) 0.1u C20 33p C7 R7(*3) 0.1u C21 33p C8 C13 N.M. D 0.1u C22 C12 22pF 33p C9 C15 N.M. TP229 NOT mounted 0.1u C23 BR22 33Jx4 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 12p C6 C78 100p EXTAL XTAL HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321) TP156 TP157 TP158 TP159 A0 A1 A2 A3 mounted TP247 TP228 TP227 TP225 TP223 TP221 TP219 TP7 TP216 BR25 33Jx4 TP160 1 TP161 2 TP162 3 TP163 4 TP164 TP165 TP166 TP167 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 8 7 6 5 TP168 1 TP169 2 TP170 3 TP171 4 TP172 TP173 TP174 TP175 When IC1 is, 0.1u C24 8 BR23 7 33Jx4 6 5 1 2 3 4 MCU PWB (CPU section) (AR-203E/5420) 0.1u C25 BR24 8 7 33Jx4 6 5 BR26 8 7 33Jx4 6 5 1 2 3 4 TP176 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 9 A20 R16 33J TP230 CPUCLK(NC) TP217 EXTAL XTAL TP215 TP214 (2,4) /RESET1 /STBY TP213 NMI TP212 TP211 /WDTOVF TP210 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 P53/ADTRG P52/SCK2 Vss Vss P51/RxD2 P50/TxD2 PF0/BREQ PF1/BACK PF2/LCAS/ WAIT/BREQO PF3/LWR PF4/HWR PF5/RD PF6/AS VCC PF7/0 Vss EXTAL XTAL VCC STBY NMI RES WDTOVF P20/PO0/TIOCA3 P21/PO1/YICOB3 P22/PO2/TIOCC3 P23/PO3/TIOCD3 P24/PO4/TIOCA4 P25/PO5/TIOCB4 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P27/PO7/TIOCB5 P63/TEND1 P62/DREQ1 P61/TEND0/CS5 Vss Vss P60/DREQ0/CS4 Vss PG3/CS1 PG4/CS0 Vss NC VCC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 Vss PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 Vss PB4/A12 PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 Vss PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA7/A23/IRQ7 P67/CS7/IRQ3 P66/CS6/IRQ2 Vss Vss P65/IRQ1 P64/IRQ0 1 2 3 4 5 TP133 6 TP134 7 TP135 8 TP136 9 10 TP137 11 TP138 12 TP139 13 TP140 14 TP141 15 TP142 16 TP143 17 TP144 18 19 TP145 20 TP146 21 TP147 22 TP148 23 TP149 24 TP150 25 TP151 26 TP152 27 28 TP153 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 3 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 A[20..0] (2,3) TP252 TP249 TP251 TP250 TP261 TP178 TP177 H8S/2321 P35/SCK1 P34/SCK0 P33/RxD1 P32/RxD0 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0 VCC PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 Vss PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 Vss PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 VCC 3 CPU3.3 TP209 TP208 TP207 TP206 TP205 TP204 TP203 TP202 TP201 TP200 TP199 TP198 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 TP24 TP25 TP30 TP31 TP32 TP33 TP125 TP126 TP127 TP128 TP129 TP130 CCD_TG (SPPD) (PSW) ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC 1 2 3 4 TP6 TP8 TP9 TP10 /CS5 BR19 33Jx4 BR18 33Jx4 8 BR20 7 33Jx4 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 BR17 7 33Jx4 6 5 MCNT STROBE CRUMSCL CRUMSDTA DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3 MMCLK RESETOUT1 ARB_INT (2) (FW) (4) CPU_SYNC (2) mt_at_home# (4) CCD_TG (2,4) (SPPD) (7) (PSW) (7) TP182 TP181 TP180 TP179 TP190 TP189 TP188 TP187 TP186 TP185 TP184 TP183 TP194 TP193 TP192 TP191 TP195 TP196 TP197 MCNT (5) D_CONT (4) STROBE (4) CRUMSCL (12) CRUMSDTA (12) DMT0 (6) DMT1 (6) DMT2 (6) DMT3 (6) MMCLK (5) D3 D2 D1 D0 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D15 D14 D13 D12 2 2 100p 100p D[15..0] R19 10kJ C4 C3 (2,3) SCL RxD SDA TxD POFF DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3 10kJx4 BR1 1 2 3 4 10kJx4 BR14 RESETOUT1 8 7 6 5 VCC3 8 7 6 5 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 10kJx4 BR10 10kJx4 BR8 10kJx4 BR5 10kJx4 BR2 CT 3 4 R22 10kJ R21 33J C26 47p TP258 0.01uF C17 TP259 ASIC_RESET BU4212F GND 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 TP260 C18 N.M. VCC3 R20 100kJ Reset Circuit D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D11 D10 D9 D8 D15 D14 D13 D12 VDD VOUT IC3 10kJ(open) 10kJ 10kJ 10kJ (USB_IN) (4) SCL (3) RxD (9) SDA (3) TxD (9) POFF (2,5) 1 2 3 4 10kJx4 BR12 10kJx4 BR7 R245 R246 R247 R248 1 2 3 4 SPFMT3 4 SPFMT2/MIRCNT 3 SPFMT1 2 SPFMT0 1 RY/BY /ESSRDY (KEYIN2) TP263 MCNT /CS5 CRUMSCL /PRINTST /STBY NMI /WDTOVF TP262 C10 1uF 4 C16 0.1u 5 1 1 10kJx4 BR11 10kJx4 BR6 10kJx4 BR3 /ASIC_RST (2,4,12) /RESET0 (2,3,4) R421 STROBE 10kJx4 BR16 10kJx4 BR15 R17 R261 R262 R263 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 R249 R250 R251 R252 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 /ES_PAGE /MSU_ST1 RxD CRUMSDTA (SIN1) (SIN2) (SIN3) (KEYIN1) /TRANSST /SCANST /SCANSP# TP267 POFF TxD SDA SCL CPUCLK(NC) /RD# /HWR# /LWR# ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC CCD_TG /CS0# /CS1# /CS2# /CS3# VCC3 10kJ 10kJ 10kJ 10kJ 10kJ 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 N.M._10kJ 10kJ 2kJ 2kJ 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 1/12 A B C D 4. Circuit diagram A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420) A B C 33J 8 10kJx4 8 RAMDB11 7 RAMDB10 6 RAMDB9 5 RAMDB8 BR48 1 2 3 4 L10 VCC3 TP449 10kJx4 8 7 6 5 BR45 1 2 3 4 0J (1608) C74 N.M. R47 N.C. VCC X2 GND OUTPUT 1000p N.C. VCC X3 GND OUTPUT 5 SG8002DC(18.3856MHz) CLK_CONT1 8 SG8002DC(48.0000MHz) C76 0.1u CLK_CONT1 C264 MAD7 MAD6 MAD5 MAD4 MAD12 MAD11 MAD9 MAD8 (3) DQM1 (3) SDCKE 4 5 4 5 RAMDB11 RAMDB10 RAMDB9 RAMDB8 RAMDB15 RAMDB14 RAMDB13 RAMDB12 10kJx4 8 RAMDB3 7 RAMDB2 6 RAMDB1 5 RAMDB0 BR42 1 2 3 4 RAMDB15 RAMDB14 RAMDB13 RAMDB12 RAMDB3 RAMDB2 RAMDB1 RAMDB0 RAMDB7 RAMDB6 RAMDB5 RAMDB4 RAMDB7 RAMDB6 RAMDB5 RAMDB4 (3) /SDRAS (3) /SDCAS (3) /SDWDE (3) DQM0 C77 82p R53 C231 120p R363 1 2 3 4 BR34 1 2 3 4 BR35 1 2 3 4 BR36 33J MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2 MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 PFCLKIN (1,3) A[20..0] (1,3) D[15..0] 33J SFCLK48 1 2 3 4 BR37 TP435 1 TP436 2 TP437 3 TP438 4 BR40 TP439 1 TP440 2 TP441 3 TP442 4 BR41 TP443 1 TP444 2 TP445 3 TP446 4 BR44 TP429 1 TP430 2 TP447 3 TP448 4 BR47 TP414 1 TP415 2 TP416 3 TP417 4 BR49 TP418 1 TP419 2 TP420 3 TP421 4 BR50 RAM_CLK_OUT TP431 TP432 TP433 TP434 TP425 TP426 TP427 TP428 TP413 TP422 TP423 TP424 MAD10 (3) BANK1 (3) BANK0 (3) /SDCS TP409 TP410 TP411 TP412 (6) MM_PH_A (6) MM_AI0 (6) MM_AI1 (6) MM_PH_B (6) MM_BI0 (6) MM_BI1 (5) MM_Y3 (5) MM_Y2 (5) MM_Y1 MAD3 MAD2 MAD1 MAD0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2 MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 MM_AI0 (10) CL 33Jx4 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 33Jx4 33Jx4 TP399 82Jx4 33Jx4 33Jx4 33Jx4 33Jx4 8 7 6 TP374 5 TP375 33Jx4 8 7 6 5 33Jx4 8 7 6 5 47p 47p 47p 47p 47p N.M. 47p 47p N.M. 47p N.M. TP405 TP406 TP407 TP408 TP401 TP402 TP403 TP404 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 IC4 BR29 AFE_DB7 0Jx4 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB4 BR31 AFE_DB3 0Jx4 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB0 TP396 TP397 TP398 TP400 TP392 TP393 TP394 TP395 TP388 TP389 TP390 TP391 TP384 TP385 TP386 TP387 TP380 TP381 TP382 TP383 TP376 TP377 TP378 TP379 TP372 TP373 TP368 TP369 TP370 TP371 TP360 TP361 TP362 TP363 TP364 TP365 TP366 TP367 TP357 TP358 TP359 TP356 TP347 TP346 TP345 TP344 TP343 TP342 C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C56 C57 C58 10kJx4 8 7 6 5 (3) RAMDB[15..0] 10kJ 10kJ 10kJx4 8 7 6 5 AFE_DB7 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB4 10kJx4 AFE_DB3 8 AFE_DB2 7 AFE_DB1 6 AFE_DB0 5 10kJx4 10kJ AFE_SDI 8 7 6 5 BR33 1 2 3 4 R37 R38 VCC3 (3) MAD[12..0] 1 2 3 4 BR30 1 2 3 4 BR32 R36 VCC3 (4) AFE_DB[7..0] 0J (1608) L13 VCC3 (4) ADCLK (4) AFE_SEN (4) AFE_SCK AFE_SDI BR39 1 2 3 4 (3) SDCLK VCC3 (4) CCD_PHI2 (4) AFE_SDI (4) CCD_PHI1 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J GND(CORE) MM_Y3 MM_Y2 MM_Y1 VCC(CORE) MM_PH_B MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 MM_PH_A MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2 GND(AC) RAM_MAD3 RAM_MAD2 GND(CORE) RAM_MAD1 RAM_MAD0 RAM_MAD10 VCC(CORE) RAM_BANKS1 RAM_BANKS0 RAM_CS RAM_RAS RAM_CAS VCC(AC) RAM_WDE RAM_DQM0 GND(AC) RAM_DATA7 RAM_DATA6 RAM_DATA5 RAM_DATA4 GND(CORE) RAM_DATA3 RAM_DATA2 RAM_DATA1 RAM_DATA0 GND(AC) RAM_DATA15 RAM_DATA14 VCC(CORE) RAM_DATA13 RAM_DATA12 RAM_DATA11 RAM_DATA10 RAM_DATA9 RAM_DATA8 VCC(CORE) RAM_DQM1 RAM_CKE GND(AC) RAM_CLK_OUT GND(CORE) RAM_MAD12 RAM_MAD11 RAM_MAD9 VCC(CORE) RAM_MAD8 RAM_MAD7 VCC(AC) RAM_MAD6 RAM_MAD5 RAM_MAD4 GND(AC) CPUDATA15 CPUDATA14 CPUDATA13 CPUDATA12 CPUDATA11 CPUDATA10 CPUDATA9 CPUDATA8 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 R35 R33 R32 R31 R30 R29 33J TP348 TP349 TP350 TP351 TP352 TP353 TP354 TP355 4 D7 D6 D5 D4 D R27 D3 D2 D1 D0 TP341 TP268 (4) CCD_CP 33J 33J 33J A9 A8 A7 A6 R26 TP271 R25 R24 TP335 TP334 TP333 TP332 TP331 TP330 TP329 TP328 TP327 RAM_CLK_OUT A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 TP340 R34 BR28 4 3 2 1 JTG_TCK JTG_TMS JTG_TDI JTG_TDO /OUTCS R28 BR27 4 3 2 1 /INREQ /PCLPRO /FAXPRO /ESPRD /OUTACK 10KJ 10kJx4 5 6 7 8 10KJ 10kJx4 5 6 7 8 VCC3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 HG73C141HFV ASIC TP272 TP273 PFCLK CLKSW TP339 TP274 TP275 PFCLKOUT PFCLKIN (4) BSAMP TP269 MEM_INT (4) MIRCNT (1) CPU_SYNC TP276 SYNC# (4) CCD_RS 3 (4) VIDEO# /LEND (1,4) CCD_TG 33J R23 TP336 ARB_INT (1) TP277 TP278 (5) TP338 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (5) PTPULSE (4) VSAMP TP337 MCU PWB (Graphic_ASIC section) (AR-203E/5420) 4 (5) MMD (5) PMD (5) TC (5) GRIDL (5) MC (5) BIAS SFCLK48 /CS2 (1) C75 22000p C232 22000p (1,3,4) TP326 TP325 JTG_TDO JTG_TDI /RESET0 TP324 TP323 JTG_TMS JTG_TCK (1) /LWR /RD (1,3) /ASIC_RST (1,4,12) TP279 TP280 TP281 TP282 TP283 TP284 TP3 TP285 VFMCNT_12V (5) 0.1u C230 TP99 TP100 TP101 TP287 TP4 VFM_24V (5) 5 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 TP77 TP78 TP79 TP80 TP81 TP82 /INREQ /OUTCS /OUTACK /ESPRD /FAXPRO /PCLPRO TP83 TP84 TP85 MTAD15 MTAD14 MTAD13 TP86 TP87 TP88 MTAD12 MTAD11 MTAD10 TP89 TP90 TP91 MTAD9 MTAD8 MTAD7 TP92 TP93 TP94 MTAD6 MTAD5 MTAD4 TP95 TP96 TP97 TP98 MTAD3 MTAD2 MTAD1 MTAD0 MTAD12 MTAD13 MTAD14 MTAD15 MTAD8 MTAD9 MTAD10 MTAD11 MTAD4 MTAD5 MTAD6 MTAD7 MTAD0 MTAD1 MTAD2 MTAD3 1 1 1 1 1 1 TP106 TP107 TP108 TP109 TP110 TP111 PIDATA3 PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7 TP102 TP103 TP104 TP105 TP286 TP288 TP289 TP290 TP291 10kJx4 5 6 7 8 10kJx4 5 6 7 8 BR68 4 3 2 1 BR69 4 3 2 1 C256 N.M. R409 N.M._10KJ VCC3 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 10kJx4 5 6 7 8 BR66 4 3 2 1 /POREQ VCC(AC) /PIWT /PIACK GND(AC) /POACK /PIREQ GND(CORE) PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 VCC(CORE) /TRANSST /RECEPTST /PRINTST /SCANST RCV VPIN VMIN GND(CORE) VPOUT VMOUT OEN GND(AC) SUSPEND IE1284_PARAD0 IE1284_PARAD1 VCC(AC) IE1284_PARAD2 IE1284_PARAD3 IE1284_PARAD4 IE1284_PARAD5 IE1284_PARAD6 IE1284_PARAD7 IE1284_REV VCC(CORE) IE1284_FAULT IE1284_ACK IE1284_BUSY IE1284_PE GND(CORE) IE1284_SLCT IE1284_INIT IE1284_SLCTIN VCC(CORE) IE1284_AUTOFD IE1284_STB TSP_MODE TSO0 /SCANSP VCC(AC) OPE_CLK GND(AC) OPE_LATCH OPE_DATA TM /TM VCC(CORE) OUTP14B OUTP13B OUTP12B OUTP11B OUTP10B OUTP09B OUTP08B GND(CORE) OUTP07B OUTP06B OUTP05B 10kJx4 5 6 7 8 BR67 4 3 2 1 TP44 TP43 TP42 TP41 TP46 TP45 TP50 TP49 TP48 TP47 TP67 TP54 TP53 TP52 TP51 TP70 TP69 TP68 TP75 TP74 TP73 TP72 TP71 TP56 TP57 TP58 TP59 TP60 TP61 TP62 TP63 TP64 TP65 TP66 (1,4) /RESET1 33J 33J 33Jx4 BR60 33Jx4 BR61 R404 R403 33Jx4 BR62 33Jx4 BR63 1 1 2 TP451 HL (5) PR (5) CPFS2 (5) SPFON (4) MIRON (4) MPFS (5) OP_LATCH (4) OP_DATA (4) TM (4) TM_ (4) OP_CLK (4) /SCANSP (1) 1 2 3 4 TP5 TP34 TP35 TP36 (4) (/ASIC_RST) TP55 TP40 TP39 TP38 TP37 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 TP322 TP117 TP118 TP119 TP120 TP121 TP122 TP123 TP124 PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 TP76 TP115 TP116 /POACK /PIREQ TP113 TP114 BR71 1 2 3 4 BR70 1 2 3 4 TP112 PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7 PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 PIDATA3 G3.3V VCC3 2 1 PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 TP292 TP293 1 1 1 1 1 1 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 (5) RRS (5) LDEN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 N.M. N.M. R408 TP298 C257 47p 33J R407 TP303 TP302 TP301 TP300 /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB R406 TP307 TP306 TP305 TP304 R49 10kJ TP452 /OA_RST (13) R50 N.M. R45 N.M. VCC3 TP299 /INIT (13) /SLCTIN (13) /AUTOFD (13) /STB (13) /ACK (13) BUSY (13) PE (13) SLCT (13) /REV (13) /FAULT (13) R44 10kJ VCC3 TP309 TP308 /ACK BUSY PE SLCT TP313 TP312 TP311 TP310 PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 /REV FAULT TP317 TP316 TP315 TP314 10kJ R39 G3.3V PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 VCC3 10kJx4 8 7 6 5 10kJx4 8 7 6 5 VCC3 1 (1,5) POFF C79 47p 10J R52 SYNC# PFCLK R236 R51 10kJ R48 N.M. VCC3 (13) 33J R43 PARAD[7..0] 33J 33J 33J R40 R41 R42 N.M. TP450 RCV VPIN VMIN 47u/16V C37 (4) PFCLKOUT 10kJx4 8 7 6 5 BR54 1 2 3 4 /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB (/SYNC) 10kJx4 8 7 6 5 10kJx4 8 7 6 5 BR52 1 2 3 4 BR53 1 2 3 4 10kJx4 8 7 6 5 10kJx4 8 7 6 5 10kJx4 8 7 6 5 BR51 1 2 3 4 BR46 1 2 3 4 BR43 1 2 3 4 R253 R254 R255 R256 SUSPEND (11) VPOUT (11) VMOUT (11) OEN (11) /PRINTST (1) /SCANST (1) RCV (11) VPIN (11) VMIN (11) 10kJ 10kJ 10kJ 10kJ ZJSR5101-223 R375 N.M. R374 N.M. VCC3 VCC3 VCC3 VCC3 2/12 /TRANSST (1) L2 N.M. PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 RCV VPIN VMIN PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 CLK_CONT 1 + L12 MEM_INT CLKSW /POACK /PIREQ TP318 TP321 TP320 TP319 N.M. C70 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1u 0.1u C59 N.M. C71 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1u 0.1u C60 N.M. C72 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1u C27 0.1u 0.1u C28 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u C61 C38 C29 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u C62 C39 C30 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u C63 C40 C31 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u C41 C32 0.1u 0.1u C64 C42 C33 0.1u 0.1u C43 C34 0.1u C65 C44 C35 0.1u 0.1u C36 0.1u 0.1u C66 C45 0.1u C67 C46 0.1u C68 C47 0.1u C69 N.M. C73 CLPWM VCC(AC) AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 GND(AC) AFESCK VCC(CORE) ADCLK GND(CORE) AFE_SEN CCD_PH1 CCD_PH2 AFE_SDI CCD_CP BSAMP CCD_RS CCD_TG VSAMP GND(CORE) TD0 TDI TRSK TMS TCK VCC(CORE) /INREQ /OUTCS /OUTACK /ESPRD /FAXPRD /PCLPRD GND(AC) MDAT15 MDAT14 MDAT13 VCC(CORE) MDAT12 MDAT11 MDAT10 VCC(AC) MDAT09 MDAT08 MDAT07 GND(CORE) MDAT06 MDAT05 MDAT04 VCC(CORE) MDAT03 MDAT02 MDAT01 MDAT00 GND(AC) /INCS /INACK /OUTREQ GND(CORE) /HSYNC PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 VCC(AC) PIDATA3 PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7 /POCS CPU_DATA7 CPU_DATA6 CPU_DATA5 CPU_DATA4 VCC(AC) CPU_DATA3 CPU_DATA2 CPU_DATA1 CPU_DATA0 GND(AC) MIRCNT /CPUSYNC MEM_INT ARB_INT VCC(CORE) CPU_AD8 CPU_AD7 CPU_AD6 CPU_AD5 GND(CORE) RAM_CLK_IN CPU_AD4 CPU_AD3 CPU_AD2 CPU_AD1 CPU_AD0 /CPUCS SFCLK48 GND(CORE) /CPUWR /CPURD /RESET VCC(CORE) PFCLK CLKSW GND(CORE) PFCLKOUT PFCLKIN GND(PLL) VCC(PLL) GND(PLL) VCC(PLL) TM2_15M /SYNC GND(AC) /VIDEO /LEND VCC(AC) OUTP00A OUTP01A OUTP02A OUTP03A OUTP04A OUTP05A OUTP06A OUTP15A VCC(CORE) OUTP07A OUTP08A GND(CORE) OUTP09A OUTP10A OUTP11A OUTP12A OUTP13A VCC(CORE) OUTP14A OUTP00B GND(AC) OUTP01B OUTP02B OUTP03B OUTP04B VCC(AC) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 TP294 TP295 TP296 TP297 (5) MRPS1 (5) MRPS2 (5) MRPS3 (5) CPFS1 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 10 A B C D AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 11 A B C (1,2) D[15..0] (1,2) A[20..0] 5 (1) /CS1 (1,2) /RD (1) /HWR /RD /HWR (1) SCL (1) SDA A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 N.M. C235 D 5 28 12 1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 1kJ GND GND VDD VDD I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 C81 0.1u 9 25 8 24 6 7 10 11 22 23 26 27 8 7 6 5 VCC WC SCL SDA IC5 E0 E1 E2 VSS 1 2 3 4 0.1u C83 0.1u C84 VCC3 VCC3 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 24C02/24WC04/24WC08 VCC3 IS63LV1024L-12J-TR CS1 OE WE A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IC8 SRAM R58 VCC3 Serial EE-PROM R59 N.M. R56 10kJ VCC3 4 A17 A1 A19 A18 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 R69 (1,2,4) /RESET0 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A20 MCU PWB (Memory section) (AR-203E/5420) N.M. C236 10kJ OPEN 22000p 0.1u OPEN C86 C87 3 OPEN 0J OPEN R83 OPEN R86 OPEN OPEN (J1,J2 in the case of N.M.:0J) R82 A16 BYTE GND DQ15 DQ7 DQ14 DQ6 DQ13 DQ5 DQ12 DQ4 VCC DQ11 DQ3 DQ10 DQ2 DQ9 DQ1 DQ8 DQ0 OE GND CE A0 S29AL008D70TFI020# S29GL016A90TFIR20# Flash ROM A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A19 NC WE RP VPP WP RY/BY A18 A17 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 48 47 46 TP457 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 R66 10kJ 0.1u C87 A17 J1,J2 A1 1 2 3 VCC3 10kJ TP454 VPP /HWR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TP453 11 12 13 14 TP455 15 16 TP456 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 IC7 FLASH ROM LH28F800BJE-PBTL90(LHF80JZP) LH28F160BJE-BTL90(LHF16JT2) 0J VCC3 VPP VCC3 FlashROM VPP Controll 3 R81 IC7 0J (1) RY/BY R68 N.M. R64 N.M. R65 10kJ R63 N.M. R70 0.1u C85 N.M. C86 N.M. R62 4 N.M. C233 5 N.M. C234 /RD /CS0 (1) D11 D3 D10 D2 D9 D1 D8 D0 D15 D7 D14 D6 D13 D5 D12 D4 MAD10 MAD0 MAD1 MAD2 MAD3 (2) DQM0 (2) /SDWDE (2) /SDCAS (2) /SDRAS (2) /SDCS (2) BANK0 (2) BANK1 RAMDB7 RAMDB5 RAMDB6 RAMDB3 RAMDB4 RAMDB1 RAMDB2 RAMDB0 2 64Mb(1Mx16bitx4bank) C92 0.1u Vendor/Type C91 0.1u 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 TP458 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 K4S641632K-UC75 K4S281632I-UC60 C90 0.1u SDRAM (16bit x 4bank) VSS DQ15 VSSQ DQ14 DQ13 VCCQ DQ12 DQ11 VSSQ DQ10 DQ9 VCCQ DQ8 VSS NC UDQM CLK CLKE NC A11 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 VSS SDRAM VCC DQ0 VCCQ DQ1 DQ2 VSSQ DQ3 DQ4 VCCQ DQ5 DQ6 VSSQ DQ7 VCC LDQM WE CAS RAS CS BA0 BA1 A10 A0 A1 A2 A3 VCC C89 0.1u 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 IC6 128Mb(2Mx16bitx4bank) IC6 C88 0.1u VCC3 VCC3 2 C93 0.1u VCC3 C94 0.1u C82 N.M. DQM1 (2) SDCLK (2) SDCKE (2) RAMDB8 R67 RAMDB10 RAMDB9 RAMDB12 RAMDB11 RAMDB14 RAMDB13 RAMDB15 0J MAD12 MAD11 MAD9 MAD8 MAD7 MAD6 MAD5 MAD4 1 1 MAD[12..0] (2) RAMDB[15..0] (2) 3/12 A B C D AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 12 A B C D 5 (7) (PD1) (7) (PD2) (7) (SPID) (7) (FANLK) (7) (PPD2) (7) (PPD3) (5) THOPEN (7) (CED2) (7) DSWS (7) (MMLD) (8) (SELIN1) (8) (SELIN2) (8) (SELIN3) (7) (PPD1) (7) (POD) (7) (MFD) (7) (CED1) (7) (TCS) (7) (PMRDY) (7) DVS1 (7) (DRST) TP482 TP483 TP480 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 TP471 TP472 TP473 TP474 TP475 TP476 TP477 TP478 11 10 9 7 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 11 10 9 7 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 TP484 TP485 TP486 TP463 TP464 TP465 TP466 TP467 TP468 TP469 TP470 IC10 GND GND IC13 GND W Y VCC 74HC151 A B C G D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 W Y VCC 74HC151 A B C G D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 IC12 W Y VCC 74HC151 A B C G D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 5V 5V 8 5 TP491 6 TP492 16 8 5 TP489 6 TP490 16 8 5 TP487 6 TP488 16 5V Digital Input Multiprexer C104 33p C103 0.1u 10J 33p 0.1u TP495 C100 R86 10J C99 TP494 33p R80 C97 0.1u TP493 C96 10J R74 4 5V SIN2 SIN1 R85 10kJ SIN3 (8) FW (10) mt_at_home (9) /SYNC (1) SELIN1 (1) SELIN2 (1) SELIN3 (2) OP_CLK (2) OP_DATA (2) OP_LATCH (2) TM (2) TM_ (1) SPFMT0 (1) SPFMT1 (1) SPFMT2/MIRCNT (1) SPFMT3 (2) MIRON (2) SPFON (2) MIRCNT (1,2,12) /ASIC_RST (1) D_CONT (8) KEYIN1 (8) KEYIN2 (1,2,3) /RESET0 (11) USB_IN SIN1 SIN2 SIN3 (2) AFE_SDI (2) AFE_SEN (2) AFE_SCK R99 10kJ VCC3 3.3V 3.3V 100J TP500 TP501 5V/3.3V R15 0J R78 5V/3.3V /RESET# TP503 AFE_SDI TP496 5V/3.3V R81 10kJ MCU PWB (Driver section 1) (AR-203E/5420) 3.3V 0.1u(N.M.) C258 3 3 1 3 47p 1 C109 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 TP506 R98 N.M. 5V TP502 TP18 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 3 TP505 R97 10kJ 4 R128 10kJ 5 R96 10kJ IC9 VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 GND Y2 Y1 Vcc GND Y2 Y1 Vcc NC7WZ17 A2 A1 IC35 NC7WZ17 A2 A1 IC18 74VHCT244 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND IC15 74LCX244 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND IC14 74LCX244 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND IC11 74LCX244 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND 2 4 6 5 2 4 6 5 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 C98 0.1u 0.1u C107 C105 0.1u 0.1u R75 R76 R77 R79 0.01uF R87 R88 R89 R90 R91 R92 R93 R94 TP531 R100 TP533 R101 33J 4 3 2 1 33J N.M. (FW) (1) (6) (6) (6) (6) (2) (1) 2 (SELIN1) (8) (SELIN2) (8) (SELIN3) (8) (OP_CLK) (8) (OP_DATA) (8) (OP_LATCH) (8) (TM) (6) (TM_) (6) (SPFMT0) (SPFMT1) (SPFMT2) (SPFMT3) (10) AFE_DB#[7..0] (/ASIC_RST) (2) /RESET1 (1,2) (D_CONT) (11) (KEYIN1) (1) (KEYIN2) (1) mt_at_home# (/SYNC) TP528 TP529 TP530 N.M. C255 (USB_IN) (1) (SIN1) (1) (SIN2) (1) (SIN3) (1) AFE_SDI# (10) AFE_SEN# (10) AFE_SCK# (10) AFE_SDI# /RESET# AFE_SDI# R133 open C102 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33Jx4 BR55 3.3V 5 6 7 8 33J 33J 1kJ 33J AFE_SDI 33J 33J 33J C101 3.3V 3.3V TP520 TP521 TP522 TP523 TP524 TP525 TP526 TP527 5V TP516 TP517 TP518 TP519 3.3V C221 VCC3 0.1u C110 VCC3 5V TP513 TP514 TP515 3.3V TP497 R71 TP498 R72 TP499 R73 TP19 R130 0J TP507 TP508 TP509 TP510 TP511 VCC3 TP12 TP11 TP270 C95 0.1u VCC3 TP17 VCC3 2 (1) STROBE (2) VIDEO# (2) VSAMP (1,2) CCD_TG (2) CCD_RS (2) BSAMP (2) CCD_CP (2) CCD_PHI2 (2) CCD_PHI1 (2) ADCLK 3.3V 3.3V AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#6 AFE_DB#7 AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#3 AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#3 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#6 AFE_DB#7 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 0.1u C263 0.1u 2 3 5 1 2 3 5 1 0Jx4 BR65 0Jx4 BR64 5V 5V 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 4 TP542 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 VCC3 4 TP543 NC7ST08M5X IC45 R422 R95 1 5V 5V C262 0.1u C108 82p C124 82p C125 82p C126 N.M. C129 N.M. C130 82p C132 33p C133 82p R54 56J R57 56J R61 100J R83 47J VCC3 TP534 TP535 TP536 TP537 TP538 TP539 TP540 TP541 VCC3 NC7ST08M5X IC16 74LCX244(open) 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 74LCX244 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND IC44 C106 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 IC43 VCC3 1 100J 100J R46 56J R55 100J R60 56J R82 100J C80 0.1u TP544 CCD_TG# CCD_RS# CCD_CP# AFE_DB[7..0] (STROBE) (8) (2) VSAMP# (10) CCD_TG# (10) CCD_RS# (10) BSAMP# (10) CCD_CP# (10) CCD_PHI2# (10) CCD_PHI1# (10) ADCLK# (10) /VIDEO (9) CCD_PHI2# CCD_PHI1# ADCLK# BSAMP# VSAMP# VSAMP# CCD_TG# CCD_RS# BSAMP# CCD_CP# CCD_PHI2# CCD_PHI1# ADCLK# 4/12 A B C D A B C D (1) MMCLK (2) VFM_24V (2) VFMCNT_12V 5 6 7 8 R142 10kJ(open) R414 N.M._10kJ VCC3 Q14 5 KRC102S 2 R418 N.M._10kJ VCC3 1.5kJx4 8 7 6 5 R370 1.5kJ BR56 1 2 3 4 R138 10kJ 4 3 2 1 R419 N.M._10kJ (1) MCNT (2) MC (2) BIAS (2) TC (2) GRIDL BR72 10kJx4 3 TP549 TP545 TP546 TP547 TP548 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C COM Q16 R379 R380 Q17 /MMCLK (9) KRC102S 2 TP604 3 (2) MM_Y1 (2) MM_Y2 (2) MM_Y3 (2) PMD (1) PMCLK (2) LDEN (2) /LEND R116 10kJ R84 10kJ TP603 (2) PR R196 10kJ PGND TP554 TP555 TP556 TP557 TP558 TP559 TP560 /MC (8) /BIAS (8) /TC (8) /GRIDL (8) /MCNT (9) 3 N.M._1.5kJ N.M._1.5kJ 1.5kJx4 8 7 6 5 (2) MMD (2) MRPS1 (2) MRPS2 (2) MRPS3 (1,2) POFF (2) HL FTH 24V BR57 1 2 3 4 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 KRC102S 2 KID65001AF 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B E (2) CPFS1 (2) CPFS2 (2) MPFS (2) RRS PGND TP551 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IC19 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TP22 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C COM 100J 4 (S) (D) TP614 4.7kJ 1/4W R387 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 (G) 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC KID65503F 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G IC25 KID65503F 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G IC24 PGND R386 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Q21 RLS-73 D58 B 2 5V TP613 TP615 MMref0 (6) MMref1 (6) MMref2 (6) /PMD (9) PMCLK_A (9) /LDEN (9) Q11 2SK3018(open) 0J TP610 12V 2 3 3 1SS355 D5 TP611 INT5V R117 10kJ Q4 KRC102S Q3 KRA119S CRH01 D56 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM CP17 CRH01 D55 Q13 2SB1132 TP609 TP607 Q12 2SB1132 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM 24V 3 R109 PGND 3 SHOLD (9) HLOUT (8) R115 100J 1/4W TP612 TP562 N.M._47kJ R108 24V Q2 N.M._KTA1505S (2) PTPULSE /PR (8) D35 1SS355 /PR 3 N.M._4.7kJ 1/4W D34 1SS355 TP265 INT24V /VFMCNT (9) Q20 KRA119S R413 N.M._10kJ 2 CP16 5V 3 TP266 TP606 TP561 47kJ /MMD (9) MRPS_1 (6) MRPS_2 (6) MRPS_3 (6) /POFF (8) TP608 R389 B 47kJ D57 RLS-73 TP605 R388 R405 1 /CPFS1 (9) /CPFS2 (9) /MPFS (9) /RRS (9) KRC102S 2 D49 MTZ J22B TP21 24V PR# 4.7kJ 1/4W R194 KID65001AF 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B E IC21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 100J R195 E C 1 MCU PWB (Driver section 2) (AR-203E/5420) E PGND R144 47kJ 1SS355 TP29 1uF/16V C134 VFMOUT (9) TP264 D4 R146 1.5kF 1 3 3 2 1 5V 0J R364 VCC3 MA700 D1 R103 1MF TP27 VCC3 R153 100J 3 2 1 5V R365 0J KDS226(open) D46 R114 10kF TP622 R112 1.2kF R107 4.3kF R104 7.5kF R192 10kJ R191 4.7kJ 12V + - 3 2 12V + - 3 2 12V + - 5 6 2 3 12V - + TP624 12V + - 5 6 7 IC20B KIA393F IC22B KIA358F 7 12V R366 N.M. 22000p C115 R113 10kJ 10kJ R367 0.1u/50V C114 R110 300J 0.1u/50V TP621 C162 0.1u C111 12V VCC3 TP23 R105 1kJ TP623 5V 1 TP620 IC22A KIA358F 1 IC20A KIA393F 12V 1 IC17A KIA393F VCC3 Analog Tonner Sensor Buffer TP618 VCC3 C160 2.2uF/10V TP26 R155 470kJ VCC3 C112 22000p KDS226(open) D2 R106 10kF TP617 R102 1kF TP28 R129 N.M. 2 (12) TCS_AN (9) RTH_IN D33 1SS355 2 Q18 KRC102S 2 8 4 4 1 C 1 1 8 4 8 4 8 4 3 3 2 1 Q19 2SK3018 2 1 VCC3 0.1u C113 VCC3 (S) (D) 1 N.M. C237 KDS226(open) D47 R111 100J KDS226 D3 TP619 (G) R193 10kJ 1 + - 5 6 7 (TCS_AN) (1) THOPEN (4) TP479 KIA393F IC17B 5/12 RTH (1) FTH 12V PR# 8 4 5 8 4 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 13 A B C D A B C D 4 5 (SPFMT0) (SPFMT2) (SPFMT1) (SPFMT3) (5) MRPS_1 (5) MRPS_2 (5) MRPS_3 (4) (4) (4) (4) (5) MMref0 (5) MMref1 (5) MMref2 (9) OUT_A(9) OUT_A+ (9) OUT_B+ (9) OUT_B- R125 2kJ TP595 TP596 TP597 R134 300J TP588 TP589 TP590 R126 1kJ R135 620J R136 1.2kJ 10kJx4 BR59 R127 510J 0.1u PGND C131 R131 1.2kJ PGND 5V PGND C118 820p TP587 (2) MM_BI0 (2) MM_BI1 (2) MM_PH_B TP586 R121 1.5kJ PGND C120 0.1u R137 100J 5V C117 820p R122 1kJ PGND 0.68J 1W R119 PGND R123 30kJ TP591 PGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VS SENSE 1 COMP 1 OUT 1B I01 GND GND I11 PHASE 1 VREF 1 RC 1 VSS 5V 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 PGND 4 R141 1J 2W PGND R132 1J 2W 14 5 6 9 8 7 11 12 GND OUT A OUT A OUT A/ OUT A/ OUT B OUT B OUT B/ OUT B/ STA7100M Sense B Sense A Sync REF IN A IN A/ IN B IN B/ IC28 Vs R124 30kJ 5V SPF Motor Driver PGND C121 0.1u L6219DS OUT 1A OUT 2A SENSE 2 COMP 2 OUT 2B GND GND I02 I12 PHASE 2 VREF 2 RC 2 IC27 TP594 24VSCMT Scanner Motor Driver MCU PWB (Driver section 3) (AR-203E/5420) 5 4 3 2 1 5 6 7 8 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 14 10 1 2 3 4 17 18 15 16 13 PGND 24VSPFMT C119 820p TP592 MM_AI1 (2) MM_PH_A (2) MM_AI0 (2) TP593 R120 1.5kJ PGND SPMT_3 (9) SPMT_1 (9) SPMT_2 (9) SPMT_0 (9) C116 820p 0.68J 1W R118 C122 47u/35V 3 PGND + 24V 3 C123 0.1u/50V (4) (TM_) (4) (TM) 24VDupMT CP3 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM 24VSPFMT CP2 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM 24VSCMT CP1 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM 2 (1) DMT3 (1) DMT2 (1) DMT1 (1) DMT0 2 0.1u C222 O4 O3 O2 O1 COM COM TD62064AF GND GND I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC IC26 1 8 16 9 7 2 5V 5 1 9 2 Vref Vs N.C OUT2 OUT1 TA7291AS GND IN2 IN1 Vcc IC29 4 3 7 8 6 Tonner Motor Driver PGND 17 18 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 Duplex Motor Driver R244 4.7kJ + 24VDupMT C127 10u/35V MTZ J22B D6 /DMT3 (9) /DMT2 (9) /DMT1 (9) /DMT0 (9) 1 24V For AL2040 Model Only 1 TMB_O (9) TMA_O (9) 0.1u/50V C128 6/12 A B C D AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 15 A B C D C145 N.M. C152 0.1u C144 N.M. C151 0.1u (8) 12VIN N.M. 0.1u 1 0J (1608) 47u/35V 5 22u/16V C181 47u/25V C177 L4 ZJSR5101-223(open) L14 1000p 1000p C169 C224 C223 TP14 0.1u + 1 1000p C225 TP15 R242 10J 0.1u C156 0.1u C149 N.M. C140 + + PGND C155 N.M. C148 N.M. C139 TP13 1 0.1u C154 N.M. C147 0.1u C138 R241 10J 0.1u C153 N.M. C146 0.1u C137 R240 10J VCC3 C136 C135 0.1u C183 0.1u C179 R398 100kJ 5V 100kJ R396 1000p C226 TP16 24V N.M. C159 N.M. C143 12V R394 100kJ 0.1u C158 N.M. C142 R243 10J 0.1u/50V C170 1 0.1u C157 0.1u C150 N.M. C141 VCC3 4 22u/16V C182 47u/35V C175 R172 100J 2W (8) 3.3VIN INT24V + 1SS355 IN 0.1u C184 22u/16V C178 0.22J 2W R143 3 R397 100kJ EN5V + 0.1u 2 1 0.1u C180 0.1u C176 KDS226 C168 3 D13 D11 1SS355 2 KIA7805 GND OUT D20 1SS355 R163 2.7kJ R162 20kJ TP585 IC30 N.M. 1 PGND D12 L5 ZJSR5101-223 L15 + R161 20kJ (9) 24V1(DSWS) MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section) (AR-203E/5420) 4 5V R399 100kJ VCC3 INT5V PGND R152 1kJ 2W INT24V DSWS (4) 3 3 (9) SPID PPD1 PPD2 SPPD PSW (9) CED1 (9) CED2 (8) DRST (9) (9) (9) (8) (12) DVSEL (12) TCS (9) MFD (9) MMLD (9) FANLK (9) POD (9) PMRDY (9) PPD3 (9) PD1 (9) PD2 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 KDS226 D27 KDS226 D23 KDS226 D21 KDS226 D18 KDS226 D14 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 KDS226 D28 KDS226 D24 KDS226 D22 KDS226 D19 KDS226 D15 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 KDS226 D50 KDS226 D16 KDS226 KDS226 D25 2 1 2 1 2 1 D9 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 1000p 2 C186 1000p 1000p C187 R175 7.5kJ 1000p R174 15kJ C172 R165 10kJ 1000p 3 3 C171 R164 10kJ KDS226 D17 KDS226 D10 C185 R173 15kJ 2 1000p C188 R176 7.5kJ 1000p C173 R166 15kJ R167 10kJ 1000p C161 R145 15kJ R177 7.5kJ D51 5 ZENER_UDZS4.7B(open) 2 1 VCC3 2 KDS226 D29 KDS226 D26 D52 1 3 3 1000p 1000p C248 R377 10kJ C164 1000p R148 10kJ C163 R147 4.7kJ ZENER_UDZS4.7B(open) 1000p C189 R178 12kJ 1000p C166 R150 15kJ 1000p C190 R184 R185 R186 R180 R181 R182 R183 R179 3.3kJ VCC3 R168 R169 R170 R171 R378 1000p C165 R149 10kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1000p C167 R151 10kJ 1 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ R159 R160 (4) (4) (1) (1) (POD) (4) (PMRDY) (4) (PPD3) (4) (PD1) (4) (PD2) (4) (SPID) (4) 7/12 (CED1) (4) (CED2) (4) (DRST) (4) (PPD1) (PPD2) (SPPD) (PSW) DVS1 (4) (TCS) (4) (MFD) (4) (MMLD) (4) (FANLK) (4) 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ R156 R157 R158 R154 1 A B C D AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 16 A B C D EN5V 5V (7) 12VIN (4) FW (5) /PR (5) /BIAS (5) /GRIDL 5 INT5V PGND INT24V PGND R400 N.M._1608size PGND 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 B24B-PNDZS-1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 CN1 To Power unit 4 HLOUT (5) /POFF (5) 24V 3.3VIN (7) /TC (5) /MC (5) (1) ONL 2 Q6 KRC106S 3 3 (4) KEYIN2 (4) KEYIN1 (1) PSL Q5 KRC106S R189 R190 2 1 1kJ 1kJ 3 5V 2 1 KDS226 D30 3 2 1 3 EN5V KDS226 D31 (4) (OP_DATA) (4) (OP_LATCH) (4) (SELIN2) (4) (OP_CLK) (4) (SELIN1) (4) (STROBE) (4) (SELIN3) (7) PSW (7) DRST 2 1000p C195 5V 2 1000p 1000p KEYIN2# KEYIN1# C192 R188 10kJ C191 R187 10kJ KEYIN1# KEYIN2# To Operational PWB CP7 MCU PWB (Connector section 1) (AR-203E/5420) 3 CP8 4 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM 5 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM 1 N.M._1608size 0.1u/50V C194 C193 IMSA-9619S-18A 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CN2 1 1 8/12 A B C D AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 17 A B C PGND 24V 5 (White) B2P-VH 1 2 CN23 24V PGND PGND R206 PGND 1kJ (Red) B2P-VH-R 1 2 CN15 (White) B4B-PH-K-S 1 2 3 4 CN11 B5B-PASK-1 1 2 3 4 5 CN6 3 KDS226 D42 2 1 5V INT5V B08B-CZHK-B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CN42 To Interlock switch To Fan motor To Main motor To Polygon motor (5) /LDEN (4) /VIDEO (5) SHOLD B05B-CZHK-B 1 2 3 4 5 1000p 1000p (4) /SYNC C201 C200 CN41 1000p 1000p To Toner motor (6) TMA_O (6) TMB_O (5) /PMD (7) PMRDY (5) PMCLK_A To LD (7) 24V1(DSWS) (5) VFMOUT (7) FANLK (5) /VFMCNT C199 C198 0.1u/50V C205 (5) /MMD (7) MMLD (5) /MMCLK 0.1u/50V C206 D 4 24V /DMT0 /DMT1 /DMT2 /DMT3 (7) PD1 (White) N.M._B4B-PH-K-S 1 2 3 4 CN17 (Green) B3B-PH-K-M 1 2 3 CN25 To Duplex motor (For debug) B05B-XASK-1 1 2 3 4 5 To Paper detect (Red) B4B-PH-K-R 1 2 3 4 CN4 3 (7) MFD R208 200J 1/4W (5) RTH_IN (7) PPD2 (7) POD (7) PPD1 (5) /RRS (5) /MPFS To Cassette paper solenoid To Cassette detect To Mirror motor (6) OUT_A+ (6) OUT_B+ (6) OUT_A(6) OUT_B- (1) RxD (1) TxD VCC3 CPU Serial Not mounted (6) (6) (6) (6) CN13 (White) B3B-PH-K-S 1 2 3 CN10 (Black) B3B-PH-K-K 1 2 3 CN7 24VDupMT For AL2040 Model Only (5) /CPFS1 (7) CED1 5V 24V 5V 5V 5V 24V (Red) B5B-PH-K-R 1 2 3 4 5 CN26 (White) B5B-PH-K-S 1 2 3 4 5 CN22 R205 200J 1/4W (White) B3B-PH-K-S 1 2 3 CN19 R204 200J 1/4W (Red) B3B-PH-K-R 1 2 3 CN16 R203 200J 1/4W (Blue) B3B-PH-K-E 1 2 3 CN12 To Multi unit To HL unit To Paper out detect 2 To Resist roller solenoid (Red) N.M._B03B-PH-K-R 3 2 1 CN28 To Paper pass detect (5) /MCNT 24V To Mecha. COUNTER (7) PD2 (7) CED2 (7) PPD3 (5) /CPFS2 SPMT_0 SPMT_2 SPMT_1 SPMT_3 (7) SPID (7) SPPD (6) (6) (6) (6) PGND 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 5V 24VSPFMT 24V 5V 5V To SPF unit B14B-PHDSS-B 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 CN18 To 2nd. cassette 1000p C202 INT24V 1000p C203 MCU PWB (Connector section 2) (AR-203E/5420) 1000p C204 2 R207 3 200J 1/4W 1 9/12 For AL2040 Model Only 5V 24V 1 N.M. PGND B12B-PH-K-S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CN24 C246 4 R140 N.M._1608size 5 200J 1/4W C247 A B C D AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 18 4 0.1u/50V C209 R210 15kJ VCL 3 (4) mt_at_home R213 1kJ 1000p C211 R211 12kJ VCC3 2 1 KDS226 D43 3 (4) AFE_DB#[7..0] (4) AFE_SCK# (4) ADCLK# (4) CCD_PHI1# (4) CCD_PHI2# (4) CCD_CP# (4) CCD_RS# (4) CCD_TG# CP9 2 VCL AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#6 PGND 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#3 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#6 AFE_DB#7 FF4-32-S15D5 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 CN3 PGND EN5V VCL 1 VSAMP# (4) AFE_SDI# (4) BSAMP# (4) AFE_SEN# (4) AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#7 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#3 CP10 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM C D A PGND Q8 KTC3198 47u/35V + C208 CP6 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM 12V To Scanner unit 10/12 1 A R215 56kJ D44 11EQS06 TWKA-221K L6 220uH 2 B 5 R214 15kJ 33p + R209 910J Q9 2SJ537 3 B C (2) CL C210 C207 47u/35V 24V Copy Lamp Inverter R212 D 4 MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section) (AR-203E/5420) 5 5.6kJ 1/4W AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 19 A B C D 4 5 (2) SUSPEND (2) RCV (2) VPIN (2) VMIN (2) VPOUT (2) VMOUT (2) OEN (4) (D_CONT) (4) USB_IN N.M. N.M. N.M. C216 C217 C215 R221 R223 R224 33J 33J 33J 4 TP563 TP564 TP565 VCC3 6 3 4 5 2 9 12 13 VCC GND NC D+ D- MODE USB1T20 SUSPEND RCV VP VM OE# SPEED VPO VMO/FSEO IC31 7 8 TP566 0.1u C214 R219 1 TP567 11 10 R420 14 VCC3 MCU PWB (USB2.0 (FULL) I/F section) (AR-203E only) 5 TP568 TP569 N.M. N.M. R220 R222 24J 24J 3 1.5kJ R218 R216 3 24J 10kJ R217 TP570 TP571 100p C212 BLM18BB121SN1D BLM18BB121SN1D ZENER_6.2V D45 L8 L7 2 0.1u C213 2 L16 0J (1608) L9 0J (1608) F.G CN33 1 UBS21-4K2J00(ACON) Shield +5V DD+ GND D32 HZM6.2Z4MWA(open) 1 2 3 4 11/12 1 A B C D AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 20 A B C D 4 (1) CRUMSCL (1,2,4) /ASIC_RST (1) CRUMSDTA 5 R231 0J 3.3V 3.3V TP572 R139 1kJ 4 1 0.1u C220 R232 10kJ(open) R225 N.M. VCC3 GND B Vcc 3 2 5 N.M. 2 3 5 1 EN5V 4 5V C218 0.1u EN5V NC7ST08M5X(open) IC34 TC7SBD385AFU(open) OE A IC32 R376 4 TP574 TP573 R226 10kJ (CRUMSCL) (CRUMSDTA) 5V MCU PWB (CRUM I/F section) (AR-203E/5420) 5 (5) TCS_AN (7) TCS (7) DVSEL TP575 TP576 R368 R369 3 N.M. 0J 3 24V 24V 2 4 6 8 10 R200 10J PGND (White) 2 1 KDS226 D39 0J (1608) FB4 0J (1608) FB3 0J (1608) FB2 0J (1608) FB1 EN5V N.M._B10B-PHDSS-B 1 3 5 7 9 CN9 (Red) B4B-PH-K-R 1 2 3 4 CN5 3 2 1 3 F-GND 4 F-GND 3 F-GND 2 N.M._300J N.M._300J R201 R202 2 (CRUMSDTA) (CRUMSCL) To DV Unit with CRUM (Analog Tonner Sensor) F-GND 1 KDS226 D40 To DV Unit (Analog Tonner Sensor) 2 1 1 12/12 A B C D 1 2 (6) CPU3.3 LCDCONT 33J (8) (9) TP109 (3) (2) (4) (4) A C11 NM TP724 33P R25 5 6 7 8 C9 33P C19 10U/10V<2012> L1 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA FB1 0J <1608> SPFMT3 SPFMT2 SPFMT1 SPFMT0 /RES_USB20 /SCANSP /SCANST /TRANSST /ES_PAGE PROTECT /RES_OA982 /RES_IOASIC /RES_GASIC (PSFANLK) /ES_PAGE /CSIOASIC /CSGASIC /CSSRAM /CSFROM (2) /SCANSP (2) /SCANST (2) /TRANSST (6) PMCLK (5) SPFMT3 (5) SPFMT2/MIRCNT (5) SPFMT1 (5) SPFMT0 (10) /RES_USB20 R51 RTH (TCS_AN) 0.1U C20 (2,5) VIDEO# (6) (6) /RES_OA982 /RES_IOASIC /RES_GASIC 0.1U C21 3 (9) (3) (2) 0.1U C22 NM 0J NM 0.1U C2 VCC3 33JX4 BR20 33J (9) (9) (9) (4) TP2 4 3 2 1 /CS3# /CS2# /CS1# /CS0# ES_STS ES_CMD /ES_SRDY RY/BY TP729 TP734 TP735 R7 R6 TP4 R2 NM TP3 R1 7 6 4 3 VCC3 TP79 TP80 TP74 TP76 TP78 TP62 TP64 TP66 TP68 TP70 TP56 TP40 TP42 TP44 TP46 TP48 TP49 TP51 TP53 ES_STS ES_CMD /ES_SRDY RY/BY R16 R17 R18 R13 R14 R15 XIN/CLKIN XOUT SSCLK VSS B 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 IC2 33J 33J 33J TP6 TP5 TP1 1 8 5 2 R20 /PRINTST /RD# /HWR# /LWR# R3 0J 15PF C1 15PF 330J C5 AVcc Vref P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6/DA0 P47/AN7/DA1 AVss Vss P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P14/PO12/TIOCA1 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0 MD0 MD1 MD2 PG0/CAS PG1/CS3 PG2/CS2 33J 33J 100J CY25811SC VDD FRSEL S0 S1 IC1 TP8 TP9 (2) /PRINTST (2,3,4,5) /RD (3,4) /HWR (2) /LWR 0.1U C23 TP81 TP82 TP83 TP84 BR21 8 7 33JX4 6 5 1 2 3 4 4 0.1U C24 R384 R12 R8 X1 AT-49 19.6608MHz R4 33J 22J 12P CPUCLK# /RESET1 EXTAL NM C6 XTAL NM HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321) BR24 8 7 33JX4 6 5 33P MCU PWB (CPU section) (AR-M200/M201) 0.1U C25 TP10 TP11 TP12 TP13 TP14 TP15 TP16 TP17 A0 A1 A2 A3 C12 22P CPUCLK TP19 C70 NM /STBY NMI 1 2 3 4 C14 NM EXTAL XTAL TP20 TP21 B A20 TP85 TP86 TP87 TP88 TP89 TP90 TP91 TP92 BR22 8 7 33JX4 6 5 1 2 3 4 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 TP101 TP102 TP103 33J TP93 TP94 TP95 TP96 TP97 TP98 TP99 TP100 BR23 8 7 33JX4 6 5 BR25 8 7 33JX4 6 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 21 R50 C8 C15 NM /WDTOVF TP22 TP23 TP24 TP25 TP26 TP27 TP28 TP29 TP30 TP31 TP32 TP33 TP34 TP35 TP36 TP105 TP106 C7 C13 NM TP37 C P60 A[20..0] H8S/2321 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 /CS5# P35/SCK1 P34/SCK0 P33/RxD1 P32/RxD0 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0 VCC PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 Vss PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 Vss PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 VCC C (3) (5) 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 P53/ADTRG P52/SCK2 Vss Vss P51/RxD2 P50/TxD2 PF0/BREQ PF1/BACK PF2/LCAS/ WAIT/BREQO PF3/LWR PF4/HWR PF5/RD PF6/AS VCC PF7/0 Vss EXTAL XTAL VCC STBY NMI RES WDTOVF P20/PO0/TIOCA3 P21/PO1/YICOB3 P22/PO2/TIOCC3 P23/PO3/TIOCD3 P24/PO4/TIOCA4 P25/PO5/TIOCB4 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P27/PO7/TIOCB5 P63/TEND1 P62/DREQ1 P61/TEND0/CS5 Vss Vss P60/DREQ0/CS4 Vss PG3/CS1 PG4/CS0 Vss NC VCC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 Vss PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 Vss PB4/A12 PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 Vss PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA7/A23/IRQ7 P67/CS7/IRQ3 P66/CS6/IRQ2 Vss Vss P65/IRQ1 P64/IRQ0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 TP107 TP108 (2,3,4) TP72 TP73 TP75 TP77 TP57 TP59 TP61 TP63 TP65 TP67 TP69 TP71 TP50 TP52 TP54 TP55 TP47 TP41 TP43 TP38 CPU3.3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 CCD_TG (SPPD) (PSW) /RES_NIC 33J 33J 1KJ ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC R78 R364 R22 DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 BR18 8 7 33JX4 6 5 (2) (5,9) (2) (5) (2,5) (8) (8) 8 BR19 7 33JX4 6 5 8 BR17 7 33JX4 6 5 DMT0 (7) DMT1 (7) DMT2 (7) DMT3 (7) MMCLK (6) RESETOUT1 (5) /RES_NIC (15) BZR (11) CRUMSCL (16) CRUMSDA (16) /CS5 (13) ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC mt_at_home# CCD_TG (SPPD) (PSW) 8 BR16 7 33JX4 6 5 C369 NM C10 NM A D3 D2 D1 D0 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D15 D14 D13 D12 RSV_IN0 D SCL RxD SDA TXD POFF D D[15..0] SCL RxD SDA TxD POFF 100P 100P TP7 C4 C3 (2,3,4,13) (4) (12) (4) (12) (6) SPFMT0 SPFMT1 SPFMT2 SPFMT3 DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3 /CS5# 10KJX4 BR12 10KJX4 BR11 /RES_FAX 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 8 7 6 5 R95 R132 R131 R94 R66 R26 /RES_NIC /RES_FAX D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D11 D10 D9 D8 D15 D14 D13 D12 /RES_OA982 /RES_GASIC /RES_IOASIC /RES_USB20 /RES_FAX (13) 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 10KJ 10KJX4 BR6 R392 1 2 3 4 R11 /ES_SRDY ES_CMD ES_STS R5 R9 10KJX4 BR1 P60 1 2 3 4 /PRINTST /ES_PAGE /STBY NMI /WDTOVF 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 NM_10KJX4 BR9 NM_10KJX4 BR7 10KJX4 BR4 10KJX4 BR2 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 E E 10KJX4 BR5 10KJX4 BR3 R24 R53 R52 CRUMSDA 10KJX4 BR13 RxD TxD 1 2 3 4 R21 R23 /SCANSP /TRANSST /SCANST RY/BY R19 10KJX4 BR10 SDA SCL 4 3 2 1 R67 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 POFF CPUCLK /RD# /HWR# /LWR# CCD_TG ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC /CS0# /CS1# /CS2# /CS3# 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 8 7 6 5 2KJ 2KJ 10KJ 5 6 7 8 10KJ 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 1/16 VCC3 1 2 3 4 B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201) VCC3 1 (4) 2 3 4 CCD_CP AFE_SEN ADCLK AFE_SCK (5) (5) (5) (5) 10KJX4 8 RAMDB11 7 RAMDB10 6 RAMDB9 5 RAMDB8 BR53 1 2 3 4 PFCLKIN PFCLKOUT TP720 R68 R70 10KJX4 8 RAMDB15 7 RAMDB14 6 RAMDB13 5 RAMDB12 BR49 1 2 3 4 TP719 10KJX4 8 RAMDB3 7 RAMDB2 6 RAMDB1 5 RAMDB0 BR45 1 2 3 4 SDCLK 10KJX4 8 RAMDB7 7 RAMDB6 6 RAMDB5 5 RAMDB4 RAMDB[15..0] MAD[12..0] 0J 0J C74 NM R59 33J NM 10KJ 10KJ 10KJX4 8 7 6 5 C351 BR34 1 2 3 4 R45 R46 VCC3 AFE_SDI AFE_DB7 8 AFE_DB6 7 AFE_DB5 6 AFE_DB4 5 10KJX4 AFE_DB3 8 AFE_DB2 7 AFE_DB1 6 AFE_DB0 5 10KJX4 10KJ AFE_SDI BR41 1 2 3 4 (4) (4) 1 2 3 4 BR31 1 2 3 4 BR33 R42 VCC3 (14) AFE_DB[7..0] CCD_PHI2 CCD_PHI1 (5) AFE_SDI BSAMP (5) (5) CCD_RS (5) TP866 TP867 TP868 TP869 RAMDB11 RAMDB10 RAMDB9 RAMDB8 TP826 TP827 TP828 TP829 TP822 TP823 TP824 TP825 A C108 12P C107 10P X5 AT-49(18.3856MHz) MAD7 MAD6 MAD5 MAD4 MAD12 MAD11 MAD9 MAD8 TP862 TP863 TP864 TP865 RAMDB15 RAMDB14 RAMDB13 RAMDB12 DQM1 SDCKE TP858 TP859 TP860 TP861 RAMDB3 RAMDB2 RAMDB1 RAMDB0 (4) (4) TP854 TP855 TP856 TP857 /SDRAS /SDCAS /SDWDE DQM0 (4) (4) (4) (4) RAMDB7 RAMDB6 RAMDB5 RAMDB4 BANK1 BANK0 /SDCS (4) (4) (4) TP821 MAD10 1 2 3 4 BR36 1 2 3 4 BR37 1 2 3 4 BR38 (1,3,4,13) D[15..0] 1 2 3 4 BR39 1 2 3 4 BR42 1 2 3 4 BR44 1 2 3 4 BR48 1 2 3 4 BR51 1 2 3 4 BR54 1 2 3 4 BR56 RAM_CLK_OUT MM_PH_A MM_AI0 MM_AI1 (7) (7) (7) TP817 TP818 TP819 TP820 MM_PH_B MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_Y3 MM_Y2 MM_Y1 (7) (7) (7) (6) (6) (6) MAD3 MAD2 MAD1 MAD0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2 MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 MM_AI0 CL 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 33JX4 33JX4 82JX4 33JX4 33JX4 33JX4 33JX4 33JX4 33JX4 33JX4 MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2 MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P NM 47P 47P NM 47P NM (14) TP848 TP847 TP846 TP845 C80 47P SYNC# TP746 TP238 TP239 TP241 TP233 TP235 TP228 TP229 TP231 TP225 TP220 TP222 TP209 TP211 TP213 TP214 TP216 TP218 TP205 TP206 TP196 TP198 TP200 TP202 TP188 TP190 TP192 TP193 TP184 TP186 TP174 TP176 TP178 TP180 TP181 TP167 TP169 TP171 TP163 TP165 TP147 TP149 TP151 TP152 TP154 TP156 TP158 TP160 TP142 TP143 TP145 BR32 10J R69 8 33JX4 7 6 5 8 33JX4 7 6 5 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J (1,3,4) B (5) MIRCNT CPU_SYNC ARB_INT (/SYNC) (5) (1) (1) GND(CORE) MM_Y3 MM_Y2 MM_Y1 VCC(CORE) MM_PH_B MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 MM_PH_A MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2 GND(AC) RAM_MAD3 RAM_MAD2 GND(CORE) RAM_MAD1 RAM_MAD0 RAM_MAD10 VCC(CORE) RAM_BANKS1 RAM_BANKS0 RAM_CS RAM_RAS RAM_CAS VCC(AC) RAM_WDE RAM_DQM0 GND(AC) RAM_DATA7 RAM_DATA6 RAM_DATA5 RAM_DATA4 GND(CORE) RAM_DATA3 RAM_DATA2 RAM_DATA1 RAM_DATA0 GND(AC) RAM_DATA15 RAM_DATA14 VCC(CORE) RAM_DATA13 RAM_DATA12 RAM_DATA11 RAM_DATA10 RAM_DATA9 RAM_DATA8 VCC(CORE) RAM_DQM1 RAM_CKE GND(AC) RAM_CLK_OUT GND(CORE) RAM_MAD12 RAM_MAD11 RAM_MAD9 VCC(CORE) RAM_MAD8 RAM_MAD7 VCC(AC) RAM_MAD6 RAM_MAD5 RAM_MAD4 GND(AC) CPUDATA15 CPUDATA14 CPUDATA13 CPUDATA12 CPUDATA11 CPUDATA10 CPUDATA9 CPUDATA8 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 TP747 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 IC4 TP844 TP843 TP842 TP841 R41 TP877 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB0 R39 TP876 AFE_DB7 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB4 R38 TP836 C58 C59 C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66 C67 C68 R37 TP873 BR30 R36 TP875 R34 TP874 R35 R33 TP835 TP834 R32 D7 D6 D5 D4 (5) R31 TP878 TP110 TP879 10KJX4 5 6 7 8 BR27 4 3 2 1 JTG_TCK JTG_TMS JTG_TDI JTG_TDO /RESET0 (4,5,9,12) 10KJ R40 10KJX4 5 6 7 8 BR26 4 3 2 1 /OUTCS C TP495 TP493 TP490 VCC3 /PCLPRO /FAXPRO /OUTACK /INREQ TP630 TP628 TP627 CCD_TG TP111 TP112 TP113 TP114 TP115 TP116 TP117 TP118 A[20..0] D3 D2 D1 D0 HG73C141HFV(LF) ASIC (1) /RES_GASIC (3,5) (/ASIC_RST) (1) /CSGASIC (1) /LWR (1,3,4,5) /RD R134 R133 TP881 TP872 TP727 NM 33J (1,5) (6) (6) (6) (6) (6) 1000P C97 VIDEO# /LEND MMD PMD TC GRIDL TP486 TP471 TP468 C (6) MC (6) BIAS (6) VFMCNT_12V (6) VFM_24V (9) /FPOFF TP130 TP131 TP132 TP133 TP255 TP259 TP260 TP261 RSV_OUT0 RSV_OUT1 RSV_OUT2 TP882 8 7 6 5 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 TP144 TP146 TP248 TP249 TP250 TP240 TP242 TP243 TP244 TP245 TP246 TP247 TP232 TP234 TP236 TP237 TP230 TP221 TP223 TP224 TP226 TP227 FWREN (5) R73 NM R75 NM D R79 0J (9) PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 (9) (9) (9) (9) (9) /PIWR /PIACK /POACK /PIREQ (9) /POREQ PIDATA[7..0] G3.3V C411 0.1U TP257 TP254 S0 S1 7 6 4 3 N.C. GND 4 5 XIN/CLKIN XOUT SSCLK VSS CY25814SC VDD FRSEL S0 S1 1 8 5 2 SFCLK48B SFCLK48A TP891 TP885 R49 R48 E 10KJX4 8 7 6 5 BR60 1 2 3 4 /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB TP258 TP253 E R65 33J C375 X7 AT-49(12MHz) C402 12P 12P 10KJX4 8 7 6 5 BR59 1 2 3 4 PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 TP892 10KJX4 8 7 6 5 PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 BR58 1 2 3 4 VCC3 10KJX4 8 7 6 5 10KJX4 8 7 6 5 10KJX4 8 7 6 5 BR55 1 2 3 4 BR52 1 2 3 4 VCC3 BR57 1 2 3 4 RCV VPIN VMIN PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 (1) (1) 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ (1) /PRINTST /SCANST R356 R357 R358 R359 (9) /TRANSST (9) /SC_LINE /PR_LINE C401 10U/10V<2012> C400 10U/10V<2012> MEM_INT CLKSW /POREQ /PIREQ 10J 10J C399 10U/10V<2012> C37 10U/10V<2012> VCC3 2/16 L2 ZJSR5101-223TA FB2 NM_0J <1608> R63 NM_33J SFCLK48 SFCLK48B C77 NM_12P SFCLK48A R62 10KJ TP743 (15) (9) R58 NM VCC3 OUTPUT PFCLK VCC 10KJ R47 PARAD[7..0] VCC3 PODATA[7..0] NM_SG8002DC(48MHz) 1 IC9 TP252 X2 R61 10KJ R60 NM TP251 8 R57 NM C76 0.1U (15) (15) (15) (15) (15) VCC3 /INIT_I /SLCTIN_I /AUTOFD_I /STB_I (15) (15) (15) (15) (15) R56 10KJ VCC3 8 7 6 5 BR46 33JX4 PARAD0 8 PARAD1 7 PARAD2 6 PARAD3 5 8BR40 33JX4 PARAD4 PARAD5 7 PARAD6 6 PARAD7 5 BR43 33JX4 33J /REV_O 8 /FAULT_O 7 /ACK_O 6 BUSY_O 5 PE_O BR47 33JX4 33J SLCT_O VCC3 R314 0J FB3 0J <1608> (6) (6) (6) (9) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (6) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (1) R92 NM S1 TP256 VCC3 VCC3 HL PR CPFS2 /IMC_READY KEYSC3 KEYSC2 KEYSC1 SPFON MIRON MPFS OP_LATCH OP_DATA TM TM_ OP_CLK /SCANSP 1 2 3 4 R55 SLCT TP215 TP217 TP219 /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB R54 1 2 3 4 /REV /FAULT /ACK BUSY PE TP207 TP208 TP210 TP212 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 RCV VPIN VMIN 8 7 6 5 BR35 33JX4 33J /H_SYNC PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7 PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 PIDATA3 TP194 TP195 TP197 TP199 TP201 TP203 TP204 TP187 TP189 TP191 TP182 TP183 TP185 TP168 TP170 TP172 TP173 TP175 TP177 TP179 TP153 TP155 TP157 TP159 TP161 TP162 TP164 TP166 TP148 TP150 R44 1 2 3 4 TP141 G3.3V CPFS1 (6) MRPS3 (6) MRPS2 (6) MRPS1 (6) LDEN (6) RRS (6) PTPULSE (6) GASIC_READY (12) /POREQ VCC(AC) /PIWT /PIACK GND(AC) /POACK /PIREQ GND(CORE) PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 VCC(CORE) /TRANSST /RECEPTST /PRINTST /SCANST RCV VPIN VMIN GND(CORE) VPOUT VMOUT OEN GND(AC) SUSPEND IE1284_PARAD0 IE1284_PARAD1 VCC(AC) IE1284_PARAD2 IE1284_PARAD3 IE1284_PARAD4 IE1284_PARAD5 IE1284_PARAD6 IE1284_PARAD7 IE1284_REV VCC(CORE) IE1284_FAULT IE1284_ACK IE1284_BUSY IE1284_PE GND(CORE) IE1284_SLCT IE1284_INIT IE1284_SLCTIN VCC(CORE) IE1284_AUTOFD IE1284_STB TSP_MODE TSO0 /SCANSP VCC(AC) OPE_CLK GND(AC) OPE_LATCH OPE_DATA TM /TM VCC(CORE) OUTP14B OUTP13B OUTP12B OUTP11B OUTP10B OUTP09B OUTP08B GND(CORE) OUTP07B OUTP06B OUTP05B BR29 33JX4 1 2 3 4 BR28 33JX4 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 D 12P C291 VSAMP MEM_INT 12P C292 (1,5) A9 A8 A7 A6 12P C293 (5) TP121 TP122 TP123 TP124 TP125 TP126 TP127 TP128 TP129 RAM_CLK_OUT A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 12P C294 33J JTG_TDO JTG_TDI TP742 TP741 SFCLK48 12P C295 R30 JTG_TMS JTG_TCK TP740 TP739 TP738 TP737 TP736 PFCLK CLKSW 12P C296 TP837 /INREQ /OUTCS /OUTACK /ESPRD /FAXPRO /PCLPRO TP325 TP270 PFCLKOUT PFCLKIN 12P C297 0.1U 0.1U C48 B TP507 TP500 TP498 SYNC# 12P C298 0.1U C27 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U C49 C38 0.1U C28 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U C50 C39 C29 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U C51 C40 C30 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U C52 C41 C31 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U C53 C42 C32 0.1U 0.1U C43 C33 0.1U 0.1U C35 0.1U 0.1U C36 0.1U C54 C44 C34 0.1U C45 0.1U C55 C46 0.1U C56 C47 0.1U C57 A D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 TP134 TP135 TP136 TP137 TP138 TP139 TP364 TP351 TP140 TP462 TP403 TP402 TP382 TP120 TP119 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 0.1U C69 MCU PWB (ASIC section) (AR-M200/M201) C75 22000P CLPWM VCC(AC) AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 GND(AC) AFESCK VCC(CORE) ADCLK GND(CORE) AFE_SEN CCD_PH1 CCD_PH2 AFE_SDI CCD_CP BSAMP CCD_RS CCD_TG VSAMP GND(CORE) TD0 TDI TRSK TMS TCK VCC(CORE) /INREQ /OUTCS /OUTACK /ESPRD /FAXPRD /PCLPRD GND(AC) MDAT15 MDAT14 MDAT13 VCC(CORE) MDAT12 MDAT11 MDAT10 VCC(AC) MDAT09 MDAT08 MDAT07 GND(CORE) MDAT06 MDAT05 MDAT04 VCC(CORE) MDAT03 MDAT02 MDAT01 MDAT00 GND(AC) /INCS /INACK /OUTREQ GND(CORE) /HSYNC PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 VCC(AC) PIDATA3 PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7 /POCS CPU_DATA7 CPU_DATA6 CPU_DATA5 CPU_DATA4 VCC(AC) CPU_DATA3 CPU_DATA2 CPU_DATA1 CPU_DATA0 GND(AC) MIRCNT /CPUSYNC MEM_INT ARB_INT VCC(CORE) CPU_AD8 CPU_AD7 CPU_AD6 CPU_AD5 GND(CORE) RAM_CLK_IN CPU_AD4 CPU_AD3 CPU_AD2 CPU_AD1 CPU_AD0 /CPUCS SFCLK48 GND(CORE) /CPUWR /CPURD /RESET VCC(CORE) PFCLK CLKSW GND(CORE) PFCLKOUT PFCLKIN GND(PLL) VCC(PLL) GND(PLL) VCC(PLL) TM2_15M /SYNC GND(AC) /VIDEO /LEND VCC(AC) OUTP00A OUTP01A OUTP02A OUTP03A OUTP04A OUTP05A OUTP06A OUTP15A VCC(CORE) OUTP07A OUTP08A GND(CORE) OUTP09A OUTP10A OUTP11A OUTP12A OUTP13A VCC(CORE) OUTP14A OUTP00B GND(AC) OUTP01B OUTP02B OUTP03B OUTP04B VCC(AC) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 22 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 A (2,5) (/ASIC_RST) (1) /RES_IOASIC R135 33J R136 NM 1000P C98 A[20..0] B (1,2,4,13) D[15..0] (1,2,4) A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 (1) D13 D12 D11 D15 D14 CPUCLK# /RD /HWR /CSIOASIC (1,2,4,5) (1,4) (1) (11) KEYIN TP635 TP294 TP296 TP285 TP287 TP282 IC52 (11) (11) (11) IOIC3.3V NM_10KJ R706 MCU PWB (I/O ASIC section) (AR-M200/M201) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 VDD PHICLK gnd XCE0(PU50K) CE1(PU50K) XOE(PU50K) XWR(PU50K) A4(PU50K) A3(PU50K) A2(PU50K) A1(PU50K) A0(PU50K) XRST(Sch) vdd D7(PU50K) D6(PU50K) SMC(SCAN)(PD50K) SIN(SCAN)(PD50K) SOUT(SCAN) AMC(SCAN)(PD50K) SCK(SCAN) D5(PU50K) D4(PU50K) D3(PU50K) VDD SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 C TP262 TP263 TP264 TP265 TP266 TP267 TP268 TP269 TP636 SC65892(IO ASIC) <LQFP100> VDD PORTE0(PD50K) PORTE1(PD50K) PORTE2(PD50K) PORTE3(PD50K) PORTE4(PD50K) PORTE5(PD50K) PORTE6(PD50K) PORTE7(PD50K) gnd PORTD0(PD50K) PORTD1(PD50K) PORTD2(PD50K) PORTD3(PD50K) PORTD4(PD50K) PORTD5(PD50K) PORTD6(PD50K) PORTD7(PD50K) gnd PORTC0(PD50K) PORTC1(PD50K) PORTC2(PD50K) PORTC3(PD50K) PORTC4(PD50K) VDD C 75 74 TP283 73 TP284 72 TP286 71 TP288 70 TP289 69 TP290 68 TP291 67 TP292 66 65 TP293 64 TP295 63 62 TP297 61 TP298 60 TP299 59 TP300 58 TP301 57 56 TP832 55 TP302 54 TP303 53 TP304 52 TP305 51 RSV_IN1 TP811 RSV_OUT17 RSV_OUT16 RSV_OUT15 RSV_OUT14 RSV_OUT13 RSV_OUT12 RSV_OUT11 RSV_OUT10 RSV_OUT9 RSV_OUT8 (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (PPD1) (PPD2) (PPD3) (POD) (SPID) (CED1) (CED2) (DRST) D (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (13) DSWS (TCS) DVS1 (PD1) (PD2) (SCOD) (SRJD) (MFD) MSU_ST1 (11) (8) (8) (8) (6) (PMRDY) (MMLD) (FANLK) THOPEN BL (7) (7) (7) (7) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (9) (6) (7) (6) (RSV_SOL) PSFM LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 LCDE LCDRS /ES_CRDY MCNT (11) (11) (7) (7) INFOLED PSL SPUS SRVC SFTMT0 SFTMT1 SFTMT2 SFTMT3 IO ASIC D RSV_IN2 IOIC3.3V LCDE LCDRS R707 4.7KJ VCC3 /ES_CRDY 0.1U C568 B 0.1U C662 A 2 1 MSU_ST1 R10 4.7KJ VCC3 0.1U C575 TP271 TP272 TP273 TP274 D10 D9 D8 0.1U C660 TP275 TP276 TP277 TP278 TP279 TP306 TP280 TP281 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 TP307 TP308 TP309 TP815 TP310 TP311 TP312 TP313 0.1U C574 NM_10KJ GND YIN(PD50K)(5VFS) SELC(OD,5VFS) SELB(OD,5VFS) SELA(OD,5VFS) gnd XCE_EXT PORTG0(PD50K) PORTG1(PD50K) PORTG2(PD50K) PORTG3(PD50K) PORTG4(PD50K) PORTG5(PD50K) PORTG6(PD50K) PORTG7(PD50K) vdd PORTF0(PD50K) PORTF1(PD50K) PORTF2(PD50K) PORTF3(PD50K) PORTF4(PD50K) PORTF5(PD50K) PORTF6(PD50K) PORTF7(PD50K) GND 0.1U C569 R122 GND D2(PU50K) D1(PU50K) D0(PU50K) PORTA7(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA6(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA5(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA4(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA3(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA2(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA1(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA0(PD50K)(5VFS) vdd PORTB7(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB6(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB5(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB4(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB3(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB2(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB1(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB0(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTC7(PD50K) PORTC6(PD50K) PORTC5(PD50K) GND 0.1U C663 NM_10KJ 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 TP314 TP315 TP316 TP317 TP318 TP319 TP320 TP321 TP322 TP323 TP324 0.1U C700 R263 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 23 E E C304 10U/10V<2012> L15 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA FB13 0J <1608> VCC3 3/16 1 2 3 4 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 24 1 2 3 R76 (1) /CSSRAM (1,2,3,5) /RD (1,3) /HWR A[20..0] (1,2,3,13) D[15..0] (1,2,3) (1) SCL (1) SDA A A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 TP726 100J NM C352 4 B 5 28 12 1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 GND GND VDD VDD 9 25 8 24 6 7 10 11 22 23 26 27 VCC3 I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 C82 0.1U IS63LV1024L-12J-TR CS1 OE WE A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IC8 VCC3 8 7 6 5 E0 E1 E2 VSS 0.1U C84 1 2 3 4 0.1U C85 VCC3 VCC3 CAT24WC08LI VCC WC SCL SDA IC5 Serial EE-PROM D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 R77 NM TP889 R74 10KJ VCC3 B A17 A1 A19 A18 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 (1,3) /HWR (2,5,9,12) /RESET0 (9) VPP A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A20 R86 (1) MCU PWB (Memory section) (AR-M200/M201) NM C353 RY/BY NM TP353 TP355 TP357 TP359 TP361 TP363 TP365 TP366 TP368 TP344 TP346 TP347 TP326 TP328 TP330 TP331 TP333 TP335 TP337 TP339 TP341 VCC3 10KJ NM TP349 TP888 NM R88 R81 NM R82 NM C86 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 (9) A16 BYTE GND DQ15 DQ7 DQ14 DQ6 DQ13 DQ5 DQ12 DQ4 VCC DQ11 DQ3 DQ10 DQ2 DQ9 DQ1 DQ8 DQ0 OE GND CE A0 S29AL016D70TFI020 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A19 NC WE RP VPP WP RY/BY A18 A17 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 IC7 VPP 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 C R84 10KJ VCC3 TP367 TP369 TP348 TP350 TP352 TP354 TP356 TP358 TP360 TP362 TP332 TP334 TP336 TP338 TP340 TP342 TP343 TP345 TP327 TP329 C88 0.1U VCC3 FlashROM VPP Controll C A17 NM C354 R83 22000P C87 NM R80 NM C355 J1,J2 A1 /RD 1 2 3 (1,2,3,5) /CSFROM D11 D3 D10 D2 D9 D1 D8 D0 D15 D7 D14 D6 D13 D5 D12 D4 (1) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) MAD10 MAD0 MAD1 MAD2 MAD3 RAMDB7 RAMDB5 RAMDB6 RAMDB3 RAMDB4 RAMDB1 RAMDB2 RAMDB0 DQM0 /SDWDE /SDCAS /SDRAS /SDCS BANK0 BANK1 C89 0.1U VCC3 TP850 TP849 TP813 TP840 TP838 TP853 TP839 VCC3 D VSS DQ15 VSSQ DQ14 DQ13 VCCQ DQ12 DQ11 VSSQ DQ10 DQ9 VCCQ DQ8 VSS NC UDQM CLK CLKE NC A11 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 VSS C91 0.1U C92 0.1U SDRAM (16bit x 4bank) VCC DQ0 VCCQ DQ1 DQ2 VSSQ DQ3 DQ4 VCCQ DQ5 DQ6 VSSQ DQ7 VCC LDQM WE CAS RAS CS BA0 BA1 A10 A0 A1 A2 A3 VCC IC6 C90 0.1U 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 D C93 0.1U 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 C94 0.1U TP851 TP816 TP812 TP852 VCC3 C95 0.1U C83 NM DQM1 SDCLK SDCKE (2) (2) (2) R85 RAMDB8 RAMDB10 RAMDB9 RAMDB12 RAMDB11 RAMDB14 RAMDB13 RAMDB15 0J E MAD12 MAD11 MAD9 MAD8 MAD7 MAD6 MAD5 MAD4 E RAMDB[15..0] (2) MAD[12..0] (2) 4/16 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 C16 (2,3) (/ASIC_RST) (1) R64 RESETOUT1 1U<2012> 0.1U C290 33J 1 2 CT 3 4 33J A C79 47P TP395 R345 1KJ OP Reset R28 ASIC Reset BU4212F GND VDD VOUT IC3 Reset Circuit R29 10KJ VCC3 C26 47P C18 NM /OP_RST TP386 0.01U C17 TP786 R27 100KJ VCC3 (9,10) /ASIC_RST TP383 (16) /RESET0 (2,4,9,12) (2,4,9,12) /RESET0 MIRCNT AFE_SDI AFE_SEN AFE_SCK (2) (1,2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) VSAMP CCD_TG CCD_RS BSAMP CCD_CP CCD_PHI1 CCD_PHI2 ADCLK (9,10) PB_NOE (9,10) PB_NAE0 (9,10) PB_NWE (1,2,3,4) /RD (2) (2) (2) LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 LCDE LCDRS (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) VIDEO# KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 TM TM_ (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (1,2) (1) SPFMT0 (1) SPFMT1 (1) SPFMT2/MIRCNT (1) SPFMT3 (2) MIRON (2) SPFON (2) /ASIC_RST /RESET# (16) R71 10KJ R121 /OP_RST OP_CLK OP_DATA OP_LATCH (9,10) (2) (2) (2) B 100J R72 10KJ MCU PWB (Driver section 1) (AR-M200/M201) TP718 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 33P 3.3V C117 TP378 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 IC23 VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 TC74VHC244FT VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 74LCX244 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 NM_100J 74LCX244 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND IC26 74VHCT244 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND IC20 74LCX244 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND IC16 74LCX244 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND IC13 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND IC19 R110 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 TP396 TP397 TP398 5V TP384 TP385 TP387 TP388 TP389 TP390 TP391 TP900 TP899 TP898 TP897 TP896 TP895 TP894 TP893 TP412 TP413 TP414 TP415 TP416 TP417 TP418 TP419 R332 R333 R336 R338 R344 R354 R355 R360 FWREN R226 NM_10KJ R237 10KJ (PB_NOE) (PB_NAE0) (PB_NWE) (/RD) C VSAMP# 33J CCD_TG# 33J CCD_RS# 33J 33J BSAMP# CCD_CP# 33J CCD_PHI1# 33J CCD_PHI2# 33J ADCLK# 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 4 3 2 1 TP833 AFE_SDI# AFE_SEN# AFE_SCK# R224 0J VCC3 R373 R374 R375 R376 R223 NM_0J 100J 33JX4 BR61 5V 5 6 7 8 100J 33J 33J 33J 3.3V 33J 33J 33J 5V R109 R101 R96 R97 R98 3.3V R361 R370 R371 C110 0.1U C127 0.1U VCC3 (2) TP404 TP405 TP406 TP407 TP408 TP409 TP410 TP411 VCC3 C128 0.1U 0.1U C105 VCC3 TP370 TP371 TP372 TP373 TP374 TP375 TP379 TP380 VCC3 C C255 0.1U NM C104 4 (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) NM_TC7SH32FU IC46 VSAMP# CCD_TG# CCD_RS# BSAMP# CCD_CP# CCD_PHI1# CCD_PHI2# ADCLK# 2 1 (13) (13) (13) (13) (PB_NOE) (PB_NAE0) (PB_NWE) (/RD) VCC3 (14) (14) (14) (11) (11) (11) (11) (11) (11) LCDDB4# LCDDB5# LCDDB6# LCDDB7# LCDE# LCDRS# AFE_SDI# AFE_SEN# AFE_SCK# (11) (11) (11) (11) (7) (7) /VIDEO (KEYSC1) (KEYSC2) (KEYSC3) (TM) (TM_) (7) (7) (7) (7) R119 R120 (2,3) (11) (11) (11) (13) (15) (SPFMT0) (SPFMT1) (SPFMT2) (SPFMT3) (/ASIC_RST) (OP_CLK) (OP_DATA) (OP_LATCH) /FAX_RST /NIC_RST 1KJ 33J TP814 C116 NM C120 NM C121 NM C122 NM C123 NM C124 NM C125 NM C126 NM /RESET1 ADCLK# CCD_PHI1# CCD_PHI2# CCD_CP# BSAMP# CCD_RS# CCD_TG# VSAMP# /RESET# 0.01U C310 B 0.1U C114 0.1U C115 NM C311 A 5 3 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 25 (1) (11) /SYNC D FW R93 10KJ C306 NM C307 NM C308 NM C309 NM C129 NM C130 NM C131 NM NM C376 VCC3 (14) mt_at_home (11) D R89 NM (/RD) (PB_NWE) (PB_NAE0) (PB_NOE) AFE_SCK# AFE_SEN# AFE_SDI# 5V 3 1 47P GND Y2 GND Y2 Y1 Vcc 2 4 6 5 TP394 0.1U R100 3.3V 0.1U C96 TP377 VCC3 C103 VCC3 2 4 6 5 TP393 NC7WZ17 A2 Y1 NC7WZ17 A2 A1 IC11 A1 Vcc 3 TP381 IC14 1 TP376 C99 3.3V 5V E 33J R91 3.3V E 33J (FW) (1,9) mt_at_home# (/SYNC) 5/16 (2) (1) 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 PR MM_Y1 MM_Y2 MM_Y3 PMD PMCLK LDEN /LEND R116 10KJ (1) MMCLK 100J R339 (2) VFM_24V (2) VFMCNT_12V TP474 TP797 TP799 TP798 100J 10KJ R268 PR# 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 A TP475 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC (2) (2) (2) (2) Q21 TP464 TP805 TP806 TP807 KRC102S 2 KRC102S 2 TP723 TP722 Q14 10KJ R269 R418 NM_10KJ KID65503F 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G R304 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IC27 R142 NM_10KJ R414 NM_10KJ VCC3 R419 NM_10KJ VCC3 TP792 TP785 TP790 TP789 10KJ R265 10KJ R271 10KJ R270 10KJ R266 4 MC BIAS TC GRIDL MCNT PSFM 1 (2) (2) (2) (2) (3) (3) 3 3 TP467 MMref0 MMref1 MMref2 /PMD PMCLK_A /LDEN CPFS1 CPFS2 MPFS RRS R395 1.5KJ R396 1.5KJ 1 2 (7) (7) (7) (11) (11) (11) Q16 R379 R380 Q17 KRC102S 2 2 (2) (2) (2) (2) (1) (2) Q4 (12) D45 1SS355 3 TP466 INT24V 3 3 NM_1.5KJ NM_1.5KJ 1.5KJX4 8 7 6 5 3 PGND TP429 D61 1SS355 /PR SHOLD TP801 TP800 TP795 TP793 TP794 PGND TP437 TP439 TP440 TP441 TP442 TP445 TP446 24V /PR TP455 TP449 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 MMD MRPS1 MRPS2 MRPS3 POFF HL FTH 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C COM KID65001AF 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B E IC25 KRC102S R117 10KJ Q20 KRA119S 5V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BR62 1 2 3 4 KRC102S 2 /MMCLK TP784 TP781 PGND 1.5KJX4 TP420 8 TP421 7 TP422 6 TP423 5 TP426 TP428 TP435 1 1 B 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C COM (11) B (11) R296 10KJ PGND KID65001AF 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B E R90 10KJ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IC21 R386 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 TP430 47KJ R363 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 KID65503F 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G IC24 R389 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 TP461 TP802 TP803 TP804 D58 B D56 CRH01 /MMD MRPS_1 MRPS_2 MRPS_3 /POFF TP457 12V (12) (7) (7) (7) (11) 0603SFF150FM/32-2 Q13 2SB1132 TP454 CP17 CRH01 D55 0603SFF150FM/32-2 24V R413 NM_10KJ 1SS355 (12) 2 /VFMCNT PSFMOUT D51 CP16 5V PGND Q12 2SB1132 TP451 47KJ B RLS-73 TP456 4.7KJ1/4W<3216> R387 D57 RLS-73 TP450 TP448 (12) (12) (12) (12) Q7 KTA1505S 47KJ /CPFS1 /CPFS2 /MPFS /RRS R388 TP447 D52 MTZ J22B TP443 24V 4.7KJ1/4W<3216> (11) (11) (11) (11) (12) 4.7KJ1/4W<3216> R362 /MC /BIAS /TC /GRIDL /MCNT 24V E C 3 C 1SS355 D5 TP459 INT5V R298 1.5KF 24V HLOUT TP431 (11) Q2 NM_KTA1505S R297 47KJ R115 100J1/4W<3216> TP460 TP444 NM_47KJ R108 PTPULSE NM_4.7KJ1/4W<3216> Q3 KRA119S (12) R112 (2) C 6 5 PGND EN5V - + 2 TP470 (12) KIA358F-EL/P 7 IC45B VFMOUT D36 1SS355 TP432 1SS355 D4 1U<2012> C312 Q18 KRC102S 3 NM R368 LCDCONT R316 NM VCC3 12KF R264 (16) D TCS_AN R129 NM MA700 D1 5V 2 1 R378 0J R103 1MF VCC3 R302 10KJ 2 1 VCC3 2 1 5V R366 0J NM_KDS226 D59 R307 7.5KF TP469 3 - + 12V 1 TP463 TP458 R107 4.3KF TP436 VCC3 - + - + 12V + - 5 6 + - 3 2 12V + - 5 6 1 TP472 R393 0J 7 IC22B KIA393F TP465 KIA358F-EL/P 7 IC53B 0.1U C305 EN5V TP473 R381 NM 10KJ R382 3 Q15 TP553 VCC3 2 0.1U C113 E NM C371 NM_KDS226 2 1 VCC3 TP476 0.1U C398 NM_2SB1197K D60 R383 NM B 2 1 R114 100J 1 VCC3 E KDS226 D3 KDS226 D67 R394 NM 3 C407 NM 22000P C119 R308 NM 3 PR# 0.1U/50V<1608> R124 4.7KJ VCC3 TP453 C118 R113 300J 0.1U/50V<1608> C111 KIA358F-EL/P 12V 1 12V Q19 2SK3018 R105 1KJ VCC3 (S) (D) TP452 IC53A 1 IC22A KIA393F (G) KIA358F-EL/P IC45A EN5V 2 3 12V 12V 2 3 C379 0.1U TP427 R303 10KJ IC17A KIA393F R104 7.5KF VCC3 12V NM_KDS226 D66 R123 10KF R118 1.2KF 3 2 3 VCC3 C112 22000P NM_KDS226 D2 R106 10KF TP438 R301 4.7KJ TP433 R102 1KF LCD Contrast Buffer RTH_IN C367 2.2U<2012> TP425 R300 470KJ Analog Tonner Sensor Buffer (1) (12) 3 TP424 R299 100J VCC3 D 8 4 BR63 1 2 3 4 1 1 E C 8 4 A 1 8 4 8 4 + - 5 6 (TCS_AN) (LCDCONT) (11) (1) (3) (1) TP434 KIA393F IC17B 7 THOPEN RTH FTH 12V 6/16 8 4 MCU PWB (Driver section 2) (AR-M200/M201) 8 4 8 4 8 4 E C AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 26 1 1 2 3 4 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 27 1 2 3 4 (12) (12) (12) (12) (TM) (TM_) (5) MRPS_1 MRPS_2 MRPS_3 (SPFMT0) (SPFMT2) (SPFMT1) (SPFMT3) MMref0 MMref1 MMref2 OUT_AOUT_A+ OUT_B+ OUT_B- (5) (6) (6) (6) (5) (5) (5) (5) (6) (6) (6) B R160 300J R150 2KJ A R161 620J R162 1.2KJ PGND C144 NM_10U/10V<2012> PGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5V TP478 VS SENSE 1 COMP 1 OUT 1B I01 GND GND I11 PHASE 1 VREF 1 RC 1 VSS PGND C138 0.1U L6219DS OUT 1A OUT 2A SENSE 2 COMP 2 OUT 2B GND GND I02 I12 PHASE 2 VREF 2 RC 2 IC32 R158 1J 2W 5 1 9 2 Vs N.C OUT2 OUT1 Vref TA7291AS GND IN2 IN1 Vcc IC36 R312 0J <1608> 6 4 3 7 8 Vs R149 30KJ R164 4.7KJ B GND OUT A OUT A OUT A/ OUT A/ OUT B OUT B OUT B/ OUT B/ PGND STA7100M Sense B Sense A Sync REF IN A IN A/ IN B IN B/ 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 24VSCMT 5V Tonner Motor Driver PGND R157 1J 2W 14 5 6 9 8 7 11 12 IC34 SPF Motor Driver PGND C145 0.1U/50V<1608> 5V PGND R309 NM_0J <1608> 0.1U C141 R159 1.2KJ PGND 5V PGND R148 30KJ TP488 MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_PH_B C135 820P TP489 (2) (2) (2) TP483 R146 1.5KJ PGND C137 0.1U R163 100J R152 510J 10KJX4 BR66 R151 1KJ 5V C134 820P R147 1KJ PGND 0.68J 1W R144 Scanner Motor Driver 10 1 2 3 4 17 18 15 16 13 PGND (2) (2) (2) 24VSPFMT C136 820P TP487 MM_AI1 MM_PH_A MM_AI0 MCU PWB (Driver section 3) (AR-M200/M201) A 4 3 2 1 5 6 7 8 SPMT_3 TMB_O TMA_O 24V (12) (12) + (11) (11) (11) SPMT_1 (11) SPMT_2 PGND SPMT_0 C133 820P 0.68J 1W C142 10U/35V 0.1U/50V<1608> C143 TP481 R145 1.5KJ R143 C139 47U/35V PGND + 24V C C140 0.1U/50V <1608> C 24VSFTMT CP6 0603SFF150FM/32-2 24VSPFSOL CP5 0603SFF150FM/32-2 24VDupMT CP3 0603SFF150FM/32-2 24VSPFMT CP2 0603SFF150FM/32-2 24VSCMT CP1 0603SFF150FM/32-2 (3) (3) (3) SPUS SRVC (RSV_SOL) TP503 TP502 TP501 D PGND 1.2KJ R404 1.2KJ R403 NM_1.2KJ R275 PGND TP499 TP496 TP497 TP494 TP491 TP492 PGND TP485 TP482 TP484 TP480 TP477 TP479 R408 10KJ R407 10KJ TP506 17 18 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 8 16 9 7 2 IC33 O4 O3 O2 O1 COM COM TD62064AF GND GND I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC 1 8 16 9 7 2 D41 D42 D43 1SS355 1SS355 1SS355 Q23 2SD1781K Q24 2SD1781K Q25 NM_2SD1781K TP505 R406 NM_10KJ TP504 O4 O3 O2 O1 COM COM TD62064AF GND GND I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC IC31 /SPUS /SRVC MTZ J22B D9 /SFTMT3 /SFTMT2 /SFTMT1 /SFTMT0 MTZ J22B D8 /DMT3 /DMT2 /DMT1 /DMT0 E (11) (11) (11) E 24VSPFSOL /RSV_SOL Shifter Motor Driver 17 18 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 Duplex Motor Driver RSPF Solenoid Driver SFTMT3 SFTMT2 (3) SFTMT1 (3) SFTMT0 DMT3 DMT2 DMT1 DMT0 (3) (3) (1) (1) (1) (1) D 24VSFTMT (12) (12) (12) (12) 24VDupMT (12) (12) (12) (12) 7/16 1 2 3 4 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 28 1 2 3 NM C156 NM C163 0.1U C155 NM C162 0.1U (11) C181 1000P C180 1000P 12VIN TP510 TP509 0.1U C165 NM C158 0.1U C149 A 1000P C182 TP511 R194 10J 0.1U C166 NM C159 NM C150 47U/35V C190 22U/16V C204 47U/25V C194 + 0.1U C168 0.1U C161 NM C152 + + PGND 1000P C183 TP512 R195 10J 0.1U C167 0.1U C160 NM C151 L4 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA FB4 0J <1608> R193 10J 0.1U C164 NM C157 0.1U C148 R192 10J VCC3 C147 24V 1000P C185 TP514 R197 10J NM C170 NM C154 12V 0.1U C206 R127 100KJ 5V R126 100KJ 0.1U/50V<1608> C196 R125 100KJ 0.1U/50V<1608> C191 1000P C184 TP513 R196 10J 0.1U C169 NM C153 (11) INT24V B 3.3VIN + R203 0J IN IC37 3 C195 22U/16V C205 22U/16V + + 2 KIA7805 GND OUT D25 1SS355 R204 0J L5 ZJSR5101-223TA FB5 NM_0J <1608> 47U/35V C192 R206 100J 2W R202 0J 0.1U C207 0.1U C197 0.1U C193 R205 0J TP518 0.1U 2 1 TP517 1 KDS226 D20 C179 3 5V PGND R179 1KJ 2W INT24V TP516 R187 2.7KJ R186 20KJ TP508 1SS355 D19 PGND D14 1SS355 0.22J 2W R175 TP515 R185 20KJ (12) 24V1(DSWS) 1 0.1U 1 C146 1 4 1 VCC3 MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section) (AR-M200/M201) B R130 100KJ EN5V R128 100KJ VCC3 INT5V DSWS (3) (16) (16) (12) (12) (12) (12) R305 R306 (12) (11) (11) (11) (11) (12) (12) (12) C (12) (12) (11) (12) (12) (11) (11) MFD MMLD FANLK PSFANLK DVSEL TCS C POD PMRDY SCOD SPID SRJD PPD3 PD1 PD2 CED1 CED2 DRST PPD1 PPD2 SPPD PSW D63 A 100J 100J D62 UDZS3.9B UDZS3.9B 2 1 2 1 2 1 KDS226 D21 KDS226 D15 KDS226 D10 5V 5V 2 1 2 1 2 1 KDS226 D30 KDS226 D26 KDS226 D23 VCC3 TP831 TP830 5V 5V 5V 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 KDS226 D31 KDS226 D27 KDS226 D24 KDS226 D22 KDS226 D16 KDS226 D11 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 KDS226 D54 KDS226 D37 KDS226 D17 KDS226 D12 KDS226 D28 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 D 1000P C198 R207 15KJ D 1000P C199 1000P C200 R209 4.7KJ 1000P R208 15KJ C187 R189 1KJ 1000P 3 3 C186 R188 1KJ KDS226 D18 KDS226 D13 1000P C201 R210 4.7KJ 1000P C188 R190 15KJ 1000P C171 R167 15KJ R211 4.7KJ 1000P C189 R191 4.7KJ 1000P C172 R168 15KJ 2 1 VCC3 2 1 1000P C372 R340 4.7KJ KDS226 D32 KDS226 D29 1000P C380 3 3 1000P C174 R170 4.7KJ R377 4.7KJ VCC3 1000P C173 R169 15KJ R198 R199 R200 R201 R367 R372 1000P C175 R171 4.7KJ 1000P C202 R212 12KJ 1000P C177 R173 15KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1000P C203 R218 R219 R220 R214 R215 R216 R217 R213 3.3KJ VCC3 1000P C176 R172 4.7KJ R183 R184 R176 R177 R178 R180 R181 R182 E 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ DVS1 (TCS) (MFD) (MMLD) (FANLK) (PSFANLK) 1000P C178 R174 4.7KJ VCC3 E (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (1) (CED1) (CED2) (DRST) (PPD1) (PPD2) (SPPD) (PSW) 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (1) (1) (POD) (PMRDY) (SCOD) (SPID) (SRJD) (PPD3) (PD1) (PD2) 8/16 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 1 2 3 4 1 2 R239 VCC3 R240 R241 R242 R243 R244 TDO TCK TMS TDI TRST_L R137 33J R138 NM 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ NM_10KJ (2,4,5,12) /RESET0 (1) /RES_OA982 (5,10) /OP_RST (2) PODATA[7..0] /FPOFF C216 NM A R342 R343 C100 1000P (12) PODATA7 PODATA6 PODATA5 PODATA4 PODATA3 PODATA2 PODATA1 PODATA0 10KJ R238 (10,13) PB_ADDR[7:0] /ES_PAGE /ES_CRDY /ES_SRDY WAKEUP (1) (3) (1) (10) (2) (2) (2) (2) (10) (2) (2) C254 33P R247 R248 (12) (12) (12) (12) TRST_L VCC3 R245 R246 X4 AT-49(18.3856MHz) R249 0J 4.7KJ NM_0J C252 33P TRST_L 33JX4 R369 NM XIN XOUT 4.7KJ 4.7KJ NM NM 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 TP667 TP668 TDO TCK TMS TDI /FPOFF 33JX4 TDO TCK TMS TDI 1 2 3 4 BR80 1 2 3 4 BR81 /POREQ /POACK /H_SYNC /SC_LINE INT_USBD /PR_LINE /FPOFF (2) /IMC_READY (13) MDM_IRQ (10) SUSPEND(USB2.0) (12) OA982_READY MODEM_IN (FW) DT_ACKB DT_REQB ES_CMD ES_STS BR78 1 33JX4 2 3 4 BR79 1 2 3 4 33JX4 PB_NWE PB_NOE PB_NCS3 PB_NAE0 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 RY_BY BR76 1 33JX4 2 3 4 BR77 1 2 3 4 33JX4 PB_NCS1 CLK_EXT OA_RX OA_TX (13) (1,5) (10) (10) (1) (1) PB_ADDR0 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR7 (5,10) (5,10) (10) (5,10) PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 (13) 12P C366 3 (10,13) PB_DATA[7:0] RY_BY 12P C362 10KJ (12) (12) 12P C381 R351 PIDATA7 PIDATA6 PIDATA5 PIDATA4 PIDATA3 PIDATA2 PIDATA1 PIDATA0 /PIACK /PIREQ (2) (2) 12P C382 VCC3 PIDATA[7..0] 12P C383 4 (2) /PIWR (2) 12P C384 B TP596 TP598 TP600 TP602 TP604 TP606 TP607 TP609 TP611 TP612 TP613 TP614 TP615 TP616 TP617 TP618 TP669 5 4 172 177 112 113 114 116 117 118 175 176 37 38 39 40 42 43 44 45 47 48 49 50 51 52 24 26 28 29 30 31 32 34 15 16 19 21 22 23 1 2 8 9 11 12 13 14 CLK_EXT TP666 TP665 TP663 TP664 TP650 TP651 TP652 TP653 TP654 TP655 TP656 TP657 TP658 TP659 TP660 TP661 TP662 TP642 TP643 TP644 TP645 TP646 TP647 TP648 TP638 TP639 TP640 TP631 TP632 TP633 TP634 TP629 199 201 202 203 204 205 207 208 178 180 181 182 183 185 186 187 188 189 190 194 195 196 197 198 TP589 TP591 TP593 TP619 TP620 TP621 TP622 TP623 TP624 TP625 TP626 168 169 170 TP557 TP559 TP560 TP562 TP564 TP566 TP568 TP569 TP571 TP573 TP575 TP576 TP578 TP580 TP582 TP584 TP586 119 120 124 125 126 127 128 129 131 132 133 134 135 137 138 141 142 143 145 146 147 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 159 160 161 162 163 165 166 167 TP519 TP521 TP523 TP525 TP527 TP529 TP531 TP533 TP535 TP537 TP539 TP541 TP543 TP545 TP547 TP549 TP551 CLK_EXT OA-982 XIN XOUT TEST_MODE0 TEST_MODE1 RESET_L TDO TCK TMS TDI TRST_L USB_DM USB_DP B R250 4.7KJ PO_LINE_SYNC/ANA_SCLK PO_PAGE_SYNC/ANA_NCS PO_REQ/ANA_SD0 PO_ACK/PDATA0/PDS0 PO_DONE/PDATA2/PDS2 PO_WR/PDATA1/PDS1 PO_DATA7/LHEAT/PAS_M PO_DATA6/LCTRL/CFIRE2 PO_DATA5/AGATE/CFIRE1 PO_DATA4/ACLK/MFIRE2 PO_DATA3/PENABLE/MFIRE1 PO_DATA2/PLOAD PO_DATA1/PCLK PO_DATA0/PDATA3/PAS_C GP_A0 GP_A1 GP_A2/DC_CHY1 GP_A3/DC_CHX1 GP_A4/DC_PWM1 GP_A5/DC_CHY0 GP_A6/DC_CHX0 GP_A7/DC_PWM0 GP_D0/ADC_A0 GP_D1/ADC_A1 GP_D2/ADC_A2 GP_D3/ADC_CLK GP_D4/ADC_DATA GP_D5/ADC_NCS GP_B0/USART0_TX GP_B1/USART0_RX GP_B2/USART0_CK GP_B3/ANA_SD1 GP_B4/DT_ACKB GP_B5/DT_REQB GP_B6/DT_ACKA GP_B7/DT_REQA GP_C0/PB_ADDR0 GP_C1/PB_ADDR1 GP_C2/PB_ADDR2 GP_C3/PB_ADDR3 GP_C4/PB_ADDR4 GP_C5/PB_ADDR5 GP_C6/PB_ADDR6 GP_C7/PB_ADDR7 REG_A9/PB_NCS1 REG_A8/PB_NCS2 REG_AD7/PB_DATA7 REG_AD6/PB_DATA6 REG_AD5/PB_DATA5 REG_AD4/PB_DATA4 REG_AD3/PB_DATA3 REG_AD2/PB_DATA2 REG_AD1/PB_DATA1 REG_AD0/PB_DATA0 REG_ADDR_VALID/PB_NCS0 REG_RD_L/PB_NCS3 REG_WR_L/PB_NAE0 REG_CS_L/PB_NAE1 REG_RDY/PB_NWE INTERRUPT_L/PB_NOE BASE_CLK/GP_PWM1 CLK_EXT/GP_PWM2 MAIN_CLK/GP_PWM0 PP_HIDRIVE/USART1_RX PP_DRIVE/USART1_TX PP_NINIT PP_NFAULT PP_NSELECTIN PP_NAUTOFD PP_SELECT PP_PERROR PP_BUSY PP_NACK PP_DATA7 PP_DATA6 PP_DATA5 PP_DATA4 PP_DATA3 PP_DATA2 PP_DATA1/USART1_CK PP_DATA0 PP_NSTROBE PI_LINE_SYNC/GP_D6 PI_TR_TGEN PI_TGEN6 PI_TGEN5 PI_TGEN4 PI_TGEN3 PI_TGEN2 PI_TGEN1 PI_TGEN0 PI_DATA7 PI_DATA6 PI_DATA5 PI_DATA4 PI_DATA3 PI_DATA2 PI_DATA1 PI_DATA0 IC38 VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO PLLSS_VSSA PLLSS_VDDA PLLCS_VSSA PLLCS_VDDA SDRAM_CLK SDRAM_CKE SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L SDRAM_CS0_L SDRAM_CS1A_L SDRAM_CS1B_L ROM_CS_L SDRAM_DQMA0 SDRAM_DQMB0 SDRAM_DQMA1 SDRAM_DQMB1 SDRAM_DATA0 SDRAM_DATA1 SDRAM_DATA2 SDRAM_DATA3 SDRAM_DATA4 SDRAM_DATA5 SDRAM_DATA6 SDRAM_DATA7 SDRAM_DATA8 SDRAM_DATA9 SDRAM_DATA10 SDRAM_DATA11 SDRAM_DATA12 SDRAM_DATA13 SDRAM_DATA14 SDRAM_DATA15 17 35 69 87 121 139 173 191 10 27 41 54 64 76 86 98 108 123 136 150 164 179 193 206 18 36 70 88 122 140 174 192 3 20 25 33 46 59 71 81 93 103 115 130 144 158 171 184 200 148 149 6 7 79 78 OA3.3V OA3.3V C214 0.01U C212 0.01U C240 0.1U 33J TP610 33JX4 33JX4 33JX4 33JX4 C241 0.1U C228 0.1U C219 0.1U C242 0.1U C229 0.1U C220 0.1U C397 10U/10V<2012> C215 1U<2012> C227 0.1U 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 OA3.3V R227 R228 R229 C213 1U<2012> 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 C218 0.1U TP608 R234 SDRAM_CKE TP577 BR72 TP579 TP581 TP583 TP585 BR73 TP587 TP588 TP590 TP592 BR74 TP594 TP595 TP597 TP599 BR75 TP601 TP603 TP605 100 99 97 96 95 94 92 91 90 89 85 82 80 84 83 TP570 TP572 TP574 111 110 101 1 BR71 2 3 4 1 BR67 2 3 4 1 BR68 2 3 4 1 BR69 2 3 4 1 BR70 2 3 4 R222 R390 R225 TP561 TP563 109 107 106 105 SDRAM_CS0_L SDRAM_CS1A_L TP565 TP567 TP552 TP554 TP556 TP558 SDRAM_DQMA0 SDRAM_DQMB0 SDRAM_DQMA1 SDRAM_DQMB1 74 73 72 68 67 66 65 63 62 61 60 58 57 56 55 53 104 102 77 75 TP520 TP522 TP524 TP526 TP528 TP530 TP532 TP534 TP536 TP538 TP540 TP542 TP544 TP546 TP548 TP550 SDRAM_DATA0 SDRAM_DATA1 SDRAM_DATA2 SDRAM_DATA3 SDRAM_DATA4 SDRAM_DATA5 SDRAM_DATA6 SDRAM_DATA7 SDRAM_DATA8 SDRAM_DATA9 SDRAM_DATA10 SDRAM_DATA11 SDRAM_DATA12 SDRAM_DATA13 SDRAM_DATA14 SDRAM_DATA15 C243 0.1U C230 0.1U C221 0.1U C244 0.1U C231 0.1U C222 0.1U C396 10U/10V<2012> C211 NM C C245 0.1U C232 0.1U C223 0.1U R235 R236 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 C246 0.1U C233 0.1U C224 0.1U C226 0.1U 10KJX4 10KJX4 10KJX4 10KJX4 C251 NM C253 47P _SDRAM_CKE C303 NM 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 VCC3 L6 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA FB6 0J <1608> _SDRAM_CS0_L _SDRAM_CS1A_L BR82 1 2 3 4 BR83 1 2 3 4 BR84 1 2 3 4 BR85 1 2 3 4 C217 10U/10V<2012> _SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15 C247 0.1U C234 0.1U C225 0.1U C395 10U/10V<2012> OA3.3V VCC3 (2,4,5,12) /RESET0 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] _SDRAM_CLK SDRAM_BANK[1:0] SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] _SDRAM_CLK _SDRAM_CKE TP730 TP731 TP732 TP733 33J 4.7KJ SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L ROM_CS_L _SDRAM_CS0_L _SDRAM_CS1A_L _SDRAM_DQMA0 _SDRAM_DQMB0 _SDRAM_DQMA1 _SDRAM_DQMB1 _SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15 SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 8 33JX4 7 6 5 8 100JX4 7 6 5 8 100JX4 7 6 5 8 100JX4 7 6 5 8 100JX4 7 6 5 C NM TP728 D _SDRAM_CLK SDRAM_BANK[1:0] SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] _SDRAM_CLK SDRAM_BANK[1:0] SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] R232 VCC3 _SDRAM_DQMB0 _SDRAM_DQMB1 _SDRAM_DATA8 SDRAM_BANK[1:0] SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] D 10KJ MCU PWB (IMC2 section 1/2) (AR-M200/M201) 12P C385 NM R230 NM R233 R231 22000P C210 A 12P C386 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 29 15 _SDRAM_DQMA1 _SDRAM_DQMA0 ROM_CS_L RY_BY C265 NM _SDRAM_CLK TP925 IC39 GND GND VCC VCCW IO0 IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 IO5 IO6 IO7 IO8 IO9 IO10 IO11 IO12 IO13 IO14 IO15/A-1 TP764 TP765 TP766 TP767 TP768 TP769 TP770 TP771 TP772 TP773 TP774 TP775 TP776 TP777 TP778 TP930 _SDRAM_DQMA0 _SDRAM_DQMA1 TP926 _SDRAM_CKE _SDRAM_CS1A_L SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L TP912 _SDRAM_DQMA0 _SDRAM_DQMA1 TP791 _SDRAM_CKE 40 15 39 38 37 19 16 17 18 23 24 25 26 29 30 31 32 33 34 22 35 36 20 21 40 15 39 38 37 19 16 17 18 23 24 25 26 29 30 31 32 33 34 22 35 36 20 21 46 27 37 13 29 31 33 35 38 40 42 44 30 32 34 36 39 41 43 45 VSS VSS VSS VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VDD VDD VDD VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 DQ14 DQ15 VCC3 VSS VSS VSS VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VDD VDD VDD VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 DQ14 DQ15 HY57V561620FTP-H-C N.C LDQM UDQM CLK CKE CS WE CAS RAS A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 BA0 BA1 IC44 54 41 28 52 46 12 6 27 14 1 49 43 9 3 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 41 28 52 46 12 6 27 14 1 49 43 9 3 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 C209 0.1U 10KJ R346 VCC3 VCC3 E _SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15 VCC3 C300 0.1U C235 0.1U TP748 TP749 TP750 TP751 TP752 TP753 TP754 TP755 TP756 TP757 TP758 TP759 TP760 TP761 TP762 TP763 9/16 C256 0.1U C299 0.1U C248 0.1U C236 0.1U VPP (4) C250 0.1U C238 0.1U C263 0.1U C302 0.1U C264 0.1U C301 0.1U VCC3 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] C249 0.1U C237 0.1U VCC3 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] C208 NM NM R221 VCC3 SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] _SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15 _SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 TP809 TP810 TP901 TP902 TP909 TP910 TP911 SDRAM_ADDR0 HY57V561620FTP-H-C N.C LDQM UDQM CLK CKE CS WE CAS RAS A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 BA0 BA1 IC40 8M/16M Flash ROM BYTE WP/ACC RESET RY/BY WE OE CE A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 _SDRAM_CS0_L SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 C239 NM _SDRAM_CLK TP796 TP788 TP787 TP780 TP779 SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 TP744 TP745 11 28 26 TP808 47 14 12 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 48 17 16 9 10 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L E 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 (9) PB_NAE0 DT_ACKB (5,9) L7 C410 0.1U BLM21PG600SN1 A TP880 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 5 VCC3 IC183 TC7SH126FU 4 USB2.0 DEV1 SHIELD GND +D -D +5V CN1 UBR23-4K2200 FG 100KJ R399 (9) C274 0.01U DLW21SN900SQ2 TP908 VCC3 BLM21PG600SN1 L9 L8 R111 1MF C271 0.1U PB_NCS3 R267 NM_<1608> C404 1U<2012> TP907 GND C270 0.1U VCC3 C409 0.1U C408 0.1U (5,9) /OP_RST 1 3 B TC7SH04FU 4 2 TC7SH08FU IC43 FG (1) /RES_USB20 4 IC42 5 VCC3 2 3 5 1 VCC3 12KF R272 TP709 GND L11 0J <1608> TP708 TP703 R139 33J R310 NM R257 10KJ R254 NM VCC3 MCU PWB (IMC2 USB2.0 section 2/2) (AR-M200/M201) B NM R273 (9,13) PB_DATA[7:0] C101 1000P TP706 TP705 (9) WAKEUP (9) SUSPEND(USB2.0) VCC3 PB_NOE PB_NWE TP702 R260 10KJ 10KJ R251 0.1U 10KJ R401 10KJ R252 PB_DATA0 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA7 0J R274 TP707 R261 10KJ C266 0.1U C257 0.01U (9) TP704 C268 0.1U C259 0.01U C INT_USBD 10KJ NM DT_REQB DT_ACKB 1.5KJ R262 R258 R259 (9) (9) VCC3 C267 0.1U C258 0.01U C (5,9) (5,9) TP683 TP685 PB_NOE PB_NWE R255 10KJ VCC3 C269 0.1U ISP33 C260 0.01U ISP33 TP870 AGND RPU DP DM AGND RREF RESET_N EOT DREQ DACK DIOR DIOW DGND INTRQ READY/IORDY INT PB_NOE PB_NWE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 IC41 TP677 TP871 R253 1.2KJ VCC3 C273 18P TP783 AT-49(12MHz) X6 C272 15P GND 0.1U C403 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 ISP1583BS TP682 TP681 TP782 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 C406 10U/10V<2012> D TP675 TP701 TP695 TP694 TP693 TP692 TP691 TP690 TP689 TP688 TP687 TP686 TP684 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR0 PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 R256 TP700 TP699 TP698 TP697 TP696 10KJ VCC3 PB_ADDR7 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR3 C262 0.1U 0J <1608> TP670 L13 D C261 10U/10V<2012> ISP33 DATA10 DATA9 DATA8 DATA7 DATA6 DATA5 DATA4 VCC(I/O) DATA3 DATA2 DATA1 DATA0 ALE/A0 DGND MODE1 N.C. SUSPEND WAKEUP BUS_CONF/DA0 VCC(3V3) MODE0/DA1 DGND XTAL1 XTAL2 VCC1V8 VBUS VCC(I/O) DATA15 DATA14 DATA13 DATA12 DATA11 DA2 CS_N RW_N/RD_N DS_N/WR_N CS0_N CS1_N AD0 AD1 AD2 VCC(I/O) AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7 VCC1V8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 C405 10KJ R400 DGND DIE A 1 0.1U C370 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 30 (9,13) E PB_DATA[7:0] (9,13) PB_ADDR[7:0] 10/16 E 1 2 3 4 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 31 1 2 3 To LD A (6) (5) (6) /LDEN /VIDEO SHOLD /SYNC SPPD (8) (5) SPMT_0 SPMT_2 SPMT_1 SPMT_3 SPID (7) (7) (7) (7) (8) (8) (5) (6) 5V C275 0.1U/50V<1608> EN5V 5V 1KJ 5V 3 KDS226 D65 2 1 24VSPFMT INT5V (6) (8) (6) B PGND 24V (8) (7) (7) (7) (7) /PMD PMRDY PMCLK_A B08B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CN42 To LSU SPPD SPID SPMT_3 SPMT_1 SPMT_2 SPMT_0 (8) 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 (6) (6) 5V 200J1/4W<3216> 5V PGND (7) /SRVC (7) (7) /SPUS (8) /RSV_SOL (8) SCOD SRJD NM_<1608> 24VSPFSOL R347 To Polygon motor B05B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V) 1 2 3 4 5 CN41 B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 To RSPF unit PGND HLOUT /POFF 24V 3.3VIN CN30 PGND (White) 24V (6) (6) (8) /TC /MC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 B12B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) 5V 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN) 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 CN2 CN29 NM_<1608> C276 24VSPFMT To SPF unit R282 R278 EN5V 5V 12VIN FW /PR R140 /BIAS /GRIDL 200J1/4W<3216> INT24V 200J1/4W<3216> (6) (6) 200J1/4W<3216> (3) C KEYIN R277 C277 1000P 1KJ R276 10KJ 5V 2 1 3 LCDDB4# (5) (5) LCDRS# LCDE# LCDDB5# (5) (5) LCDDB6# (5) LCDDB7# INFOLED BL (3) (3) (5) PSL (3) (6) (LCDCONT) KDS226 D33 R290 R291 R292 R293 R294 100J 100P C317 100J 100P C347 100P C349 (LCDRS) (LCDE) (LCDDB4) 100P 100J 100P SELIN3 C359 (3) C356 (LCDDB5) 100P 100J 100P R328 C360 100J C357 100J D SELIN2 R329 R330 100P (3) SELIN1 100P (LCDDB6) (3) R365 100J C361 100J 0J 0J (LCDDB7) R398 0J R385 PSW (OP_DATA) (OP_CLK) (OP_LATCH) (5) (LCDRS) (LCDE) (LCDDB4) (LCDDB5) (LCDDB6) (LCDDB7) DRST (KEYSC3) (KEYSC2) (KEYSC1) BZR (8) (5) (5) (8) (5) (5) (5) (1) 5V C358 100J NM NM R352 R331 R295 0J 0J R350 R353 (SELIN1) (SELIN2) (SELIN3) EN5V To Operational PWB NM C363 NM C365 4 INT5V R349 NM C364 D CP10 To Power unit R141 E VCC3 1000P C278 MCU PWB (Connector section 1) (AR-M200/M201) C 0603SFF150FM/32-2 CP8 1000P C279 B E 0603SFF150FM/32-2 A 0603SFF150FM/32-2 CP9 1000P C280 (SELIN3) (SELIN2) (SELIN1) FF4-32-S15D5 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CN3 11/16 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 (6) (8) (6) (6) (8) (6) TMA_O TMB_O /SFTMT0 /SFTMT1 /SFTMT2 /SFTMT3 (7) (7) (7) (7) OUT_A+ OUT_B+ OUT_AOUT_B- (7) (7) (7) (7) A 1000P To Duplex motor (White) To Mirror motor 24VSFTMT To Toner motor To Shifter motor (White) B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 4 5 CN27 (White) B2P-VH(LF)(SN) 1 2 CN25 (Red) To VF Fan motor B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 4 CN16 (White) B4B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 4 To Main motor B5B-PASK-1(LF)(SN) B05B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 4 5 CN20 PGND PGND CN22 24VDupMT C286 1000P 1000P 1000P C285 C282 C281 (7) (7) /DMT0 /DMT1 /DMT2 /DMT3 (7) (7) (7) (7) VFMOUT FANLK /VFMCNT /MMD MMLD /MMCLK 1 2 3 4 5 B (8) (6) (6) PD1 POD PPD1 CED1 /RRS /CPFS1 24V1(DSWS) (8) (8) (8) (8) 5V 5V (Black) To Paper pass detect To Paper out detect To Paper detect (Green) B3B-PH-K-M(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 CN28 (White) B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 CN26 R286 200J1/4W<3216> (Red) B3B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 CN24 To Cassette paper solenoid (Red) To Cassette detect B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 CN21 (Blue) C To Interlock switch B2P-VH-R(LF)(SN) 1 2 CN10 To Resist roller solenoid B3B-PH-K-E(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 CN18 (White) B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 CN15 R285 200J1/4W<3216> 24V 24V PGND 0.1U/50V<1608> CN12 0.1U/50V<1608> C283 CP21 (8) (8) (8) (6) (6) PD2 CED2 PPD3 PGND /MCNT MFD (8) /CPFS2 /MPFS (6) RTH_IN (6) 5V 24V 24V CN19 (Red) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 24V (Red) NM_B3B-PH-K-R 3 2 1 CN23 (White) 5V PGND VCC3 D LT1P67A D38 TP712 (2) GASIC_READY To Mecha. COUNTER B14B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 To Multi unit To HL unit B5B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 4 5 CN14 (White) B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 4 5 CN11 To 2nd. cassette R284 200J1/4W<3216> PPD2 (8) 1000P 0J <1608> 1000P C287 4 1000P C288 C284 R283 200J1/4W<3216> 1/4W NM_<1608> 5V NM C373 24V C374 INT24V 390J MCU PWB (Connector section 2) (AR-M200/M201) R287 C289 D 2 PSFMOUT PSFANLK VCC3 LED for Checker (6) (8) NM_LT1P67A Q9 NM_KRC106S 3 (White) 1 3 5 7 9 CN17 TP713 TP710 1000P C368 2 2 4 6 8 10 VCC3 D40 E NM_LT1P67A Q10 NM_KRC106S 3 PGND (White) NM_B03B-PASK-1(LF)(SN) 3 2 1 CN35 TCK /RESET0 B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) OA_TX OA_RX VCC3 TCK /RESET0 OA_TX OA_RX B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) 1 2 3 4 CN13 To PS Fan motor (9) OA982_READY D39 VCC3 (For debug) 12/16 OA982 JTAG & Serial RxD TxD (9) TRST_L (9) TMS (9) TDO (9) TDI (9) TCK (2,4,5,9) /RESET0 (9) OA_TX (9) OA_RX (1) (1) E CPU Serial Not mounted NM C R288 B 1 TP714 TP711 NM A 1 R289 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 32 1 2 3 4 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 33 1 2 3 (1) A /CS5 TP725 100J R391 NM C378 (3) (5) /FAX_RST MSU_ST1 (1) /RES_FAX (9) B MDM_IRQ R313 100J R325 NM 2 1 KDS226 D47 2 1 VCC3 R311 1KJ 3 PB_ADDR7 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 MSU_ST1 D[15..0] 33JX4 C327 10KJ C322 10KJ C333 10KJ C326 10KJ 33JX4 33JX4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 BR90 BR89 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 BR88 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 33JX4 C321 10KJ C332 10KJ BR92 C330 10KJ C320 10KJ R315 10KJ VCC3 (1,2,3,4) 3 (9) PB_NCS1 (5) (PB_NAE0) (5) (PB_NWE) (5) (PB_NOE) KDS226 D46 (9) MODEM_IN (5) (/RD) (MDM_IRQ) 1KJ VCC3 R317 (9,10) PB_ADDR[7:0] C102 0.1U 33JX4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 C C334 NM MCU_D7 MCU_D6 MCU_D5 MCU_D4 MCU_D3 MCU_D2 MCU_D1 MCU_D0 MODEM_IN (/RD) MCU_nCS MCU_INT PB_NCS1 (PB_NAE0) (PB_NWE) (PB_NOE) (/FAX_RST) #MDM_IRQ #PB_ADDR7 #PB_ADDR6 #PB_ADDR5 #PB_ADDR4 #PB_ADDR3 #PB_ADDR2 #PB_ADDR1 #PB_ADDR0 #PB_DATA7 #PB_DATA6 #PB_DATA5 #PB_DATA4 #PB_DATA3 #PB_DATA2 #PB_DATA1 #PB_DATA0 CP11 PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 (MDM_IRQ) 24V 0603SFF150FM/32-2 C323 NM BR91 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 TP903 VCC3 CP13 C331 NM 0603SFF150FM/32-2 C324 NM PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 BR93 33JX4 5 4 6 3 7 2 8 1 5 4 6 3 7 2 8 1 C335 NM 4 L16 0J <1608> C325 NM (9,10) PB_DATA[7:0] C328 NM MCU PWB (Modem I/F Connector) (AR-M200/M201) C336 NM C (/FAX_RST) (PB_NWE) PB_NCS1 #PB_ADDR1 #PB_ADDR3 #PB_ADDR5 #PB_ADDR7 #PB_DATA1 #PB_DATA3 #PB_DATA5 #PB_DATA7 MCU_nCS MCU_D0 MCU_D2 MCU_D4 MCU_D6 MODEM_IN C329 NM B C337 NM A 40 38 36 34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 D B40B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN) 39 37 35 33 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 CN5 #MDM_IRQ (PB_NOE) (PB_NAE0) #PB_ADDR0 #PB_ADDR2 #PB_ADDR4 #PB_ADDR6 #PB_DATA0 #PB_DATA2 #PB_DATA4 #PB_DATA6 MCU_INT (/RD) MCU_D1 MCU_D3 MCU_D5 MCU_D7 To Modem PWB D PGND L14 0J <1608> 0603SFF150FM/32-2 TP904 EN5V CP12 E 13/16 E 1 2 3 4 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 34 1 2 3 (2) CL A 33P R323 15KJ C341 R324 56KJ C338 47U/35V 24V + R318 910J 1 3 Q5 2SJ537 PGND Q6 KTC3198 CP18 0603SFF150FM/32-2 2 B D49 11EQS06 TWKA-221K L12 220UH 47U/35V + C339 Copy Lamp Inverter R321 4 B R319 15KJ 0.1U/50V<1608> C340 MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section) (AR-M200/M201) A 5.6KJ1/4W<3216> VCL C C (5) mt_at_home R320 1KJ 1000P C342 R322 12KJ VCC3 2 1 KDS226 D48 3 D D AFE_SCK# ADCLK# CCD_PHI1# CCD_PHI2# CCD_CP# CCD_RS# CCD_TG# (2) AFE_DB[7..0] (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) VCL AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#6 PGND CP14 AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 0603SFF150FM/32-2 12V 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 BR87 33JX4 E 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P (5) AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#3 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#6 AFE_DB#7 VCL VSAMP# (5) (5) (5) AFE_SDI# BSAMP# AFE_SEN# AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#7 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#3 L17 1J <1608> C109C318C132C314C313C319C315C316 AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 PGND 14/16 CP15 0603SFF150FM/32-2 TP886 EN5V BR86 33JX4 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 FF4-32-S15D5 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 CN4 To Scanner unit E 1 2 3 4 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 35 B C (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) /ACK_O BUSY_O PE_O SLCT_O /FAULT_O /STB_I /AUTOFD_I /SLCTIN_I /INIT_I /REV_O 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 /ACK_O BUSY_O PE_O SLCT_O /FAULT_O /STB_I /AUTOFD_I /SLCTIN_I /INIT_I /REV_O R402 NM 8 7 6 5 8 BR94 33JX4 7 6 5 BR95 33JX4 L19 0J <1608> TP906 EN5V D 24FMN-BTK-A 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CN39 C346 0.1U C345 0.1U VCC3 To NIC PWB 0.1U C343 0.1U C344 EN5V E 15/16 E 3 4 1 TP672 TP673 TP674 TP676 TP678 TP679 TP680 TP717 L18 0J <1608> TP905 VCC3 D 1 A C 2 PARAD[7..0] 0.1U C106 0603SFF150FM/32-2 2 (2) PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 12P C388 /NIC_RST 12P C387 (5) (1) /RES_NIC 12P C389 R326 1KJ R327 NM 12P C391 3 12P C390 4 12P C392 MCU PWB (NIC I/F section) (AR-M200/M201) 12P C393 CP19 B CP20 A 12P C394 0603SFF150FM/32-2 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 36 1 2 3 4 (1) A CRUMSCL /ASIC_RST (1) CRUMSDA (5) B R337 3.3V 0J 3.3V TP883 4 1 GND B Vcc 3 2 5 2 3 5 1 4 TC7SET08F IC51 FB8 EN5V TC7SBD385AFU OE A IC49 FB9 0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608> R335 10KJ TP887 TP884 B F-GND 2 F-GND 1 5V C348 0.1U EN5V 0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608> 0.1U C350 R341 10KJ TP715 R334 NM VCC3 CRUM Control (CRUMSCL) (CRUMSDA) 5V MCU PWB (CRUM I/F section) (AR-M200/M201) A R348 FB10 24V NM 2 4 6 8 10 R279 10J EN5V (White) FB11 0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608> FB12 0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608> KDS226 D34 3 F-GND 5 F-GND 4 F-GND 3 2 1 (Red) D 2 1 KDS226 D35 3 R281 R280 D 300J 300J (CRUMSDA) (CRUMSCL) FB14 0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608> FB15 0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608> To DV Unit with CRUM (To Analog Tonner Sensor) To DV Unit (To Analog Tonner Sensor) NM_B4B-PH-K-R 1 2 3 4 CN6 B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 1 3 5 7 9 CN7 24V 0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608> TP721 PGND TCS DVSEL C TCS_AN (6) (8) (8) C F-GND 7 F-GND 6 E E 16/16 1 2 3 4 1 2 CN304 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 D-GND DRST 5V KIN2 PSW ONL PSL D-GND 5VEN OP-DATA OP-LATCH SELIN2 OP-CLK SELIN1 OP-STB SELIN3 KIN1 D-GND A 18FMN-BMTTR-A-TB or IMSA-9619S-18C-TB D-GND DRST S3B-PH-K-S 1 2 3 CN303 +5V 2 D-GND DRST 5V PSW KIN2 KIN1 OP-STB OP-CLK OP-LATCH OP-DATA SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 D-GND 5VEN PSL ONL D-GND TP1 1 1 22000PF TP49 TP50 N.M. C354 PSW 150J R409 SW16 R410 R365 150J SKQNABD010 5VEN PSL ONL 150J g1 g2 R408 R429 1kJ Q306 2SB1197K 3 TP46 TP47 TP48 C343 47uF/16V TP3 R428 10kJ R427 1kJ Q304 2SB1197K 3 C342 TP2 R426 10kJ R425 1kJ 2 e1 e2 e3 d1 d2 d3 IC304 D316 1SS133 D317 1SS133 B D319 D312 D320 1SS133 1SS133 1SS133 D318 D315 1SS133 D314 1SS133 1SS133 D311 1SS133 R413 R416 b1 b2 b3 TP7 R368 150J TP6 TP8 a1 a2 a3 TP9 R369 150J +5V R419 R417 1KJ R415 510J R414 1KJ R339 1KJ 1KJ 510J 22000PF TP40 C348 1KJ TP41 D313 1SS133 R421 R418 +5V 200PF 200PF 200PF 200PF C328 C344 C345 C346 c1 c2 c3 TP5 R367 150J LC7935AN R412 1.5KJ R378 150J TP42 TP43 TP44 TP45 R423 1.5KJ +5V R366 150J R411 1.5KJ 150J f1 f2 f3 TP10 SPFL LED69 MPL LED71 PE LTL-1LHG-002A 1KJ 1KJ N.M. N.M. C351 C353 TP55 TP56 TP57 TP52 TP54 TP39 LED73 ME LED91 ZPL LED70 DU21 LED76 RPL LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A JPL LED68 CS1L LED102 DPL LED74 EXL LED77 EXD LED78 EXN LED79 CS2L LED80 DAA1 LED81 SCNL LED92 TP12 LED89 SJAL TP13 R371 150J LED90 BPL TP15 R372 150J LED93 1ENR TP16 R420 150J LED94 TPL TP17 R379 150J TP18 LED95 3RE TP19 R422 150J LED96 2RE +5V 0.1uF N.M. C349 C352 0.1uF C350 +5V GND VCC Y W IC306 A B C G D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 8 C 74HC151 GND A B C G 74HC151 TP53 IC305 6 W D0 D1 5 Y D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 16 VCC D7 8 16 5 TP51 6 TP38 TP37 TP36 TP35 11 10 9 7 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 TP66 TP67 TP68 TP69 TP70 TP71 4 TP58 R390 TP59R389 3 TP60R388 2 TP61R387 1 15 TP62R386 14 TP63R402 13 TP64R385 12 TP65R384 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J TP21 TP23 TP24 TP20 R373 150J LED97 1RE TP34 TP33 TP32 R383 R382 R381 R407 R380 R404 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J R375 150J TP29 TP28 +5V TP31 TP30 R430 DAA2 LED99 TP25 TP26 TP27 TP22 R374 150J LED98 NOR 100J IC304 R376 150J LED101 2ENR +5V R377 150J LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHEE-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHEE-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LED67 TP11 R370 150J LED75 AE LTL-1LHEE-002A LTL-1LHEE-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LED60 DU22 LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A NM_LTL-1LHEE-002A /Q28 /Q29 15 g3 /Q21 /Q30 16 R424 10kJ 9 /Q24 LEDM 7 /Q22 VCC 63 1 c3 /Q26 /STROBE 51 3 +5V 2 d3 13 /Q27 BEO 49 LEDM 6 /Q25 /LATCH 50 Q305 2SB1197K 3 11 /Q23 S IN 30 c2 10 /Q11 CLOCK 64 d2 8 /Q9 S OUT 19 c1 42 /Q7 GND1 5 d1 TP14 40 /Q10 GND2 14 4 41 b3 38 g3 33 /Q3 GND3 35 e3 34 /Q4 GND4 44 e2 36 /Q5 GND5 62 e1 37 /Q6 b2 f3 43 /Q12 /Q32 18 R394 4.7KJ C329 1000p g2 R399 4.7KJ C336 1000p b1 f2 R406 4.7KJ C332 1000p 45 g1 R397 4.7KJ C330 1000p f1 31 /Q1 39 /Q8 /Q31 17 /Q20 4 R398 4.7KJ C338 1000p 32 /Q2 /Q19 3 /Q13 /Q18 2 R396 4.7KJ C340 1000p 46 R395 4.7KJ C331 1000p a3 C333 1000p a2 C347 1000p a1 C334 1000p OPE PWB (7SEG) (AR-203E/5420) C337 1000p 12 C C335 1000p R403 4.7KJ C339 1000p /Q14 /Q17 1 47 /Q15 /Q16 48 R401 4.7KJ R393 4.7KJ R392 4.7KJ R391 4.7KJ R400 4.7KJ R405 4.7KJ C341 1000p B D D SW18 SKQNABD010 SW24 SKQNABD010 SW23 SKQNABD010 SW22 SKQNABD010 SW19 SKQNABD010 SW30 SKQNABD010 SW25 SKQNABD010 SW20 SKQNABD010 SW21 SKQNABD010 SW26 SKQNABD010 SW27 SKQNABD010 SW28 SKQNABD010 EXMODK ZUPK ZDWK CRSK BPK 10UPK MAGK SCNK OLK CLK 1UPK CVOP SW17 SKQNABD010 EXDWK +5V SW29 SKQNABD010 1 2 3 CN305 +5V LED72 PML LED61 ONLL LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A NM_ S3B-PH-K-R (RED) 470J R363 EXUPK 470J R364 DUPK PSL ONL 5VEN R431 4.7KJ C355 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 37 NM_1000p A E E 1/1 1 2 3 4 C. OPE PWB (AR-203E/5420) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 38 1 2 3 OP-LATCH OP-DATA OP-CLK A Open C308 2 KRC106S Q302 1 3.3V R324 0J 1 3 R323 10KJ 2 3 Q303 KRA225S 2 3.3V 2 3 TP1 R326 0J Q305 KRA225S R304 100J R302 0.1u C322 R325 0J 1 3 Q304 KRA225S R303 TP11 TP13 4 5V TP14 100J 100J B TP2 TP3 LTL-1LHG-002A SCAN LED306 LTL-1LHG-002A PRINT C306 C307 1000p 1000p open C305 R305 0J R306 OPEN R327 820J open C323 TB62725AF IC304 C LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LED310 LTL-1LHG-002A BPL LED309 OPEN SJAL LED303 RPL TP4 LTL-1LHG-002A SPFL LED314 LTL-1LHEE-002A HPL LED304 FAX LED305 LTL-1LHG-002A CS2L LED307 LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LED308 CS1L LED302 COPY LED301 C 1 TP12 DATA1 LED_V3 LED_V2 LED_V1 LCDDB[7..4] LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 LCDDB7# LCDDB6# LCDDB5# LCDDB4# LCDE# LCDRS# D D PSL LCDE R333 LCDRS LCDCONT 2 R328 10kJ R332 R331 R330 R329 R334 R335 KRC106S Q307 100J C332 100p C327 100p C328 100p C329 100p C330 100p C331 100p OPERATION PWB (LED/LCD section) (AR-M200/M201) 6 LCDE# LCDDB4# LCDDB5# LCDDB6# LCDDB7# TP15 3 LCDRS# 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 0J R301 E 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GPM181C0 GND V5 VDD RS R/W E DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7 IC301 LTL-1LHG-002A PSL LED311 5VEN 1/3 To LCD ZENER_3.3V D304 R344 100J E 470J 5VEN 0.1u C338 B 5 16 /OUT0 2 TP5 VCC 7 /OUT1 TP6 S-IN 8 /OUT2 3 CLOCK 9 4 TP7 /OUT3 13 TP8 /LATCH 10 /OUT4 /ENABLE 11 /OUT5 14 TP9 S-OUT 15 TP10 /OUT6 R-EXT 12 /OUT7 GND 1 0.1u C333 A 1 2 3 4 D. OPERATION PWB (AR-M200/M201) 1 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 39 1 2 SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 5V KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 Open Open A C310 C311 Open C309 47pF C315 Open Open Open KEYIN C320 C319 BZR C318 2kJ R346 3 2kJ R347 4 B 0.1u PSW 5V 0.1u C312 C321 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 33J 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ KRC106S R317 R316 R315 R318 R338 R337 R336 2 Q306 TP25 5V 16 8 16 5 6 8 6 4 5 B Open C304 74HC151 GND VCC Y W IC302 2 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 10kJ A B C G D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 74HC238 GND G1 G2A G2B A B C VCC IC303 R339 TP16 1 TP17 2 TP18 3 TP24 3 BZ301 PS1720P02 1 SKQNABD010 PSW TP34 TP35 TP36 TP26 TP27 TP28 TP29 TP30 TP31 TP32 TP33 TP20 TP21 TP22 TP23 TP19 KEY310 11 10 9 7 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 5VEN R314 R313 R312 R311 R307 R308 R309 R310 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 1SS133 D303 1SS133 D302 1SS133 D301 OPERATION PWB (KEY / Buzzer section) (AR-M200/M201) A 2kJ R348 1 Open C337 F-KEYSC1 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC3 2kJ R342 SKQNABD010 C MENU KEY324 SKQNABD010 LK KEY325 SKQNABD010 ESRT KEY321 C Open C335 2kJ R341 F-KEYIN1 SKQNABD010 NM5K KEY319 SKQNABD010 NM8K KEY323 SKQNABD010 NM2K KEY320 Open C334 2kJ R340 F-KEYIN2 SKQNABD010 NM3K KEY317 SKQNABD010 CLK KEY318 SKQNABD010 NM6K KEY322 Open C313 2kJ R319 F-KEYIN3 SKQNABD010 ASTK KEY308 SKQNABD010 NM0K KEY309 SKQNABD010 RAT KEY316 NM9K KEY306 D Open C314 2kJ R320 F-KEYIN4 SKQNABD010 CAK KEY307 SKQNABD010 SHPK KEY315 SKQNABD010 D Open C316 2kJ R321 F-KEYIN5 SKQNABD010 EXP KEY305 SKQNABD010 ENT KEY313 SKQNABD010 RK KEY314 Open C317 2kJ R322 F-KEYIN6 SKQNABD010 NM7K KEY304 SKQNABD010 NM4K KEY311 SKQNABD010 NM1K KEY312 Open C336 E 2kJ R343 F-KEYIN7 SKQNABD010 2SIDE KEY303 SKQNABD010 BPK KEY302 SKQNABD010 MODK KEY301 E 2/3 1 2 3 4 AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 A OP-LATCH PSL PSW OP-DATA OP-CLK B C302 47uF/16v LCDDB[7..4] 0.1u C325 C301 47uF/16v 0.1u C326 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 C BM15B-GHS-TBT CN301 To FAX Key PWB F-KEYSC3 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC1 F-KEYIN7 F-KEYIN6 F-KEYIN5 F-KEYIN4 F-KEYIN2 F-KEYIN3 F-KEYIN1 LED_V3 LED_V2 LED_V1 DATA1 D S3B-PH-K-S 1 2 3 CN303 DRST E To Drum Initial Detector 3/3 3 4 1 LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 DRST SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 KEYIN KEYSC3 KEYSC2 KEYSC1 BZR LCDCONT LCDRS LCDE 0.1u C324 5VEN E 1 TP57 TP55 TP56 TP54 TP39 TP40 TP41 TP42 TP43 TP44 TP45 TP46 TP47 TP48 TP49 TP50 TP51 TP52 TP53 TP38 TP37 C303 47uF/16v 5V D 2 32FMN-BMTTR-A-TB CN302 3.3V To MCU PWB C 2 3 4 B OPERATION PWB (Connector section) (AR-M200/M201) A Open R352 [14] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 2) Select "Option" → "Serial Number Setting" on the menu bar. 3) Set the serial number according to the following. [Preparation] Write the download data (extension .dwl) into the main unit. A USB port is required for the PC. Create "MaintenanceTool" flooder in the PC, and copy the following files to the folder. Necessary for program download • Maintenance.exe (← Tool program) • ProcModelQ.fmt • ProcModelQ.mdl Driver • Drivers/Vista/Mainte.inf (For Windows Vista) • Drivers/2kXP/Mainte.inf (For Windows XP/2000) • Drivers/Win9xME/Mainte.inf (For Windows Me/98SE) • Drivers/Win9xME/UsbScan.sys (For Windows Me/98SE) Download file • Download file (extension .dwl) Note: Copy the download data file (extension .dwl) to the folder in which the maintenance program is included. When making a folder for the maintenance tool in the PC, do not put a long folder name in the absolute path. [Example] Erroneous case: c:\Mainte nance Tool Download Proper case: c:\MaintenanceTool 1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures) Product Code (P): Enter number (0 – 99) Enter the product code of "3." The serial number is set to the PC which is used for downloading. Setting is required once only, and there is no need to set again when rebooting the program. ID Code(I): Enter number (0 – 99) Assign an individual code to each PC uses "Maintenance.exe." Note: This setting is required only when downloading the default data of E2PROM, and is not required when downloading firmware only. After completion setting, press [OK]/[ENTER] key. 1) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/ 5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu. 4) (Only to set the serial number, the PC should not be connected to the machine.) 2. Download procedures 1) The serial number has been assigned. Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201 series 2) Connect machine and the PC with a USB cable. (Connect it to the USB port on the main unit without fail. 3) PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/ 5420/M200/M201 series" in the Select Model menu. AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201 series AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 1 4) PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed on the integration maintenance program. 5) PC side: When the integration maintenance program is boosted and "The copier is not turned on." is displayed at the bottom of display, select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar. 6) 8) PC side: Specify the download file (*****.dwl) to be used. 9) PC side: When a download file is specified, downloading is performed automatically. PC side: Check that trees are displayed in the "Special (MCU/ IMC2/Facsimile)" folder in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB connector is connected, and select "Reconnect" in procedure 5) again.) 10) PC side: When download is completed, the following message is displayed. 7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the main tree to develop its sub trees, and double-click "Download DWL Data Area" in the sub trees. Note: Since, however, the machine enters the download data write state, do not turn OFF the power of the machine at this moment. 11) Main unit side: Wait until "0FF" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. When "0FF" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201), download is completed. Turn OFF the power of the machine, and disconnect the USB cable. 12) Terminate the integration maintenance program, and turn ON the machine again. Download is completed with the above procedures. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 2 Note: When another machine is connected, connect the USB cable again and select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar of the integration maintenance program. Repeat the above procedures from 5). 4) PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree on the integration maintenance program. 5) PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The copier is not turned on." is displayed, select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar. 6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/ IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5). * Inhibition during download (Important) If download is failed, the next download may not be executed. Use great care not to execute the following items during download. • Never turn off the machine. • Never disconnect the download cable (USB cable). * If the above inhibition item occurs during downloading, turn OFF/ON the power. 1) When "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel, execute the download procedure again. 2) If "d" is not displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel, turn OFF the power and press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) and turn ON the power. Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel, and execute the download procedure again. If "d" is not still displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not still displayed for the AR-M200/M201), replace the MCU with a new one. 3. Version acquisition procedures 1) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel of the main unit. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/ 5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu. AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201 series AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 3 7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the main tree items to develop its sub trees. Select "Get Version" in the sub trees. 8) Check that the following display is shown. 4) PC side: Check that "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed in the integration maintenance program. 5) PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The copier is not turned on." is displayed on the lower side of the display, select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar. 6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/ IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5). With the above procedures, version acquisition is completed. • The display of "**.**" means its version is not downloaded. The downloaded versions are displayed in a version number as shown in "MCU Boot Version" and "MCU program Version". 4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure EEPROM data is acquired to the PC. Use this procedure as data maintenance of EEPROM. 1) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel of the main unit. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/ 5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu. AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201 series AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 4 7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" to develop its sub trees, and select "Upload EEPROM Data Area" in the sub trees. 5. Installing procedures <USB integration maintenance program installation> Driver installation is made on plug-and-play. <Installation on Windows Vista> 1) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 8) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) The [Found New Hardware] display is shown as below. Select [Locate and install driver software (recommended)]. PC side: Enter a desired file name, and select "Save." Note: A message to confirm the administrator of the computer is displayed. Press [Agree] button. 4) 9) The [Found New Hardware - DOWNLOAD] display is shown. Click [I don't have the disc. Show me other options.]. PC side: When upload is completed, the complete message is displayed. With the above procedure, the EEPROM data acquisition is completed. Data acquired by the EEPROM data acquisition procedure are saved in a file with extension of .eep. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 5 5) When the following display is shown, select [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)]. 8) The path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Maintenance.inf) is displayed. Press [Next] button. 6) The following display is shown. 9) When the following display is shown, select [Install this driver software anyway]. 10) When the following display is shown, close [Close] button to complete installation. 7) Press [Browse] button, specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Maintenance.inf), and press [OK] button. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 6 <Installation on Windows XP> 1) 5) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). (Suppose that the driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.) Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) The following display is shown. Select the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) and press <OK> button. Select [Install from a list or specific location] and press <Next> button. 4) 6) Check the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <Next> button. 7) When the following display is shown, press [Continue Anyway] button. Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> button to go to procedure 7). AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 7 8) When the following display is shown, installation is completed. 5) Select [Specify a location] and press <Next> button. 6) Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> button to go to procedure 9). 7) Specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <Open> button. Press <Finish> button. With the above procedures, installation (on Windows XP) of the integration maintenance program is completed. <Installation on Windows 2000> 1) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) Check that the Found New Hardware Wizard is displayed, and press <Next> button. 4) Select [Search for a suitable driver for my device] and press <Next> button. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 8 8) Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <OK> button. <Installation on Windows Me> 1) (Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) The following display is shown on the PC side. Select [Specify the location of the driver], and press <Next> button. 9) Press <Next> button to start installation. 4) Select [Specify a location], specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) as the search location, and press <Next> button. If the search location does not include the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), press <Browse> button to specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf). (Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.) 10) When the following display is shown, installation is completed. Press <Finish> button. 11) Restart the PC. With the above procedures, installation (on Windows 2000) of the integration maintenance program is completed. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 9 5) Select the folder which includes maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <OK> button. (Suppose that the driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.) 6) Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <Next> button. 7) When the following display is shown, installation is completed. Press <Finish> button. 8) Restart the PC. With the above procedures, installation (on Windows ME) of the integration maintenance program is completed. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 10 Memo Memo LEAD-FREE SOLDER The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder. The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder. Example: <Solder composition code of lead-free solder> Lead-Free 5mm Solder composition code (Refer to the table at the right.) a Solder composition Solder composition code Sn-Ag-Cu a Sn-Ag-Bi Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu b Sn-Zn-Bi z Sn-In-Ag-Bi i Sn-Cu-Ni n Sn-Ag-Sb s Bi-Sn-Ag-P Bi-Sn-Ag p (1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread. Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident. Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable. (2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220°C, which is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering is confirmed. Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently. If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip after completion of soldering work. If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer. CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT (Danish) ADVARSEL ! Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. (English) Caution ! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions. (Finnish) VAROITUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (French) ATTENTION Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant. (Swedish) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (German) Achtung Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien. Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden. Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen. CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL (For USA, CANADA) "BATTERY DISPOSAL" THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY (MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS. "TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES" CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE) QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET DE TRAITEMENT. COPYRIGHT © 2008 BY SHARP CORPORATION All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise without prior written permission of the publisher. Trademark acknowledgements • Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, and Internet Explorer® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. • Adobe®, the Adobe® logo, Acrobat®, the Adobe® PDF logo, and ReaderTM are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries. • IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. • Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. SHARP CORPORATION Digital Document System Group CS Promotion Center Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan 2008 April Printed in Japan